WO2017146153A1 - Method for manufacturing laminate and method for manufacturing semiconductor device - Google Patents

Method for manufacturing laminate and method for manufacturing semiconductor device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017146153A1
WO2017146153A1 PCT/JP2017/006846 JP2017006846W WO2017146153A1 WO 2017146153 A1 WO2017146153 A1 WO 2017146153A1 JP 2017006846 W JP2017006846 W JP 2017006846W WO 2017146153 A1 WO2017146153 A1 WO 2017146153A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
resin composition
photosensitive resin
acid
layer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2017/006846
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
悠 岩井
勝志 伊藤
ステファン ヴァンクロースター
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2018501763A priority Critical patent/JPWO2017146153A1/en
Priority to KR1020187023985A priority patent/KR102187512B1/en
Priority to CN201780012588.4A priority patent/CN108700836B/en
Publication of WO2017146153A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017146153A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B15/00Layered products comprising a layer of metal
    • B32B15/04Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B15/08Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • B32B15/088Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin comprising polyamides
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • G03F7/0387Polyamides or polyimides
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B15/00Layered products comprising a layer of metal
    • B32B15/04Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B15/08Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B15/00Layered products comprising a layer of metal
    • B32B15/20Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising aluminium or copper
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/28Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin comprising synthetic resins not wholly covered by any one of the sub-groups B32B27/30 - B32B27/42
    • B32B27/281Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin comprising synthetic resins not wholly covered by any one of the sub-groups B32B27/30 - B32B27/42 comprising polyimides
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/032Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
    • G03F7/037Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polyamides or polyimides
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/38Treatment before imagewise removal, e.g. prebaking
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/40Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/02Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/027Making masks on semiconductor bodies for further photolithographic processing not provided for in group H01L21/18 or H01L21/34
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2310/00Treatment by energy or chemical effects
    • B32B2310/14Corona, ionisation, electrical discharge, plasma treatment
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2457/00Electrical equipment
    • B32B2457/14Semiconductor wafers

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a laminate manufacturing method and a semiconductor device manufacturing method.
  • the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a laminate used for manufacturing an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer of a semiconductor device.
  • Thermosetting resins such as polyimide resins and polybenzoxazole resins are excellent in heat resistance and insulation, and thus are used for insulating layers of semiconductor devices.
  • polyimide resins and polybenzoxazole resins have low solubility in solvents, they are used in the state of a precursor (polyimide precursor or polybenzoxazole precursor) before cyclization reaction and applied to a substrate or the like. Heating to cyclize the polyimide precursor to form a cured film is also performed.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a laminate comprising a thermoplastic polyimide layer and a metal layer on the surface of the thermoplastic polyimide layer. Patent Document 1 also describes that a thermoplastic polyimide layer functions as an insulating layer.
  • thermoplastic polyimide resin described in Patent Document 1 when used as the interlayer insulating film for the rewiring layer of the semiconductor device, the top of the laminate composed of the thermoplastic polyimide layer and the metal layer on the surface of the thermoplastic polyimide layer is used. Furthermore, it is necessary to provide a thermoplastic polyimide layer. However, when it was considered to further provide a thermoplastic polyimide layer on the laminate in Patent Document 1, the adhesion between the thermoplastic polyimide layer and the metal layer, or between the thermoplastic polyimide layers is insufficient. I understood that.
  • the present invention is intended to solve such problems, and a method for producing a laminate having excellent adhesion between a resin layer containing a resin such as polyimide and a resin layer, or a resin layer and a metal layer And it aims at providing the manufacturing method of the semiconductor device containing the said manufacturing method.
  • the above problems can be solved by forming a resin layer by negative development of the photosensitive resin composition. Specifically, the above problem has been solved by the following means ⁇ 1>, preferably ⁇ 2> to ⁇ 8>.
  • An exposure process for exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer, a development process for performing a negative development process on the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer, and a photosensitive resin composition after the development process A metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the surface of the layer, and a surface activation treatment step of subjecting at least a part of the metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer to a surface activation treatment.
  • the photosensitive resin composition comprises a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a poly A resin selected from benzoxazole, and further satisfying at least one of the resin containing a polymerizable group and the photosensitive resin composition containing a polymerizable compound.
  • Method of manufacturing a layer body ⁇ 2> The method for producing a laminate according to ⁇ 1>, wherein the photosensitive resin composition layer forming step, the exposing step, and the developing step are performed 3 to 7 times in the order described above.
  • ⁇ 3> The method for producing a laminate according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, wherein the metal layer contains copper.
  • ⁇ 4> The method for producing a laminate according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the resin is a polyimide precursor or a polybenzoxazole precursor.
  • ⁇ 5> The method for producing a laminate according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the resin includes a partial structure represented by -Ar-L-Ar-; , An aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO 2 — or —NHCO -Or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above.
  • the surface activation treatment is selected from plasma treatment and corona discharge treatment.
  • ⁇ 7> The method for producing a laminate according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, wherein the photosensitive resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • a method for producing a semiconductor device comprising the method for producing a laminate according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>.
  • a method for producing a laminate having excellent adhesion between a resin layer and a resin layer, or a resin layer and a metal layer and a method for producing a semiconductor device including the production method.
  • the description of the components in the present invention described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
  • the notation which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the group which has a substituent with the group which does not have a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light, but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified.
  • the light used for exposure generally includes active rays or radiation such as an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • active rays or radiation such as an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • EUV light extreme ultraviolet rays
  • X-rays extreme ultraviolet rays
  • electron beams electron beams.
  • a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • (meth) acrylate represents both and / or “acrylate” and “methacrylate”
  • (meth) allyl means both “allyl” and “methallyl”
  • (Meth) acryl” represents either “acryl” and “methacryl” or any one
  • “(meth) acryloyl” represents both “acryloyl” and “methacryloyl”, or Represents either.
  • the term “process” not only indicates an independent process, but also if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, include.
  • solid content concentration is the mass percentage of the other component except a solvent with respect to the gross mass of a composition.
  • a weight average molecular weight (Mw) and a number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined as polystyrene conversion values measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and guard columns HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel.
  • the method for producing a laminate of the present invention includes a photosensitive resin composition layer forming step of applying a photosensitive resin composition to a substrate to form a layer, an exposure step of exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer, and the above A development process for performing a negative development process on the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer, a metal layer formation process for forming a metal layer on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the development process, and the above A surface activation treatment step of performing surface activation treatment on at least a part of the metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer, and again, the photosensitive resin composition layer formation step, the exposure step, and the development treatment.
  • the photosensitive resin composition includes a resin selected from a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a polybenzoxazole, Furthermore, the resin satisfies at least one of containing a polymerizable group and the photosensitive resin composition containing a polymerizable compound.
  • a resin selected from a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a polybenzoxazole
  • the resin satisfies at least one of containing a polymerizable group and the photosensitive resin composition containing a polymerizable compound.
  • Patent Document 1 does not have an example in which such a resin layer is laminated. In Patent Document 1, since positive development is performed and the exposed portion is alkali-developed, the adhesion tends to be insufficient.
  • the unexposed portion of the resin layer is subjected to surface activation treatment, and the photosensitive resin composition (resin layer) is easily damaged, resulting in a decrease in adhesion.
  • the negative type can form a three-dimensional crosslinked structure, can increase the strength of the film, and can be hardly damaged even by the surface activation treatment.
  • the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the photosensitive resin composition layer formation process which applies the photosensitive resin composition to a board
  • coating is preferable.
  • examples of applicable means include dip coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, wire bar coating, gravure coating, extrusion coating, spin coating, slit scanning, and inkjet. Is exemplified.
  • the spin coating method is more preferable. In the case of the spin coating method, for example, it can be applied at a rotational speed of 500 to 2000 rpm for about 10 seconds to 1 minute.
  • the thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer is preferably applied to be 0.1 to 100 ⁇ m after exposure, and more preferably 1 to 50 ⁇ m. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 2 described later, the thickness of the formed photosensitive resin composition layer is not necessarily uniform. In particular, when a photosensitive resin composition layer is provided on an uneven surface, the resin layers will have different thicknesses as shown in FIG. In particular, when a plurality of layers are laminated, a concave portion having a large depth can be formed as the concave portion. However, the present invention has a high technical value in that the delamination between layers can be more effectively suppressed with respect to such a configuration.
  • the thickness of the resin layer of the thinnest part is the said thickness.
  • the type of the substrate can be appropriately determined according to the application, but a semiconductor production substrate such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical film, ceramic material, vapor deposition film, magnetic film , Reflective films, metal substrates such as Ni, Cu, Cr, and Fe, paper, SOG (Spin On Glass), TFT (thin film transistor) array substrates, plasma display panel (PDP) electrode plates, and the like are not particularly limited.
  • a semiconductor manufacturing substrate is particularly preferable, and silicon is more preferable.
  • a resin layer or a metal layer becomes a board
  • the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention may include the process of filtering the photosensitive resin composition, before applying the photosensitive resin composition to a board
  • the filter pore diameter is preferably 1 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less.
  • a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon is preferable.
  • a filter that has been washed in advance with an organic solvent may be used.
  • a plurality of types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel.
  • filters having different pore diameters and / or materials may be used in combination.
  • various materials may be filtered a plurality of times, and the step of filtering a plurality of times may be a circulating filtration step.
  • you may pressurize and filter and the pressure to pressurize is 0.05 MPa or more and 0.3 MPa or less.
  • impurities may be removed using an adsorbent, or a combination of filter filtration and adsorbent may be used.
  • adsorbent known adsorbents can be used.
  • inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon can be used.
  • the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention may include the process of drying a solvent, after forming the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • a preferable drying temperature is 50 to 150 ° C, more preferably 70 to 130 ° C, and further preferably 90 to 110 ° C.
  • the drying time is preferably 30 seconds to 20 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes, and further preferably 3 minutes to 7 minutes.
  • the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the exposure process which exposes the said photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the exposure is not particularly defined as long as the photosensitive resin composition can be cured, but for example, it is preferable to irradiate 100 to 10,000 mJ / cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at a wavelength of 365 nm, and 200 to 8000 mJ / cm 2 irradiation. More preferably.
  • the exposure wavelength can be appropriately determined in the range of 190 to 1000 nm, and is preferably 240 to 550 nm.
  • the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the image development process process which performs negative development processing with respect to the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the image development process process which performs negative development processing with respect to the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the unexposed part is removed.
  • Development is performed using a developer.
  • the developer can be used without particular limitation as long as it can remove the unexposed part (non-exposed part).
  • esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, and ⁇ -butyrolactone.
  • alkyl alkoxyacetate eg, methyl alkoxyacetate, ethyl alkoxyacetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc. )
  • 3-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters for example, methyl 3-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkoxypropionate, etc.
  • Dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate are preferred, and cyclopentanone and ⁇ -butyrolactone are more preferred.
  • the development time is preferably 10 seconds to 5 minutes.
  • the temperature at the time of development is not particularly defined, but it can usually be carried out at 20 to 40 ° C.
  • rinsing may be further performed.
  • the rinsing is preferably performed with a solvent different from the developer. For example, it can rinse using the solvent contained in the photosensitive resin composition.
  • the rinse time is preferably 5 seconds to 1 minute.
  • the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes a heating process.
  • the heating step the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor proceeds.
  • polyimide and polybenzoxazole when heated with a crosslinking agent, a three-dimensional network structure is formed.
  • curing of the unreacted radical polymerizable compound also proceeds.
  • the maximum heating temperature is preferably 100 to 500 ° C, more preferably 140 to 400 ° C, and further preferably 160 to 350 ° C. Heating is preferably performed at a temperature rising rate of 1 to 12 ° C./min from a temperature of 20 to 150 ° C.
  • the temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20 to 150 ° C., more preferably 20 to 130 ° C., and further preferably 25 to 120 ° C.
  • the temperature at the start of heating refers to the temperature at the start of the step of heating to the maximum heating temperature.
  • the temperature is the temperature after the drying, for example, gradually from a temperature lower by 30 to 200 ° C. than the boiling point of the solvent contained in the photosensitive resin composition. It is preferable to raise the temperature to Heating is preferably performed for 10 to 360 minutes after reaching the maximum heating temperature, more preferably for 20 to 300 minutes, and particularly preferably for 30 to 240 minutes.
  • Heating may be performed in stages. As an example, the temperature is raised from 25 ° C. to 180 ° C. at 3 ° C./min, placed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes, heated from 180 to 200 ° C. at 2 ° C./minute, and placed at 200 ° C. for 120 minutes. Is mentioned. Further, it may be cooled after heating, and the cooling rate in this case is preferably 1 to 5 ° C./min.
  • the heating step is preferably performed in an atmosphere having a low oxygen concentration by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon in order to prevent decomposition of the polyimide precursor or the like.
  • the oxygen concentration is preferably 50 ppm (v / v) or less, and more preferably 20 ppm (v / v) or less.
  • the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the metal layer formation process which forms a metal layer on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after image development processing.
  • the metal layer is not particularly limited, and an existing metal species can be used. Examples thereof include copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, chromium, cobalt, gold, and tungsten, and copper and aluminum are more preferable. Is more preferable.
  • the method for forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and an existing method can be applied. For example, the methods described in JP 2007-157879 A, JP 2001-521288 A, JP 2004-214501 A, and JP 2004-101850 A can be used.
  • the thickness of the metal layer is preferably 0.1 to 50 ⁇ m, more preferably 1 to 10 ⁇ m at the thickest portion.
  • the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the surface activation process process of carrying out the surface activation process of at least one part of the said metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer.
  • the surface activation treatment step is usually performed after the metal layer formation step, but after the exposure and development step, the surface activation treatment step is performed on the photosensitive resin composition layer, and then the metal layer formation step is performed. Good.
  • the surface activation treatment may be performed only on at least a part of the metal layer, or may be performed only on at least a part of the photosensitive resin composition layer after exposure, or the metal layer and the photosensitive resin after exposure. You may go to at least one part about both of a composition layer, respectively.
  • the surface activation treatment is preferably performed on at least a part of the metal layer, and the surface activation treatment is preferably performed on a part or all of the region of the metal layer where the photosensitive resin composition layer is formed on the surface. .
  • the surface activation treatment is also preferably performed on part or all of the photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) after exposure.
  • the unexposed portion is subjected to a surface activation treatment, and the photosensitive resin composition (resin layer) is easily damaged, resulting in a decrease in adhesion.
  • the exposed portion is subjected to a surface treatment, and the strength of the film is improved by curing or the like, so that the photosensitive resin composition (resin layer) is not damaged, There is no such problem.
  • the surface activation treatment includes plasma treatment of various source gases (oxygen, hydrogen, argon, nitrogen, nitrogen / hydrogen mixed gas, argon / oxygen mixed gas, etc.), corona discharge treatment, CF 4 / O 2.
  • UV ultraviolet
  • the energy is preferably 500 ⁇ 200,000J / m 2, more preferably 1000 ⁇ 100,000J / m 2, and most preferably 10,000 ⁇ 50,000J / m 2.
  • the manufacturing method of the present invention further includes the following lamination steps.
  • a lamination process is a series of processes including performing the said photosensitive resin composition layer formation process, the said exposure process, and the said image development process again in the said order again. That is, it goes without saying that the laminating step may further include the drying step and the heating step.
  • the lamination process is further performed after the lamination process, it is preferable that the surface activation treatment process is further performed after the exposure process or after the metal layer formation process.
  • the lamination step is preferably performed 3 to 7 times, more preferably 3 to 5 times.
  • the resin layer / metal layer / resin layer / metal layer / resin layer / metal layer has a resin layer structure of 3 to 7 layers, more preferably 3 to 5 layers.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) and a metal layer can be laminated
  • the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention is a resin selected from a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a polybenzoxazole (hereinafter referred to as “polybenzoxazole”). It is preferable that a polyimide precursor or a polybenzoxazole precursor is included, and a polyimide precursor is more preferable. Furthermore, it satisfies at least one of a resin such as a polyimide precursor containing a polymerizable group and a case where the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymerizable compound.
  • a resin such as a polyimide precursor contains a polymerizable group
  • the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymerizable compound.
  • a three-dimensional network is formed in the exposed area, and a strong cross-linked film is formed.
  • the photosensitive resin composition (resin layer) is not damaged by the surface activation treatment, and the surface activation treatment , Adhesion is more effectively improved.
  • the resin such as a polyimide precursor includes a partial structure represented by —Ar—L—Ar—.
  • Ar is each independently an aromatic group
  • L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably an alkylene group) which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO 2 — or —NHCO—, or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above.
  • Ar is preferably a phenylene group
  • L is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S— or —SO 2 —.
  • the polyimide precursor used in the present invention is not particularly defined in terms of its type and the like, but preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (2).
  • a 1 and A 2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH
  • R 111 represents a divalent organic group
  • R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group
  • R 113 And R 114 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • a 1 and A 2 in Formula (2) each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH, and preferably an oxygen atom.
  • R 111 in Formula (2) represents a divalent organic group.
  • the divalent organic group include a straight chain or branched aliphatic group, a group containing a cyclic aliphatic group and an aromatic group, a straight chain or branched aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a carbon number A group consisting of a cyclic aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms or a combination thereof is preferable, and a group containing an aromatic group having 6 to 60 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • a group represented by —Ar—L—Ar— is exemplified.
  • Ar is each independently an aromatic group
  • L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—. , —SO 2 — or —NHCO—, or a group comprising a combination of two or more of the above.
  • R 111 is preferably derived from a diamine.
  • the diamine used in the production of the polyimide precursor include linear or branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic or aromatic diamine.
  • One type of diamine may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • a diamine containing is preferable, and a diamine containing a group consisting of an aromatic group having 6 to 60 carbon atoms is more preferable. The following are mentioned as an example of an aromatic group.
  • A is a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —S—, —S ( ⁇ O) 2 — and —NHCO—, and a group selected from these combinations are preferable, a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O It is more preferably a group selected from —, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —S—, —SO 2 —, —CH 2 —, —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —C More preferably, it is a divalent group selected from the group consisting of (CF 3 ) 2 — and —C (CH 3 ) 2 —.
  • diamine examples include 1,2-diaminoethane, 1,2-diaminopropane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,4-diaminobutane and 1,6-diaminohexane; 1,2- or 1 , 3-diaminocyclopentane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-diaminocyclohexane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-bis (aminomethyl) cyclohexane, bis- (4- Aminocyclohexyl) methane, bis- (3-aminocyclohexyl) methane, 4,4′-diamino-3,3′-dimethylcyclohexylmethane and isophoronediamine; m- or p-phenylenediamine, diaminotoluene, 4,4′- Or 3,3′-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4′-diaminodiphenyl
  • diamines (DA-1) to (DA-18) shown below are also preferable.
  • a diamine having at least two alkylene glycol units in the main chain is also a preferred example.
  • Preferred is a diamine containing at least two ethylene glycol chains or propylene glycol chains in one molecule, more preferably a diamine containing no aromatic ring.
  • Specific examples include Jeffermin (registered trademark) KH-511, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-600, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-900, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-2003, Jeffermin (registered trademark).
  • EDR-148 Jeffamine (registered trademark) EDR-176, D-200, D-400, D-2000, D-4000 (trade name, manufactured by HUNTSMAN Co., Ltd.), 1- (2- (2- (2-aminopropoxy) ethoxy) propoxy) propan-2-amine, 1- (1- (1- (2-aminopropoxy) propan-2-yl) oxy) propan-2-amine, and the like. It is not limited to.
  • x, y, and z are average values.
  • R 111 is preferably represented by —Ar—L—Ar— from the viewpoint of the flexibility of the resulting cured film.
  • Ar is each independently an aromatic group
  • L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably an alkylene group) which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO 2 — or —NHCO—, or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above.
  • Ar is preferably a phenylene group
  • L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S— or —SO 2 —. preferable.
  • R 111 is preferably a divalent organic group represented by the following formula (51) or formula (61) from the viewpoint of i-line transmittance.
  • a divalent organic group represented by the formula (61) is more preferable.
  • R 10 to R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 10 to R 17 is a fluorine atom, a methyl group or trifluoro It is a methyl group.
  • Examples of the monovalent organic group represented by R 10 to R 17 include an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms) and an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples include a fluorinated alkyl group.
  • Formula (61) In formula (61), R 18 and R 19 are each independently a fluorine atom or a trifluoromethyl group.
  • Examples of the diamine compound having the structure of the formula (51) or (61) include 2,2′-dimethylbenzidine, 2,2′-bis (trifluoromethyl) -4,4′-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2′- Bis (fluoro) -4,4′-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4′-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl and the like can be mentioned. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • R 115 in the formula (2) represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • a tetravalent organic group containing an aromatic ring is preferable, and a group represented by the following formula (5) or formula (6) is more preferable.
  • R 112 represents a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO.
  • R 115 include a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of the anhydride group from tetracarboxylic dianhydride. Only one tetracarboxylic dianhydride may be used, or two or more tetracarboxylic dianhydrides may be used.
  • the tetracarboxylic dianhydride is preferably represented by the following formula (0).
  • a preferred range of R 115 has the same meaning as R 115 in formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • tetracarboxylic dianhydride examples include pyromellitic dianhydride (PMDA), 3,3 ′, 4,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′- Diphenyl sulfide tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-diphenylsulfone tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-benzophenone tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′ , 4,4′-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2 ′, 3,3′-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3 ′, 4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3 ′, 4′-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4′-PM
  • tetracarboxylic dianhydrides (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) shown below are also preferable examples.
  • R 111 and R 115 has an OH group. More specifically, examples of R 111 include a residue of a bisaminophenol derivative.
  • R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 113 and R 114 preferably contains a polymerizable group, and more preferably both contain a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group is a group capable of undergoing a crosslinking reaction by the action of heat, radicals, etc., and is preferably a photoradical polymerizable group.
  • Specific examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, alkoxymethyl group, hydroxymethyl group, acyloxymethyl group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, benzoxazolyl group, blocked isocyanate group, methylol group, amino group. Groups.
  • the radical polymerizable group possessed by the polyimide precursor or the like is preferably a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, a group represented by the following formula (III), and the like.
  • R 200 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and a methyl group is more preferable.
  • R 201 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, —CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 — or a polyoxyalkylene group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • suitable R 201 are ethylene group, propylene group, trimethylene group, tetramethylene group, 1,2-butanediyl group, 1,3-butanediyl group, pentamethylene group, hexamethylene group, octamethylene group, dodecamethylene group.
  • R 200 is a methyl group and R 201 is an ethylene group.
  • R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • the monovalent organic group include an aromatic group and an aralkyl group having one, two, or three, preferably one acidic group bonded to carbon constituting the aryl group.
  • Specific examples include an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms having an acidic group and an aralkyl group having 7 to 25 carbon atoms having an acidic group. More specifically, a phenyl group having an acidic group and a benzyl group having an acidic group can be mentioned.
  • the acidic group is preferably an OH group.
  • R 113 or R 114 is preferably a hydrogen atom, 2-hydroxybenzyl, 3-hydroxybenzyl and 4-hydroxybenzyl.
  • R 113 or R 114 is preferably a monovalent organic group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic. Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a dodecyl group, a tetradecyl group, and an octadecyl group.
  • Isopropyl isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, 1-ethylpentyl, 2-ethylhexyl, 2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy, 2- (2- ( 2-ethoxyethoxy) ethoxy) ethoxy) ethoxy group, 2- (2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy) ethoxy) ethoxy group, and 2- (2- (2- (2- (2-ethoxyethoxy) Ethoxy) ethoxy group.
  • the cyclic alkyl group may be a monocyclic cyclic alkyl group or a polycyclic cyclic alkyl group.
  • Examples of the monocyclic alkyl group include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cycloheptyl group, and a cyclooctyl group.
  • Examples of the polycyclic alkyl group include an adamantyl group, a norbornyl group, a bornyl group, a camphenyl group, a decahydronaphthyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a camphoroyl group, a dicyclohexyl group, and a pinenyl group. Is mentioned. Among these, a cyclohexyl group is most preferable from the viewpoint of achieving high sensitivity. Moreover, as an alkyl group substituted by the aromatic group, the linear alkyl group substituted by the aromatic group mentioned later is preferable.
  • aromatic group examples include substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pentalene ring, indene ring, azulene ring, heptalene ring, indacene ring, perylene ring, pentacene ring, acenaphthene ring, phenanthrene ring, anthracene.
  • the polyimide precursor when R 113 is a hydrogen atom, or when R 114 is a hydrogen atom, the polyimide precursor forms a counter salt with a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. Also good. Examples of such tertiary amine compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include N, N-dimethylaminopropyl methacrylate.
  • the polyimide precursor preferably has a fluorine atom in the structural unit.
  • the fluorine atom content in the polyimide precursor is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide precursor may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure.
  • the diamine component include bis (3-aminopropyl) tetramethyldisiloxane and bis (p-aminophenyl) octamethylpentasiloxane.
  • the repeating unit represented by the formula (2) is preferably a repeating unit represented by the formula (2-A). That is, at least one of the polyimide precursors and the like used in the present invention is preferably a precursor having a repeating unit represented by the formula (2-A). By adopting such a structure, it becomes possible to further widen the width of the exposure latitude.
  • a 1 and A 2 each represent an oxygen atom
  • R 111 and R 112 each independently represent a divalent organic group
  • R 113 and R 114 each independently represent It represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • at least one of R 113 and R 114 is a group containing a polymerizable group, and preferably both are a polymerizable group.
  • a 1, A 2, R 111 , R 113 and R 114 are each independently the same meaning as A 1, A 2, R 111 , R 113 and R 114 in formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same .
  • R 112 has the same meaning as R 112 in formula (5), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • the polyimide precursor may contain one type of repeating structural unit represented by the formula (2), but may contain two or more types. Moreover, the structural isomer of the repeating unit represented by Formula (2) may be included. Needless to say, the polyimide precursor may contain other types of repeating structural units in addition to the repeating unit of the above formula (2).
  • polyimide precursor in the present invention there is a polyimide precursor in which 50 mol% or more, further 70 mol% or more, particularly 90 mol% or more of all repeating units are repeating units represented by the formula (2). Illustrated.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 18,000 to 30,000, more preferably 20,000 to 27,000, and further preferably 22,000 to 25,000.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, and still more preferably 9,200 to 11,200.
  • the dispersion degree of the polyimide precursor is preferably 2.5 or more, more preferably 2.7 or more, and further preferably 2.8 or more.
  • the upper limit of the degree of dispersion of the polyimide precursor is not particularly defined, but is, for example, preferably 4.5 or less, more preferably 4.0 or less, still more preferably 3.8 or less, still more preferably 3.2 or less, 3.1 or less is even more preferable, 3.0 or less is even more preferable, and 2.95 or less is particularly preferable.
  • the polyimide used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imide ring, but is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (4), and a compound represented by the formula (4) And it is more preferable that it is a compound which has a polymeric group.
  • R 131 represents a divalent organic group
  • R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • the polymerizable group may be located in at least one of R 131 and R 132 , or as shown in the following formula (4-1) or formula (4-2), May be located.
  • R 133 is a polymerizable group, and other groups are as defined in the formula (4).
  • Formula (4-2) At least one of R 134 and R 135 is a polymerizable group. When it is not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups have the same meanings as in formula (4).
  • a polymerizable group is synonymous with the polymerizable group described in the polymerizable group which said polyimide precursor etc. have.
  • R 131 represents a divalent organic group. Examples of the divalent organic group include those similar to R 111 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same. As the R 131, include diamine residues remaining after removal of the amino groups of the diamine. Examples of the diamine include aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic diamines. As a specific example, an example of R 111 in the formula (2) of the polyimide precursor can be given.
  • R 131 is preferably a diamine residue having at least two alkylene glycol units in the main chain from the viewpoint of more effectively suppressing the occurrence of warpage during firing. More preferred is a diamine residue containing at least two ethylene glycol chains or propylene glycol chains in one molecule, and more preferred is a diamine residue containing no aromatic ring.
  • Examples of diamines containing two or more ethylene glycol chains and / or propylene glycol chains in one molecule include Jeffamine (registered trademark) KH-511, Jeffamine (registered trademark) ED-600, Jeffamine ( (Registered trademark) ED-900, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-2003, Jeffermin (registered trademark) EDR-148, Jeffermin (registered trademark) EDR-176, D-200, D-400, D-2000, D -4000 (trade name, manufactured by HUNTSMAN Co., Ltd.), 1- (2- (2- (2- (2-aminopropoxy) ethoxy) propoxy) propan-2-amine, 1- (1- (1- (2-amino) Propoxy) propan-2-yl) oxy) propan-2-amine, 1- (2- (2- (2-aminopropoxy) Ethoxy) propoxy) the like-2-amine include, but are not limited to.
  • R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • examples of the tetravalent organic group include those similar to R 115 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • four bonds of a tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 115 are bonded to four —C ( ⁇ O) — moieties in the above formula (4) to form a condensed ring.
  • R 132 examples include a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of the anhydride group from tetracarboxylic dianhydride. Specific examples include those exemplified R 115 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor. From the viewpoint of the strength of the cured film, R 132 is preferably an aromatic diamine residue having 1 to 4 aromatic rings.
  • R 131 and R 132 has an OH group. More specifically, as R 131 , 2,2-bis (3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl) hexafluoropropane, 2,2- Preferred examples include bis (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) hexafluoropropane, and (DA-1) to (DA-18) above. As R 132 , the above-mentioned (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) are mentioned as preferred examples.
  • the polyimide has a fluorine atom in the structural unit.
  • the content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide is preferably 10% by mass or more, and preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the polyimide may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure.
  • the diamine component include bis (3-aminopropyl) tetramethyldisiloxane and bis (p-aminophenyl) octamethylpentasiloxane.
  • the end of the main chain of the polyimide may be sealed with a terminal blocking agent such as a monoamine, acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, or monoactive ester compound.
  • a terminal blocking agent such as a monoamine, acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, or monoactive ester compound.
  • a monoamine e.g., aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, and 1-hydroxy-7.
  • -Aminonaphthalene 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2, -Hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6- Aminonaphthalene, 2-carbo Ci-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino Benzenesulfonic acid, 4-amino
  • the polyimide preferably has an imidization ratio of 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more.
  • the imidization ratio is 85% or more, film shrinkage due to ring closure that occurs when imidization is performed by heating is reduced, and generation of warpage can be suppressed.
  • the polyimide may contain repeating units based on two or more different types of these groups in addition to the repeating structural unit of the above formula (4) all based on one kind of R 131 or R 132 .
  • the polyimide may also contain other types of repeating structural units in addition to the repeating unit of the above formula (4).
  • polyimide can be prepared by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride with a diamine compound (partially replaced with a monoamine end-capping agent) at low temperature, or tetracarboxylic dianhydride (partially acid at low temperature).
  • the polyimide precursor is obtained using a method such as a method of reacting with an end-capping agent that is a known method.
  • a method of complete imidization using the imidation reaction method a method of stopping the imidization reaction in the middle and introducing a part of an imide structure, and further blending a completely imidized polymer and its polyimide precursor By some things, it can synthesize
  • Examples of commercially available polyimide products include Durimide (registered trademark) 284 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) and Matrimid 5218 (manufactured by HUNTSMAN Co., Ltd.).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and still more preferably 10,000 to 30,000.
  • the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more.
  • the weight average molecular weight of at least 1 type of polyimide is the said range.
  • the polybenzoxazole precursor used in the present invention is not particularly defined with respect to its structure and the like, but is preferably represented by the following formula (3).
  • R 121 represents a divalent organic group
  • R 122 represents a tetravalent organic group
  • R 123 and R 124 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • R 123 and R 124 have the same meaning as R 113 in the formula (2), respectively, and the preferred range is also the same. That is, at least one is preferably a polymerizable group.
  • R 121 represents a divalent organic group.
  • the divalent organic group is preferably a group containing at least one of an aliphatic group and an aromatic group. As the aliphatic group, a linear aliphatic group is preferable.
  • R 121 is preferably a dicarboxylic acid residue. Only one type of dicarboxylic acid residue may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • dicarboxylic acid a dicarboxylic acid containing an aliphatic group and a dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group are preferred, and a dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group is more preferred.
  • dicarboxylic acid containing an aliphatic group a dicarboxylic acid containing a linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic group is preferable, and a linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic group and two COOHs are used. More preferred is a dicarboxylic acid.
  • the linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 25 carbon atoms, still more preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms. 15 is more preferable, and 5 to 10 is particularly preferable.
  • the linear aliphatic group is preferably an alkylene group.
  • dicarboxylic acid containing a linear aliphatic group examples include malonic acid, dimethylmalonic acid, ethylmalonic acid, isopropylmalonic acid, di-n-butylmalonic acid, succinic acid, tetrafluorosuccinic acid, methylsuccinic acid, 2, 2-dimethylsuccinic acid, 2,3-dimethylsuccinic acid, dimethylmethylsuccinic acid, glutaric acid, hexafluoroglutaric acid, 2-methylglutaric acid, 3-methylglutaric acid, 2,2-dimethylglutaric acid, 3,3-dimethylglutaric acid, 3-ethyl-3-methylglutaric acid, adipic acid, octafluoroadipic acid, 3-methyladipic acid, pimelic acid, 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpimelic acid, suberin Acid, dodecafluorosuberic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, hexade
  • Z is a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and n is an integer of 1 to 6)
  • the dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group is preferably a dicarboxylic acid having the following aromatic group, more preferably a dicarboxylic acid comprising only the following aromatic group and two COOH.
  • A represents —CH 2 —, —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, and —C (CH 3 ) 2 —.
  • dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group examples include 4,4'-carbonyldibenzoic acid, 4,4'-dicarboxydiphenyl ether, and terephthalic acid.
  • R 122 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • the tetravalent organic group has the same meaning as R 115 in the formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R 122 is preferably a group derived from a bisaminophenol derivative.
  • Examples of the group derived from a bisaminophenol derivative include 3,3′-diamino-4,4′-dihydroxybiphenyl, 4,4 ′ -Diamino-3,3'-dihydroxybiphenyl, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxydiphenylsulfone, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dihydroxydiphenylsulfone, bis- (3-amino- 4-hydroxyphenyl) methane, 2,2-bis- (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) propane, 2,2-bis- (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis -(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) hexafluoropropane, bis- (4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) methane, 2,2 -Bis- (4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) propane, 4,4'-diamino
  • bisaminophenol derivatives having the following aromatic groups are preferred.
  • X 1 represents —O—, —S—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, —CH 2 —, —SO 2 —, —NHCO—.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, alkylene, substituted alkylene, —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, a single bond, or the following formula (A— an organic group selected from the group of sc).
  • R 2 is any one of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and a cyclic alkyl group, and may be the same or different.
  • R 3 is a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, or a cyclic alkyl group, and may be the same or different.
  • R 2 is an alkyl group and R 3 is an alkyl group, which means that it has high transparency to i-line and a high cyclization rate when cured at low temperature. The effect can be maintained and is preferable.
  • R 1 is alkylene or substituted alkylene.
  • alkylene and substituted alkylene according to R 1 include —CH 2 —, —CH (CH 3 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) 2 —, —CH (CH 2 CH 3 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 3 )-, -C (CH 2 CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 3 )-, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 )-, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) —, —CH (CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) (CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) —, —CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) (CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) —, —CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) (CH (CH 3 ) (CH (CH 3
  • the polybenzoxazole precursor may contain other types of repeating structural units in addition to the repeating unit of the above formula (3). It is preferable that the diamine residue represented by the following formula (SL) is included as another type of repeating structural unit in that the occurrence of warpage accompanying ring closure can be suppressed.
  • SL diamine residue represented by the following formula
  • Z has an a structure and a b structure
  • R 1s is a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms
  • R 2s is a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • at least one of R 3s , R 4s , R 5s and R 6s is an aromatic group, and the remainder is a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, which may be the same or different.
  • the polymerization of the a structure and the b structure may be block polymerization or random polymerization.
  • the mol% of the Z moiety is 5 to 95 mol% for the a structure, 95 to 5 mol% for the b structure, and a + b is 100 mol%.
  • preferred Z includes those in which R 5s and R 6s in the b structure are phenyl groups.
  • the molecular weight of the structure represented by the formula (SL) is preferably 400 to 4,000, and more preferably 500 to 3,000.
  • a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of the anhydride group from the tetracarboxylic dianhydride is included as a repeating structural unit. Is also preferable. Examples of such tetracarboxylic acid residue, and examples of R 115 in formula (2).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polybenzoxazole precursor is, for example, preferably 18,000 to 30,000, more preferably 20,000 to 29,000 when used in the composition described below. It is preferably 22,000 to 28,000.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, and still more preferably 9,200 to 11,200.
  • the degree of dispersion of the polybenzoxazole precursor is preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and further preferably 1.6 or more.
  • the upper limit value of the degree of dispersion of the polybenzoxazole precursor is not particularly defined, but is preferably 2.6 or less, more preferably 2.5 or less, further preferably 2.4 or less, and more preferably 2.3 or less. Preferably, 2.2 or less is even more preferable.
  • the polybenzoxazole is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having a benzoxazole ring, but is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (X), and a compound represented by the following formula (X) And it is more preferable that it is a compound which has a polymeric group.
  • R 133 represents a divalent organic group
  • R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • the polymerizable group may be located in at least one of R 133 and R 134 , or polybenzoxazole as shown in the following formula (X-1) or formula (X-2) It may be located at the end of.
  • Formula (X-1) In formula (X-1), at least one of R 135 and R 136 is a polymerizable group, and when not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups are as defined in formula (X).
  • the polymerizable group has the same meaning as the polymerizable group described in the polymerizable group possessed by the polyimide precursor or the like.
  • R 133 represents a divalent organic group.
  • the divalent organic group include an aliphatic or aromatic group.
  • Specific examples include R 121 in the polybenzoxazole precursor (3).
  • the preferable example is the same as that of R121 .
  • R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group.
  • a tetravalent organic group the example of R122 in Formula (3) of a polybenzoxazole precursor is mentioned.
  • the preferable example is the same as that of R122 .
  • four bonds of a tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 122 are bonded to a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom in the above formula (X) to form a condensed ring.
  • R 134 is the following organic group, the following structure is formed.
  • Polybenzoxazole preferably has an oxazolation rate of 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more.
  • the oxazolation rate is 85% or more, film shrinkage due to ring closure that occurs when oxazolation is performed by heating is reduced, and the occurrence of warpage can be more effectively suppressed.
  • Polybenzoxazoles In addition to all the repeating structural units of the formula based on one R 131 or R 132 (X), the table in the above formula (X) comprising two or more different types of R 131 or R 132 May be included.
  • the polybenzoxazole may also contain other types of repeating structural units in addition to the repeating unit of the above formula (X).
  • Polybenzoxazole is obtained, for example, by reacting a bisaminophenol derivative with a dicarboxylic acid containing R 133 or a compound selected from dicarboxylic acid dichloride and dicarboxylic acid derivative of the above dicarboxylic acid to obtain a polybenzoxazole precursor.
  • This can be obtained by oxazolation using a known oxazolation reaction method.
  • dicarboxylic acid an active ester type dicarboxylic acid derivative obtained by reacting 1-hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole or the like in advance may be used in order to increase the reaction yield or the like.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of polybenzoxazole is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and still more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the bending resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain a cured film having excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more. Moreover, when it contains 2 or more types of polybenzoxazole, it is preferable that the weight average molecular weight of at least 1 type of polybenzoxazole is the said range.
  • a polyimide precursor or the like is obtained by reacting a dicarboxylic acid or a dicarboxylic acid derivative with a diamine. Preferably, it is obtained by halogenating a dicarboxylic acid or a dicarboxylic acid derivative with a halogenating agent and then reacting with a diamine.
  • an organic solvent is preferably used for the reaction.
  • One or more organic solvents may be used.
  • the organic solvent can be appropriately determined according to the raw material, and examples thereof include pyridine, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (diglyme), N-methylpyrrolidone and N-ethylpyrrolidone.
  • Polyimide may be produced by synthesizing a polyimide precursor and then cyclized by heating, or may be synthesized directly.
  • End sealant In order to further improve the storage stability in the production method of the polyimide precursor, etc., the end of the polyimide precursor etc. is terminated with an end-capping agent such as an acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, monoactive ester compound, etc. It is preferable to seal.
  • an end-capping agent such as an acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, monoactive ester compound, etc. It is preferable to seal.
  • monoamine As the end-capping agent, it is more preferable to use monoamine, and preferable monoamine compounds include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1- Hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-amino Naphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy -6-aminonaphthalene, 2- Ruboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzo
  • Solid precipitation When manufacturing a polyimide precursor etc., the process of depositing a solid may be included. Specifically, solid precipitation can be achieved by precipitating a polyimide precursor or the like in the reaction solution in water and dissolving the polyimide precursor or the like such as tetrahydrofuran in a soluble solvent. Then, a polyimide precursor etc. can be dried and a powdery polyimide precursor etc. can be obtained.
  • the composition used in the present invention may contain only one of polyimide precursor, polyimide, polybenzoxazole precursor and polybenzoxazole, or may contain two or more. Also, two or more types of polyimide precursors may be included, which are the same type of resin and have different structures.
  • the content of the polyimide precursor or the like in the composition used in the present invention is preferably 10 to 99% by mass, more preferably 50 to 98% by mass, and further preferably 70 to 96% by mass.
  • components that can be contained in the composition used in the present invention will be described. It goes without saying that the present invention may contain components other than these, and these components are not essential.
  • resin such as a polyimide precursor
  • the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymeric compound.
  • the polymerizable compound is a compound having a polymerizable group, and a known compound that can be crosslinked by a radical, an acid, a base, or the like can be used.
  • the polymerizable group include the polymerizable groups described in the above-mentioned polyimide precursor and the like.
  • the polymerizable compound may contain only 1 type, and may contain 2 or more types.
  • the polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as, for example, a monomer, a prepolymer, an oligomer and a mixture thereof, and a multimer thereof.
  • a monomer type polymerizable compound (hereinafter also referred to as a polymerizable monomer) is a compound different from a polymer compound.
  • the polymerizable monomer is typically a low molecular compound, preferably a low molecular compound having a molecular weight of 2,000 or less, more preferably a low molecular compound having a molecular weight of 1,500 or less, and a molecular weight of 900 or less. More preferably, it is a low molecular weight compound.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable monomer is usually 100 or more.
  • the oligomer type polymerizable compound is typically a polymer having a relatively low molecular weight, and is preferably a polymer in which 10 to 100 polymerizable monomers are bonded.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the oligomer type polymerizable compound is preferably 2,000 to 20,000, more preferably 2,000 to 15,000, and most preferably 2,000 to 10,000.
  • the number of functional groups of the polymerizable compound in the present invention means the number of polymerizable groups in one molecule.
  • the polymerizable compound preferably contains at least one bifunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound containing two or more polymerizable groups, and preferably contains at least one trifunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound. More preferred.
  • the polymeric compound in this invention contains at least 1 sort (s) of polymeric compounds more than trifunctional from the point that a three-dimensional crosslinked structure can be formed and heat resistance can be improved.
  • a mixture of a bifunctional or lower polymerizable compound and a trifunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound may be used.
  • ⁇ Compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond a styryl group, a vinyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group and a (meth) allyl group are preferable, and a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable.
  • the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), esters thereof, amides, and the like.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acids for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters thereof for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters thereof for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters thereof for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters thereof for example,
  • reaction products of monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies with unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxy group, amino group, mercapto group, etc., monofunctional or polyfunctional A dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used.
  • an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a detachable substituent such as thiol or tosyloxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable.
  • esters of polyhydric alcohol compounds and unsaturated carboxylic acids include acrylic acid esters such as ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, and tetramethylene glycol diacrylate.
  • Methacrylic acid esters include tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, trimethylolethane trimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, 1,3-butanediol dimethacrylate, Hexanediol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol dimethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, sorbitol trimethacrylate, sorbitol tetramethacrylate, bis [p- (3-methacryloxy- 2-hydroxyp Epoxy) phenyl] dimethyl methane, bis - [p- (me
  • Itaconic acid esters include ethylene glycol diitaconate, propylene glycol diitaconate, 1,3-butanediol diitaconate, 1,4-butanediol diitaconate, tetramethylene glycol diitaconate, pentaerythritol diitaconate Sorbitol tetritaconate and the like.
  • crotonic acid esters examples include ethylene glycol dicrotonate, tetramethylene glycol dicrotonate, pentaerythritol dicrotonate, and sorbitol tetradicrotonate.
  • isocrotonic acid esters examples include ethylene glycol diisocrotonate, pentaerythritol diisocrotonate, and sorbitol tetraisocrotonate.
  • maleic acid esters examples include ethylene glycol dimaleate, triethylene glycol dimaleate, pentaerythritol dimaleate, and sorbitol tetramaleate.
  • esters examples include aliphatic alcohol esters described in JP-B-46-27926, JP-B-51-47334, JP-A-57-196231, and JP-A-59-5240. No. 1, JP-A-59-5241, JP-A-2-226149, those having an aromatic skeleton, those having an amino group described in JP-A-1-165613, etc. are preferably used. It is done.
  • amide monomers of polyvalent amine compounds and unsaturated carboxylic acids include methylene bis-acrylamide, methylene bis-methacrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bis-acrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bis-methacrylic.
  • examples include amide, diethylenetriamine trisacrylamide, xylylene bisacrylamide, and xylylene bismethacrylamide.
  • Examples of other preferable amide monomers include those having a cyclohexylene structure described in JP-B No. 54-21726.
  • urethane-based addition-polymerizable monomers produced using an addition reaction of isocyanate and hydroxyl group are also suitable.
  • Specific examples thereof include, for example, one molecule described in JP-B-48-41708.
  • Examples thereof include a vinylurethane compound containing two or more polymerizable vinyl groups in one molecule obtained by adding a vinyl monomer containing a hydroxyl group represented by the following formula to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups.
  • CH 2 C (R 4) COOCH 2 CH (R 5) OH (However, R 4 and R 5 represent H or CH 3.
  • urethane acrylates as described in JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, JP-B-2-16765, JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56- Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP 17654, JP-B 62-39417, and JP-B 62-39418 are also suitable.
  • the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0095 to 0108 of JP-A-2009-288705 can also be suitably used in the present invention.
  • the compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated bond the compound which has a boiling point of 100 degreeC or more under a normal pressure is also preferable.
  • monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethanetri (meta ) Acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol (meth) ) Acrylate, trimethylolpropylene glycol mono
  • the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0254 to 0257 of JP-A-2008-292970 are also suitable.
  • the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by making cyclic ether groups, such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, and the compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated group, react with polyfunctional carboxylic acid etc. can be mentioned.
  • other preferable compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond those having a fluorene ring described in JP 2010-160418 A, JP 2010-129825 A, JP 4364216 A, etc.
  • a compound having two or more groups having an unsaturated bond a cardo resin can also be used.
  • JP-B-46-43946 JP-B-1-40337, JP-B-1-40336, and JP-A-2-25493.
  • the vinyl phosphonic acid-type compound of these can also be mentioned.
  • a structure containing a perfluoroalkyl group described in JP-A-61-22048 is preferably used.
  • Journal of Japan Adhesion Association vol. 20, no. 7, pages 300 to 308 (1984), which are introduced as photopolymerizable monomers and oligomers can also be used.
  • n is an integer from 0 to 14, and m is an integer from 0 to 8.
  • a plurality of R and T present in one molecule may be the same or different.
  • Specific examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond represented by the above formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) are described in paragraph numbers 0248 to 0251 of JP-A-2007-267979.
  • the compound can also be suitably used in the present invention.
  • JP-A-10-62986 compounds (meth) acrylates obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to a polyfunctional alcohol described in the formulas (1) and (2) together with specific examples thereof are also provided. It can be used as a polymerizable compound.
  • Examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D- 320; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available product)
  • KAYARAD DPHA manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • those having a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are bonded via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues are preferred.
  • These oligomer types can also be used. Further, preferred examples include pentaerythrito
  • Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds include SR-494, which is a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains, and SR-209, which is a bifunctional methacrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains (above, Sartomer Japan, Inc.
  • DPCA-60 which is a 6-functional acrylate having 6 pentyleneoxy chains
  • TPA-330 which is a 3-functional acrylate having 3 isobutyleneoxy chains
  • urethane oligomer UAS-10 UAB-140 (Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.)
  • NK ester M-40G NK ester 4G
  • NK ester M-9300 NK ester A-9300, UA-7200 (above, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industrial Co., Ltd.)
  • DPHA-40H Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • Examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include those described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765.
  • Urethane acrylates and urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable. It is.
  • polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are described as polymerizable compounds. Monomers can also be used.
  • the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond may be a polyfunctional monomer having an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group.
  • the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is preferably an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and an unreacted hydroxy group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is reacted with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride to form an acid group.
  • the ester is a polyfunctional monomer in which the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol.
  • Examples of commercially available products include M-510 and M-520, which are polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group one kind may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be mixed and used. Moreover, you may use together the polyfunctional monomer which does not have an acid group, and the polyfunctional monomer which has an acid group as needed.
  • a preferable acid value of the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g. When the acid value of the polyfunctional monomer is in the above range, the production and handling properties are excellent, and further, the developability is excellent. Also, the polymerizability is good.
  • the compounds having a caprolactone structure and an ethylenically unsaturated bond can be used alone or in admixture of two or more.
  • the content of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably 1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition from the viewpoint of good polymerizability and heat resistance.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond one kind may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be mixed and used.
  • the mass ratio of the polyimide precursor or the like and the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably 98/2 to 10/90, more preferably 95/5 to 30/70. 90/10 to 50/50 is most preferable. If the mass ratio of a polyimide precursor etc. and the compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated bond is the said range, the cured film excellent in polymerizability and heat resistance can be formed.
  • AM1 (Wherein t represents an integer of 1 to 20, R 4 represents a t-valent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3): Represents a group to be selected.)
  • the compound represented by the formula (AM1) is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like. More preferably, it is 10 to 35 mass parts. Moreover, 10 mass% or more and 90 mass% or less of the compound represented by a following formula (AM4) are contained in all the polymeric compounds, and the compound represented by a following formula (AM5) is 10 mass% or more in a total thermal crosslinking agent. It is also preferable to contain 90 mass% or less.
  • AM4 (Wherein R 4 represents a divalent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3)).
  • AM5 (Wherein u represents an integer of 3 to 8, R 4 represents a u-valent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 is represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3) Group.)
  • the composition is cured on an uneven substrate. It has excellent pattern processability and can have high heat resistance such that the 5% mass reduction temperature is 350 ° C. or higher, more preferably 380 ° C. or higher.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (AM4) include 46DMOC, 46DMOEP (trade name, manufactured by Asahi Organic Materials Co., Ltd.), DML-MBPC, DML-MBOC, DML-OCHP, DML-PCHP, DML.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (AM5) include TriML-P, TriML-35XL, TML-HQ, TML-BP, TML-pp-BPF, TML-BPA, TMOM-BP, HML-TPPHBA, HML-TPHAP, HMOM-TPPHBA, HMOM-TPPHAP (trade name, manufactured by Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), TM-BIP-A (trade name, manufactured by Asahi Organic Materials Co., Ltd.), NIKALAC MX-280, NIKALAC MX-270, NIKALAC MW-100LM (trade name, manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • Epoxy Compound (Compound Having Epoxy Group)
  • the epoxy compound is preferably a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule.
  • the epoxy group undergoes a cross-linking reaction at 200 ° C. or less and does not cause a dehydration reaction due to cross-linking, so that film shrinkage hardly occurs. For this reason, containing an epoxy compound is effective for low-temperature curing and low warpage of the composition.
  • the epoxy compound preferably contains a polyethylene oxide group.
  • the polyethylene oxide group means that the number of repeating units of ethylene oxide is 2 or more, and the number of repeating units is preferably 2 to 15.
  • epoxy compound examples include bisphenol A type epoxy resin; bisphenol F type epoxy resin; alkylene glycol type epoxy resin such as propylene glycol diglycidyl ether; polyalkylene glycol type epoxy resin such as polypropylene glycol diglycidyl ether; polymethyl (glycidyl Examples include, but are not limited to, epoxy group-containing silicones such as (roxypropyl) siloxane.
  • Epicron (registered trademark) 850-S Epicron (registered trademark) HP-4032, Epicron (registered trademark) HP-7200, Epicron (registered trademark) HP-820, Epicron (registered trademark) HP-4700, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4710, Epicron (registered trademark) HP-4770, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-859CRP, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-1514, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4880, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4850-150, Epicron EXA-4850-1000, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4816, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4822 (trade name, manufactured by DIC Corporation), Rica Resin (registered trademark) BEO-60E (Product name, Shin Nippon Rika Co., Ltd.), EP 4003S, EP-4000S (trade names, Ltd.
  • Adeka Adeka
  • an epoxy resin containing a polyethylene oxide group is preferable in terms of excellent low warpage and heat resistance.
  • Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4880, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4822, and Licaredin (registered trademark) BEO-60E are preferable because they contain a polyethylene oxide group.
  • the compounding amount of the epoxy compound is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by mass, and further preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like.
  • the blending amount is 5 parts by mass or more, warpage of the cured film can be further suppressed, and when it is 50 parts by mass or less, pattern filling due to reflow during curing can be further suppressed.
  • Oxetane compound (compound having oxetanyl group) >>>
  • the oxetane compound include compounds having two or more oxetane rings in one molecule, 3-ethyl-3-hydroxymethyloxetane, 1,4-bis ⁇ [(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl) methoxy] methyl ⁇ benzene, Examples include 3-ethyl-3- (2-ethylhexylmethyl) oxetane and 1,4-benzenedicarboxylic acid-bis [(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl) methyl] ester.
  • Aron Oxetane series (for example, OXT-121, OXT-221, OXT-191, OXT-223) manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. can be preferably used. Or you may mix 2 or more types.
  • the blending amount of the oxetane compound is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by mass, and further preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like.
  • benzoxazine compound (compound having a benzoxazolyl group)
  • a benzoxazine compound is preferable because it undergoes a crosslinking reaction by a ring-opening addition reaction, so that degassing due to curing does not occur, and further, since shrinkage due to heat is small, generation of warpage is suppressed.
  • benzoxazine compound examples include Ba type benzoxazine, Bm type benzoxazine (trade name, manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.), benzoxazine adduct of polyhydroxystyrene resin, phenol novolac type dihydro A benzoxazine compound is mentioned. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the blending amount of the benzoxazine compound is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by mass, and further preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like.
  • the composition used in the present invention may contain a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the composition contains a photo radical polymerization initiator
  • the composition is applied to a semiconductor wafer or the like to form a composition layer, and then irradiation with light causes curing by radicals. Solubility can be reduced. For this reason, there exists an advantage that the area
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate a polymerization reaction (crosslinking reaction) of the polymerizable compound with light, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet region to the visible region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some active radicals by generating some action with the photoexcited sensitizer.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 to 800 nm (preferably 330 to 500 nm). The molar extinction coefficient of the compound can be measured using a known method. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to measure with a UV-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) at a concentration of 0.01 g / L using an ethyl acetate solvent.
  • a UV-visible spectrophotometer C
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, those having a trihalomethyl group
  • Acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, oxime compounds such as hexaarylbiimidazole and oxime derivatives, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenones, azo series
  • examples thereof include compounds, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, organoboron compounds, iron arene complexes, and the like.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives having a triazine skeleton examples include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in British Patent 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in German Patent 3333724, F.I. C. J. Schaefer et al. Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), compounds described in JP-A-62-258241, compounds described in JP-A-5-281728, compounds described in JP-A-5-34920, US patents And the compounds described in the specification of No. 42122976.
  • Examples of the compounds described in US Pat. No. 4,221,976 include compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton (for example, 2-trichloromethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloro Methyl-5- (4-chlorophenyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (1-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5 (2-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5- (2-naphthyl)- 1,3,4-oxadiazole; 2-trichloromethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (4-chlorostyryl) 1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-
  • Examples of the ketone compound include compounds described in paragraph No. 0087 of JP-A-2015-087611, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Kaya Cure DETX manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. is also preferably used.
  • hydroxyacetophenone compounds As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
  • hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator IRGACURE-184 (IRGACURE is a registered trademark), DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • aminoacetophenone-based initiator commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • aminoacetophenone-based initiator compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 having a maximum absorption wavelength matched in a long wave region such as 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used.
  • the acylphosphine initiator include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-diphenyl-phosphine oxide.
  • IRGACURE-819 and IRGACURE-TPO which are commercially available products can be used.
  • the metallocene compound include IRGACURE-784 (manufactured by BASF).
  • More preferred examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds.
  • the oxime compound By using the oxime compound, the exposure latitude can be improved more effectively.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
  • Preferred oxime compounds include, for example, the following compounds, 3-benzooxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane- 3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutan-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 1-phenyl-1,2-butanedione-2- (O-methoxycarbonyl) oxime, 1-phenyl-1,2-butanedione-2- (O -Ethoxycarbonyl) oxime, 1-phenyl-1,2-propanedione-2- (O-me Xycarbonyl) oxime, 1-phenyl-1,2-propan
  • Examples of oxime compounds include JCSPerkin II (1979) pp.1653-1660, JCSPerkin II (1979) pp.156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp.202-232, and -66385, JP-A 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A 2006-342166, and the like.
  • IRGACURE OX-01 manufactured by BASF
  • IRGACURE OXE-02 manufactured by BASF
  • N-1919 manufactured by ADEKA
  • TR-PBG-304 manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.
  • Adeka Arcles NCI-831 and Adeka Arcles NCI-930 manufactured by ADEKA Corporation
  • TR-PBG-304 manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.
  • Adeka Arkles NCI-831 and Adeka Arkles NCI-930 manufactured by ADEKA Corporation
  • DFI-091 manufactured by Daitokemix Co., Ltd.
  • a compound described in JP2009-221114A having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-ray light source may be used.
  • the cyclic oxime compounds described in JP-A-2007-231000 and JP-A-2007-322744 can also be suitably used.
  • cyclic oxime compounds in particular, cyclic oxime compounds fused to carbazole dyes described in JP2010-32985A and JP2010-185072A have high light absorptivity and high sensitivity. preferable.
  • a compound described in JP-A-2009-242469 which is a compound having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound, can also be suitably used.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorine atom examples include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in paragraph No. 0345 of JP-T-2014-500852, JP Examples thereof include compound (C-3) described in paragraph No. 0101 of 2013-164471.
  • Specific examples include the following compounds.
  • oxime compounds having a specific substituent as disclosed in JP-A-2007-267979 there are oxime compounds having a thioaryl group as disclosed in JP-A-2009-191061, and the like.
  • Photopolymerization initiators are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triaryls from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity.
  • Selected from the group consisting of imidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds. are preferred.
  • they are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, and trihalomethyltriazine compounds.
  • ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of benzophenone compounds is more preferable, metallocene compounds or oxime compounds are more preferable, and oxime compounds are particularly preferable. preferable.
  • Photopolymerization initiators include N, N'-tetraalkyl-4,4'-diaminobenzophenone, 2-benzyl-, such as benzophenone, N, N'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diaminobenzophenone (Michler ketone), etc.
  • Aromatic ketones such as 2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1, 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-morpholino-propanone-1, alkyl anthraquinones, etc.
  • benzoin ether compounds such as benzoin alkyl ether
  • benzoin compounds such as benzoin and alkylbenzoin
  • benzyl derivatives such as benzyldimethyl ketal.
  • a compound represented by the following formula (I) can also be used.
  • R 50 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms; an alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms interrupted by one or more oxygen atoms; an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms; a phenyl group; An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, an alkenyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and 2 to 2 carbon atoms interrupted by one or more oxygen atoms A phenyl group substituted with at least one of 18 alkyl groups and an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; or biphenylyl, and R 51 is a group represented by the formula (II), or R 50 and R 52 to R 54 are each independently alkyl having 1 to 12 carbons, alkoxy having 1 to 12 carbons or halogen.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. More preferably, the content is 0.1 to 10% by mass. Only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more photopolymerization initiators, the total is preferably in the above range.
  • the photosensitive resin composition used in the production method of the present invention preferably further contains a migration inhibitor.
  • a migration inhibitor By including a migration inhibitor, it becomes possible to effectively suppress the migration of metal ions derived from the metal layer (metal wiring) into the photosensitive resin composition.
  • the migration inhibitor is not particularly limited, but a heterocyclic ring (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring, pyridine ring, A compound having a pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring and 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring), a compound having a thiourea and a mercapto group, a hindered phenol compound, Examples include salicylic acid derivative compounds and hydrazide derivative compounds. In particular, triazole compounds such as triazole and benzotriazole, and tetrazole compounds such as tetrazole and benzote
  • an ion trapping agent that captures anions such as halogen ions can also be used.
  • an ion trap agent A conventionally well-known thing can be used.
  • hydrotalcite represented by the following composition formula or hydrated oxide of bismuth represented by the following composition formula is preferable.
  • Examples of other migration inhibitors include a rust inhibitor described in paragraph No. 0094 of JP2013-15701A, a compound described in paragraph Nos. 0073 to 0076 of JP2009-283711A, and JP2011-59656A. And the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0114, 0116 and 0118 of JP 2012-194520 A, and the like.
  • the content of the migration inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5.0% by mass, and 0.05 to 2.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. More preferred is 0.1 to 1.0% by mass. Only one type of migration inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more migration inhibitors, the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the photosensitive resin composition used in the production method of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, p-tert-butylcatechol, 1,3,5-tris (4-t-butyl-3- Hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl) -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6- (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione, p-benzoquinone, diphenyl-p-benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitroso-N-phenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt, phenothiazine, N-nitrosodiphenylamine, N -Phenylnaphthylamine,
  • a polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph No. 0060 of JP-A-2015-127817 and compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0031 to 0046 of International Publication No. WO2015 / 125469 can also be used.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. Only one polymerization inhibitor may be used, or two or more polymerization inhibitors may be used. When two or more polymerization inhibitors are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
  • the photosensitive resin composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a thermal base generator.
  • the type of the thermal base generator is not particularly defined, but it is selected from an acidic compound that generates a base when heated to 40 ° C. or higher, and an ammonium salt having an anion having an pKa1 of 0 to 4 and an ammonium cation. It is preferable to include a thermal base generator containing at least one of the above.
  • pKa1 represents a logarithmic representation ( ⁇ Log 10 Ka) of the dissociation constant (Ka) of the first proton of the polyvalent acid.
  • the cyclization reaction of a polyimide precursor can be performed at low temperature, and it can be set as the composition excellent in stability. Moreover, since the base is not generated unless heated, the thermal base generator can suppress cyclization of the polyimide precursor during storage even if it coexists with the polyimide precursor, and is excellent in storage stability.
  • the thermal base generator in the present invention is at least one selected from an acidic compound (A1) that generates a base when heated to 40 ° C. or higher, and an ammonium salt (A2) having an anion having a pKa1 of 0 to 4 and an ammonium cation. including. Since the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) generate a base when heated, the base generated from these compounds can accelerate the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor, thereby cyclizing the polyimide precursor. Can be performed at low temperatures.
  • the base generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is preferably 40 ° C. or higher, more preferably 120 to 200 ° C.
  • the upper limit of the base generation temperature is more preferably 190 ° C or lower, further preferably 180 ° C or lower, and further preferably 165 ° C or lower.
  • the lower limit of the base generation temperature is more preferably 130 ° C or higher, and still more preferably 135 ° C or higher. If the base generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is 40 ° C. or higher, and further 120 ° C. or higher, the base is unlikely to be generated during storage, so the polyimide precursor composition has excellent stability. Can be prepared.
  • the cyclization temperature of the polyimide precursor can be reduced.
  • the base generation temperature is measured, for example, by using differential scanning calorimetry, heating the compound to 250 ° C. at 5 ° C./min in a pressure capsule, reading the peak temperature of the lowest exothermic peak, and measuring the peak temperature as the base generation temperature. can do.
  • the base generated by the thermal base generator is preferably a secondary amine or a tertiary amine, more preferably a tertiary amine. Since tertiary amine has high basicity, the cyclization temperature of a polyimide precursor can be lowered more. Further, the boiling point of the base generated by the thermal base generator is preferably 80 ° C. or higher, more preferably 100 ° C. or higher, and most preferably 140 ° C. or higher. The molecular weight of the generated base is preferably 80 to 2,000. The lower limit is more preferably 100 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 500 or less. The molecular weight value is a theoretical value obtained from the structural formula.
  • the acidic compound (A1) preferably contains one or more selected from an ammonium salt and a compound represented by the formula (101) or (102) described later.
  • the ammonium salt (A2) is preferably an acidic compound.
  • the ammonium salt (A2) may be a compound containing an acidic compound that generates a base when heated to 40 ° C. or higher (preferably 120 to 200 ° C.), or 40 ° C. or higher (preferably 120 to 200 ° C.). ) May be a compound other than an acidic compound that generates a base when heated.
  • the ammonium salt means a salt of an ammonium cation represented by the following formula (101) or formula (102) and an anion.
  • the anion may be bonded to any part of the ammonium cation via a covalent bond, and may be outside the molecule of the ammonium cation, but may be outside the molecule of the ammonium cation. preferable.
  • numerator of an ammonium cation means the case where an ammonium cation and an anion are not couple
  • the anion outside the cation molecule is also referred to as a counter anion.
  • R 1 to R 6 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group
  • R 7 represents a hydrocarbon group.
  • R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , R 5 and R 7 may be bonded to form a ring.
  • the ammonium cation is preferably represented by any of the following formulas (Y1-1) to (Y1-5).
  • R 101 represents an n-valent organic group
  • R 1 and R 7 are synonymous with the formula (101) or the formula (102).
  • Ar 101 and Ar 102 each independently represent an aryl group, n represents an integer of 1 or more, m represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • the ammonium salt preferably has an anion having an pKa1 of 0 to 4 and an ammonium cation.
  • the upper limit of the anion pKa1 is more preferably 3.5 or less, and even more preferably 3.2 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.5 or more, and further preferably 1.0 or more. If the pKa1 of the anion is in the above range, the polyimide precursor can be cyclized at a low temperature, and further, the stability of the polyimide precursor composition can be improved. If pKa1 is 4 or less, the stability of the thermal base generator is good, the generation of a base without heating can be suppressed, and the stability of the polyimide precursor composition is good.
  • the kind of anion is preferably one selected from a carboxylate anion, a phenol anion, a phosphate anion, and a sulfate anion, and a carboxylate anion is more preferable because both the stability of the salt and the thermal decomposability can be achieved. That is, the ammonium salt is more preferably a salt of an ammonium cation and a carboxylate anion.
  • the carboxylic acid anion is preferably a divalent or higher carboxylic acid anion having two or more carboxyl groups, and more preferably a divalent carboxylic acid anion.
  • the thermal base generator which can improve more stability, sclerosis
  • the stability, curability and developability of the polyimide precursor composition can be further improved by using an anion of a divalent carboxylic acid.
  • the carboxylic acid anion is preferably a carboxylic acid anion having a pKa1 of 4 or less.
  • pKa1 is more preferably 3.5 or less, and even more preferably 3.2 or less.
  • the stability of the polyimide precursor composition can be further improved.
  • pKa1 represents the logarithm of the reciprocal of the first dissociation constant of the acid, and is determined by Organic Structures by Physical Methods (author: Brown, HC, McDaniel, DH, Hafliger, O., Nachod, FC; Compilation: Braude, EA, Nachod, FC; Academic Press, New York, 1955) and Data for Biochemical Research (author: Dawson, RMC et al; Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1959). For compounds not described in these documents, values calculated from the structural formula using software of ACD / pKa (manufactured by ACD / Labs) are used.
  • the carboxylate anion is preferably represented by the following formula (X1).
  • EWG represents an electron withdrawing group.
  • the electron withdrawing group means a group having a positive Hammett's substituent constant ⁇ m.
  • ⁇ m is a review by Yugo Tono, Journal of Synthetic Organic Chemistry, Vol. 23, No. 8 (1965) P.I. 631-642.
  • the electron withdrawing group in this invention is not limited to the substituent described in the said literature.
  • Me represents a methyl group
  • Ac represents an acetyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • EWG preferably represents a group represented by the following formulas (EWG-1) to (EWG-6).
  • R x1 to R x3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a hydroxy group, or a carboxyl group, and Ar represents an aromatic group.
  • the carboxylate anion is also preferably represented by the following formula (X).
  • L 10 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group selected from an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an aromatic group, —NR X —, and combinations thereof, and R X represents hydrogen An atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an aryl group is represented.
  • carboxylate anion examples include a maleate anion, a phthalate anion, an N-phenyliminodiacetic acid anion, and an oxalate anion.
  • the thermal base generator preferably used by this invention is illustrated. It goes without saying that the thermal base generator used in the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the content of the thermal base generator in the composition is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass relative to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and further preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • 1 type (s) or 2 or more types can be used for a thermal base generator. When using 2 or more types, it is preferable that a total amount is the said range.
  • the photosensitive resin composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a photobase generator.
  • a photobase generator generates a base by exposure and does not exhibit activity under normal conditions of normal temperature and pressure, but when exposed to an external stimulus, that is, irradiated with an electromagnetic wave and heated, the base There is no particular limitation as long as it generates (basic substance). Since the base generated by the exposure works as a catalyst for curing the polyimide precursor by heating, it can be suitably used in the negative type.
  • the content of the photobase generator is not particularly limited as long as it can form a desired pattern, and can be a general content.
  • the photobase generator is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably in the range of 0.05 to 25 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin. Preferably, it is in the range of 0.1 to 20 parts by mass.
  • photobase generators can be used.
  • M.M. Shirai, and M.M. Tsunooka Prog. Polym. Sci. , 21, 1 (1996); Masahiro Kadooka, polymer processing, 46, 2 (1997); Kutal, Coord. Chem. Rev. , 211, 353 (2001); Kaneko, A .; Sarker, and D.C. Neckers, Chem. Mater. 11, 170 (1999); Tachi, M .; Shirai, and M.M. Tsunooka, J. et al. Photopolym. Sci. Technol. , 13, 153 (2000); Winkle, and K.K. Graziano, J. et al. Photopolym.
  • transition metal compound complexes those having a structure such as an ammonium salt, and those formed by salt formation of an amidine moiety with a carboxylic acid
  • transition metal compound complexes those having a structure such as an ammonium salt, and those formed by salt formation of an amidine moiety with a carboxylic acid
  • a urethane bond or oxime bond such as a carbamate derivative, an oxime ester derivative, or an acyl compound.
  • carbamate derivatives In the present invention, carbamate derivatives, amide derivatives, imide derivatives, ⁇ -cobalt complexes, imidazole derivatives, cinnamic acid amide derivatives, oxime derivatives and the like are more preferred examples of photobase generators.
  • the basic substance generated from the photobase generator is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include compounds having amino groups, particularly monoamines, polyamines such as diamines, and amidines.
  • the generated basic substance is preferably a compound having an amino group having a higher basicity. This is because the catalytic action for the dehydration condensation reaction or the like in the imidization of the polyimide precursor is strong, and the catalytic effect in the dehydration condensation reaction or the like at a lower temperature can be expressed with a smaller amount of addition. That is, since the catalytic effect of the generated basic substance is great, the apparent sensitivity as a negative photosensitive resin composition is improved. From the viewpoint of the catalytic effect, an amidine and an aliphatic amine are preferable.
  • the photobase generator is preferably a photobase generator that does not contain salt in the structure, and preferably has no charge on the nitrogen atom of the base moiety generated in the photobase generator.
  • the photobase generator it is preferable that the generated base is latentized using a covalent bond, and the base generation mechanism is such that the covalent bond between the nitrogen atom of the generated base portion and the adjacent atom is broken. It is preferable that a base is generated.
  • the photobase generator contains no salt in the structure, the photobase generator can be neutralized, so that the solvent solubility is better and the pot life is improved.
  • the amine generated from the photobase generator used in the present invention is preferably a primary amine or a secondary amine.
  • the generated base is latentized using a covalent bond as described above, and the generated base has an amide bond, carbamate bond, or oxime bond. It is preferably latentized by using.
  • the photobase generator according to the present invention include a photobase generator having a cinnamic acid amide structure as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-80452 and International Publication WO2009 / 123122, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-189591.
  • the photobase generator etc. which have an oxime structure are mentioned, It is not limited to these, In addition, the structure of a well-known photobase generator can be used.
  • examples of the photobase generator include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0185 to 0188, 0199 to 0200 and 0202 of JP2012-93746A, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0069 of JP2013-194205A. Examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2013-204019, paragraphs 0026 to 0074, and compounds described in paragraph No. 0052 of international publication WO2010 / 064631.
  • photobase generators include WPBG-266, WPBG-300, WPGB-345, WPGB-140, WPBG-165, WPBG-027, PBG-018, WPGB-015, WPBG-041, WPGB-172, WPGB-174, WPBG-166, WPGB-158, WPGB-025, WPGB-168, WPGB-167, and WPBG-082 (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) can also be used.
  • the composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a thermal acid generator.
  • Thermal acid generator generates acid by heating, promotes cyclization of polyimide precursor, etc., and further improves the mechanical properties of the cured film, as well as compounds having a hydroxymethyl group, alkoxymethyl group or acyloxymethyl group, epoxy There is an effect of promoting a crosslinking reaction of at least one compound selected from a compound, an oxetane compound and a benzoxazine compound.
  • the thermal decomposition starting temperature of the thermal acid generator is preferably 50 ° C. to 270 ° C., more preferably 250 ° C. or less.
  • no acid is generated during drying (pre-baking: about 70 to 140 ° C.) after the composition is applied to the substrate, and during final heating (curing: about 100 to 400 ° C.) after patterning by subsequent exposure and development. It is preferable to select one that generates an acid, since a decrease in sensitivity during development can be suppressed.
  • the acid generated from the thermal acid generator is preferably a strong acid.
  • arylsulfonic acid such as p-toluenesulfonic acid and benzenesulfonic acid
  • alkylsulfonic acid such as methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid and butanesulfonic acid
  • trifluoromethanesulfone haloalkyl sulfonic acids such as acids are preferred.
  • Examples of such a thermal acid generator include those described in paragraph No. 0055 of JP2013-072935A.
  • thermal acid generators that generate alkyl sulfonic acids having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or haloalkyl sulfonic acids having 1 to 4 carbon atoms are more preferred from the viewpoint of little remaining in the cured film and no deterioration in the properties of the cured film.
  • JP2013-167742A is also preferable as the thermal acid generator.
  • the content of the thermal acid generator is preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more, more preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like.
  • the content of the thermal acid generator is preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more, more preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like.
  • 0.01 part by mass or more By containing 0.01 part by mass or more, the cyclization of the crosslinking reaction and the polyimide precursor is promoted, so that the mechanical properties and chemical resistance of the cured film can be further improved.
  • 20 mass parts or less are preferable, 15 mass parts or less are more preferable, and 10 mass parts or less are more preferable.
  • One type of thermal acid generator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When using 2 or more types, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
  • the composition used in the present invention may contain a thermal polymerization initiator (preferably a thermal radical polymerization initiator).
  • a thermal radical polymerization initiator a known thermal radical polymerization initiator can be used.
  • the thermal radical polymerization initiator is a compound that generates radicals by heat energy and initiates or accelerates the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound can be advanced when the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor or the like is advanced.
  • Thermal radical polymerization initiators include aromatic ketones, onium salt compounds, peroxides, thio compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, ketoxime ester compounds, borate compounds, azinium compounds, metallocene compounds, active ester compounds, carbon halogens. Examples thereof include a compound having a bond and an azo compound. Among these, a peroxide or an azo compound is more preferable, and a peroxide is particularly preferable.
  • the thermal radical polymerization initiator used in the present invention preferably has a 10-hour half-life temperature of 90 to 130 ° C, more preferably 100 to 120 ° C.
  • Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0074 to 0118 of JP-A-2008-63554.
  • perbutyl Z and park mill D made by NOF Corporation can be used conveniently.
  • the content of the thermal radical polymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. 0.1 to 20% by mass is particularly preferable. Further, the thermal radical polymerization initiator is preferably contained in an amount of 0.1 to 50 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.5 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound. According to this aspect, it is easy to form a cured film having more excellent heat resistance. Only one type of thermal radical polymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more thermal radical polymerization initiators, the total is preferably in the above range.
  • the composition used in the production method of the present invention preferably contains a metal adhesion improver for improving adhesion to a metal material used for electrodes, wirings and the like.
  • a metal adhesion improver for improving adhesion to a metal material used for electrodes, wirings and the like.
  • the metal adhesion improver include sulfide compounds described in paragraph numbers 0046 to 0049 of JP-A-2014-186186 and paragraph numbers 0032 to 0043 of JP-A-2013-072935.
  • Examples of the metal adhesion improver include the following compound (N- [3- (triethoxysilyl) propyl] maleic acid monoamide).
  • the content of the metal adhesion improving agent is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 15 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor and the like.
  • the content of the metal adhesion improving agent is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 15 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor and the like.
  • the composition used in the production method of the present invention preferably contains a silane coupling agent in terms of improving the adhesion to the substrate.
  • the silane coupling agent include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0062 to 0073 of JP2014-191002, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0063 to 0071 of international publication WO2011 / 080992A1, and JP2014-191252.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor and the like.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor and the like.
  • it is 0.1 part by mass or more, sufficient adhesion to the substrate can be imparted, and when it is 20 parts by mass or less, problems such as an increase in viscosity during storage at room temperature can be further suppressed.
  • Only one type of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When using 2 or more types, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
  • the composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a sensitizing dye.
  • a sensitizing dye absorbs specific actinic radiation and enters an electronically excited state.
  • the sensitizing dye in an electronically excited state comes into contact with an amine generator, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator, and the like, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur.
  • an amine generator, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, and a photopolymerization initiator cause a chemical change and are decomposed to generate radicals, acids, or bases.
  • preferable sensitizing dyes include those belonging to the following compounds and having a maximum absorption wavelength in the region of 300 nm to 450 nm.
  • polynuclear aromatics for example, phenanthrene, anthracene, pyrene, perylene, triphenylene, 9.10-dialkoxyanthracene
  • xanthenes for example, fluorescein, eosin, erythrosine, rhodamine B, rose bengal
  • thioxanthones for example, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone
  • cyanines for example, thiacarbocyanine, oxacarbocyanine
  • merocyanines for example, merocyanine, carbomerocyanine
  • thiazines for example, thionine, methylene blue, toluidine blue
  • acridines Eg, acridine orange, chloroflavin, acrifla
  • combination with polynuclear aromatics for example, phenanthrene, anthracene, pyrene, perylene, triphenylene), thioxanthones, distyrylbenzenes, and styrylbenzenes is preferable from the viewpoint of starting efficiency, and has an anthracene skeleton. More preferably, the compound is used. Particularly preferred specific compounds include 9,10-diethoxyanthracene and 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene.
  • the content of the sensitizing dye is preferably from 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably from 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. More preferably, it is 5 to 10% by mass.
  • a sensitizing dye may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a chain transfer agent.
  • Chain transfer agents are defined, for example, in Polymer Dictionary 3rd Edition (edited by the Society of Polymer Science, 2005) pages 683-684.
  • As the chain transfer agent for example, a compound group having SH, PH, SiH, GeH in the molecule is used. These can donate hydrogen to low-activity radical species to generate radicals, or can be oxidized and then deprotonated to generate radicals.
  • thiol compounds for example, 2-mercaptobenzimidazoles, 2-mercaptobenzthiazoles, 2-mercaptobenzoxazoles, 3-mercaptotriazoles, 5-mercaptotetrazoles, etc.
  • 2-mercaptobenzimidazoles, 2-mercaptobenzthiazoles, 2-mercaptobenzoxazoles, 3-mercaptotriazoles, 5-mercaptotetrazoles, etc. can be preferably used.
  • the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass, with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition. Particularly preferred is 1 to 5 parts by mass. Only one type of chain transfer agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more chain transfer agents, the total is preferably in the above range.
  • surfactant Various surfactants may be added to the composition used in the production method of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability.
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • a fluorosurfactant liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved, so that the uniformity of coating thickness and liquid-saving properties can be further improved.
  • the wettability to the coated surface is improved by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid, and the coated surface
  • the coating property of is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several ⁇ m is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness can be more suitably formed.
  • the fluorine content of the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content in this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and also has good solvent solubility.
  • fluorosurfactant examples include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, Same SC-103, Same SC-104, Same SC-105, Same SC1068, Same SC-381, Same SC-383, Same S393, Same KH-40 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PF636, PF656, PF6320 PF6520, PF7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA) and the like.
  • a block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant, and specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-89090.
  • the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorosurfactant used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compound is, for example, 14,000.
  • nonionic surfactant examples include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R ), Solsperse 20000 (Lubrizol Japan Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • cationic surfactant examples include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • phthalocyanine derivatives trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.
  • organosiloxane polymer KP341 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • W001 manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.
  • anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • silicone surfactant examples include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Tore Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • the surfactant content is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 1.0%, based on the total solid content of the composition. % By mass. Only one surfactant may be used, or two or more surfactants may be used. When there are two or more surfactants, the total is preferably in the above range.
  • a higher fatty acid derivative such as behenic acid or behenic acid amide or the like is added to the composition used in the production method of the present invention, and the composition is dried during coating.
  • the surface may be unevenly distributed.
  • the content of the higher fatty acid derivative is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. Only one type of higher fatty acid derivative or the like may be used. When there are two or more higher fatty acid derivatives, the total is preferably in the above range.
  • ⁇ Solvent When the composition used in the production method of the present invention is layered by coating, it is preferable to blend a solvent. Any known solvent can be used without limitation as long as the composition can be formed into a layer. Examples of esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, ⁇ -butyrolactone, and ⁇ -caprolactone , ⁇ -valerolactone, alkyl alkoxyacetate (eg, methyl alkoxyacetate, ethyl alkoxyacetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate,
  • the solvent is preferably in the form of a mixture of two or more types from the viewpoint of improving the coated surface.
  • a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate is preferable.
  • the combined use of dimethyl sulfoxide and ⁇ -butyrolactone is particularly preferred.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably such that the total solid concentration of the composition is 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably 5 to 70% by mass, from the viewpoint of applicability. 10 to 60% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • One type of solvent may be sufficient and 2 or more types may be sufficient as it.
  • the total is preferably in the above range.
  • the contents of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N, N-dimethylacetamide and N, N-dimethylformamide are based on the total mass of the composition from the viewpoint of film strength. It is preferably less than 5% by weight, more preferably less than 1% by weight, even more preferably less than 0.5% by weight, and particularly preferably less than 0.1% by weight.
  • the composition used in the production method of the present invention is various additives such as inorganic particles, curing agents, curing catalysts, fillers, antioxidants, ultraviolet rays as necessary, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • Absorbers, anti-aggregation agents and the like can be blended. When these additives are blended, the total blending amount is preferably 3% by mass or less of the solid content of the composition.
  • the water content of the composition used in the production method of the present invention is preferably less than 5% by mass, more preferably less than 1% by mass, and particularly preferably less than 0.6% by mass from the viewpoint of the coated surface.
  • the metal content of the composition used in the production method of the present invention is preferably less than 5 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and particularly preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass from the viewpoint of insulation.
  • the metal include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, chromium, nickel and the like. When a plurality of metals are included, the total of these metals is preferably in the above range.
  • a raw material having a low metal content is selected as a raw material constituting the composition, and filter filtration is performed on the raw material constituting the composition. Examples thereof include a method of performing distillation under a condition in which the inside of the apparatus is lined with polytetrafluoroethylene or the like and contamination is suppressed as much as possible.
  • the halogen atom content is preferably less than 500 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 300 ppm by mass, and particularly preferably less than 200 ppm by mass from the viewpoint of wiring corrosiveness.
  • a halogen ion is less than 5 mass ppm, more preferably less than 1 mass ppm, and especially less than 0.5 mass ppm.
  • the halogen atom include a chlorine atom and a bromine atom. The total of chlorine atoms and bromine atoms, or chloride ions and bromide ions is preferably in the above range.
  • the manufacturing method of a semiconductor device This invention also discloses the manufacturing method of a semiconductor device containing the manufacturing method of the said laminated body.
  • a semiconductor device 100 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called three-dimensional mounting device, and a semiconductor element 101 in which a plurality of semiconductor elements (semiconductor chips) 101 a to 101 d are stacked is arranged on a wiring board 120.
  • the number of stacked semiconductor elements (semiconductor chips) is not particularly limited. It may be a layer, 8 layers, 16 layers, 32 layers or the like. Moreover, one layer may be sufficient.
  • Each of the plurality of semiconductor elements 101a to 101d is made of a semiconductor wafer such as a silicon substrate.
  • the uppermost semiconductor element 101a does not have a through electrode, and an electrode pad (not shown) is formed on one surface thereof.
  • the semiconductor elements 101b to 101d have through electrodes 102b to 102d, and connection pads (not shown) provided integrally with the through electrodes are provided on both surfaces of each semiconductor element.
  • the semiconductor element 101 has a structure in which a semiconductor element 101a having no through electrode and semiconductor elements 101b to 101d having through electrodes 102b to 102d are flip-chip connected. That is, the electrode pad of the semiconductor element 101a having no through electrode and the connection pad on the semiconductor element 101a side of the semiconductor element 101b having the adjacent through electrode 102b are connected by the metal bump 103a such as a solder bump, The connection pad on the other side of the semiconductor element 101b having the electrode 102b is connected to the connection pad on the semiconductor element 101b side of the semiconductor element 101c having the penetrating electrode 102c adjacent thereto by a metal bump 103b such as a solder bump.
  • connection pad on the other side of the semiconductor element 101c having the through electrode 102c is connected to the connection pad on the semiconductor element 101c side of the semiconductor element 101d having the adjacent through electrode 102d by the metal bump 103c such as a solder bump. ing.
  • An underfill layer 110 is formed in the gaps between the semiconductor elements 101a to 101d, and the semiconductor elements 101a to 101d are stacked via the underfill layer 110.
  • the semiconductor element 101 is stacked on the wiring board 120.
  • the wiring substrate 120 for example, a multilayer wiring substrate using an insulating substrate such as a resin substrate, a ceramic substrate, or a glass substrate as a base material is used.
  • the wiring board 120 to which the resin board is applied include a multilayer copper-clad laminate (multilayer printed wiring board).
  • a surface electrode 120 a is provided on one surface of the wiring board 120.
  • An insulating layer 115 in which a rewiring layer 105 is formed is disposed between the wiring board 120 and the semiconductor element 101, and the wiring board 120 and the semiconductor element 101 are electrically connected via the rewiring layer 105. It is connected.
  • the insulating layer 115 is the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) in the present invention. Details of the insulating layer will be described later. That is, one end of the rewiring layer 105 is connected to an electrode pad formed on the surface of the semiconductor element 101d on the rewiring layer 105 side through a metal bump 103d such as a solder bump.
  • the other end of the rewiring layer 105 is connected to the surface electrode 120a of the wiring board via a metal bump 103e such as a solder bump.
  • An underfill layer 110 a is formed between the insulating layer 115 and the semiconductor element 101.
  • an underfill layer 110 b is formed between the insulating layer 115 and the wiring substrate 120.
  • FIG. 2 shows an example of a laminate (rewiring layer) obtained by the production method of the present invention, wherein 200 is a laminate obtained by the method of the present invention, 201 is a photosensitive resin composition.
  • Reference numeral 203 denotes a layer (resin layer), and reference numeral 203 denotes a metal layer.
  • the metal layer 203 is a layer indicated by oblique lines.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer 201 has a desired pattern formed by negative development.
  • the metal layer 203 is formed so as to cover a part of the surface of the pattern, and a photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) 201 is further laminated on the surface of the metal layer 203.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) functions as an insulating film, and the metal layer functions as a wiring layer, and is incorporated as a rewiring layer in the semiconductor element as described above.
  • reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and 21.43 g (270.9 mmol) pyridine and 90 mL N-methylpyrrolidone were added.
  • the reaction mixture was then cooled to ⁇ 10 ° C. and 16.12 g (135.5 mmol) of SOCl 2 was added over 10 minutes while maintaining the temperature at ⁇ 10 ⁇ 4 ° C. During the addition of SOCl 2 the viscosity increased. After dilution with 50 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours.
  • reaction mixture was then cooled to ⁇ 10 ° C. and 16.12 g (135.5 mmol) of SOCl 2 was added over 10 minutes while maintaining the temperature at ⁇ 10 ⁇ 4 ° C. After dilution with 50 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. A solution of 12.46 g (58.7 mmol) of m-tolidine in 100 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone was then added dropwise to the reaction mixture at 20-23 ° C. over 20 minutes. The reaction mixture was then stirred overnight at room temperature.
  • the polyimide precursor was then precipitated in 5 liters of water and the water-polyimide precursor mixture was stirred for 15 minutes at a speed of 5000 rpm.
  • the polyimide precursor was collected by filtration, added to 4 liters of water, stirred again for 30 minutes, and collected again by filtration.
  • the obtained polyimide precursor was dried at 45 ° C. under reduced pressure for 3 days to obtain a polyimide precursor (A-5).
  • B Polymerizable compound B-1: SR209 (bifunctional methacrylate, manufactured by Sartomer Japan, Inc., the following structure)
  • B-2 NK ester A-9300 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., trifunctional acrylate, the following structure)
  • Each photosensitive resin composition was filtered under pressure through a filter having a pore width of 0.8 ⁇ m, and then a photosensitive resin composition layer was formed on a silicon wafer by spin coating.
  • the silicon wafer to which the obtained photosensitive resin composition layer was applied was dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 5 minutes, and the photosensitive resin composition layer having a uniform thickness described in the table below was formed on the silicon wafer. did.
  • the photosensitive resin composition layer on the silicon wafer was exposed using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) with an exposure energy of 500 mJ / cm 2 at a wavelength of 365 nm, and the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer).
  • a metal layer (copper layer) is formed on the surface of the laminate 2 by vapor deposition in the same manner as described above, and again irradiated with plasma of the gas species shown in the table below, and then the same photosensitivity as described above.
  • the laminate 3 was obtained by repeating the formation, exposure, development and heating of the photosensitive resin composition layer using the photosensitive resin composition.
  • a laminate 2 was produced by performing corona discharge treatment.
  • Laminates 2 and 3 obtained above were heated in nitrogen at 300 ° C. for 3 hours. Thereafter, each laminated body has a width of 5 mm in the vertical direction with respect to the resin layer surface, and a portion where the resin layer and the resin layer are in contact with each other, and a portion where the metal layer and the resin layer are in contact with each other, It cut out and the cross section was observed and the presence or absence of peeling between the resin layer / resin layer and the metal layer / resin layer in one cut piece was confirmed with an optical microscope. If peeling does not occur, it means that the film has excellent adhesiveness, which is a preferable result.
  • A: No peeling occurred B: 1 to 2 peeling occurrences C: 3 to 5 peeling occurrences D: 6 or more peeling occurrences
  • the laminate obtained by the production method of the present invention was excellent in both the adhesion between the resin layer and the resin layer and the adhesion between the metal layer and the resin layer.
  • a resin other than a polyimide precursor or the like is used as the resin (Comparative Examples 1, 2, 7, and 8)
  • the adhesion between the resin layer and the resin layer and the adhesion between the metal layer and the resin layer are inferior. It was. Further, when the surface activation treatment was not performed, both or one of the adhesion between the resin layer and the resin layer and between the metal layer and the resin layer was inferior (Comparative Examples 3 to 6, 9 to 12).
  • Example 18 when the second resin layer was formed using the photosensitive resin composition 2 and the others were performed in the same manner, the same excellent effect as in Example 18 was obtained.
  • the metal layer copper thin film
  • Example 18 the metal layer (copper thin film) was changed to an aluminum thin film and the others were performed in the same manner. As a result, the results were as good as in Example 18.

Abstract

Provided are the following: a method for manufacturing a laminate having excellent adhesion between a resin layer and another resin layer, or between a resin layer and a metal layer; and a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device including said manufacturing method. The method for manufacturing a laminate includes: a photosensitive resin composition layer forming step of forming a photosensitive resin composition in a layer shape adapted to a substrate; a step of exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer to light; a step of performing negative development processing of the photosensitive resin composition layer that has been exposed to light; a step of forming a metal layer on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after development processing; and a surface activation processing step of performing surface activation processing on the metal layer and at least a portion of the photosensitive resin composition layer. The method further includes again performing, in the order set forth above, the photosensitive resin composition layer forming step, the light exposing step, and the development processing step. The photosensitive resin composition includes a resin selected from polyimide precursors and the like. Further, at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: the resin including a polymerizable group; and the photosensitive resin composition including a polymerizable compound.

Description

積層体の製造方法および半導体デバイスの製造方法LAMINATE MANUFACTURING METHOD AND SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE MANUFACTURING METHOD
 本発明は積層体の製造方法および半導体デバイスの製造方法に関する。特に、半導体デバイスの再配線層用層間絶縁膜の製造に用いられる、積層体の製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a laminate manufacturing method and a semiconductor device manufacturing method. In particular, the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a laminate used for manufacturing an interlayer insulating film for a rewiring layer of a semiconductor device.
 ポリイミド樹脂やポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂などの熱硬化性樹脂は、耐熱性および絶縁性に優れるため、半導体デバイスの絶縁層などに用いられている。
 また、ポリイミド樹脂やポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂は、溶剤への溶解性が低いため、環化反応前の前駆体(ポリイミド前駆体やポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体)の状態で使用し、基板などに適用した後、加熱してポリイミド前駆体を環化して硬化膜を形成することも行われている。
Thermosetting resins such as polyimide resins and polybenzoxazole resins are excellent in heat resistance and insulation, and thus are used for insulating layers of semiconductor devices.
In addition, since polyimide resins and polybenzoxazole resins have low solubility in solvents, they are used in the state of a precursor (polyimide precursor or polybenzoxazole precursor) before cyclization reaction and applied to a substrate or the like. Heating to cyclize the polyimide precursor to form a cured film is also performed.
 ここで、特許文献1には、熱可塑性ポリイミド層および熱可塑性ポリイミド層表面の金属層からなる積層体が開示されている。また、特許文献1には、熱可塑性ポリイミド層が絶縁層として働くことも記載されている。 Here, Patent Document 1 discloses a laminate comprising a thermoplastic polyimide layer and a metal layer on the surface of the thermoplastic polyimide layer. Patent Document 1 also describes that a thermoplastic polyimide layer functions as an insulating layer.
国際公開WO2004/050352号公報International Publication WO2004 / 050352
 ここで、半導体デバイスの再配線層用層間絶縁膜として、上記特許文献1に記載の熱可塑性ポリイミド樹脂を用いるとすると、熱可塑性ポリイミド層および熱可塑性ポリイミド層表面の金属層からなる積層体の上に、さらに、熱可塑性ポリイミド層を設ける必要がある。しかしながら、特許文献1における上記積層体の上に、さらに、熱可塑性ポリイミド層を設けることを検討したところ、熱可塑性ポリイミド層と金属層、あるいは、熱可塑性ポリイミド層同士の密着性が不十分であることが分かった。
 本発明は、かかる課題を解決することを目的としたものであって、ポリイミド等の樹脂を含む樹脂層と樹脂層、または、樹脂層と金属層との密着性に優れた積層体の製造方法、および、上記製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法を提供することを目的とする。
Here, when the thermoplastic polyimide resin described in Patent Document 1 is used as the interlayer insulating film for the rewiring layer of the semiconductor device, the top of the laminate composed of the thermoplastic polyimide layer and the metal layer on the surface of the thermoplastic polyimide layer is used. Furthermore, it is necessary to provide a thermoplastic polyimide layer. However, when it was considered to further provide a thermoplastic polyimide layer on the laminate in Patent Document 1, the adhesion between the thermoplastic polyimide layer and the metal layer, or between the thermoplastic polyimide layers is insufficient. I understood that.
The present invention is intended to solve such problems, and a method for producing a laminate having excellent adhesion between a resin layer containing a resin such as polyimide and a resin layer, or a resin layer and a metal layer And it aims at providing the manufacturing method of the semiconductor device containing the said manufacturing method.
 上記課題のもと、本発明者が検討を行った結果、感光性樹脂組成物をネガ型現像して樹脂層を形成することにより、上記課題を解決しうることを見出した。具体的には、下記手段<1>により、好ましくは<2>~<8>により、上記課題は解決された。
<1>感光性樹脂組成物を基板に適用して層状にする、感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程と、
上記感光性樹脂組成物層を露光する、露光工程と、上記露光された感光性樹脂組成物層に対してネガ型現像処理を行う、現像処理工程と、上記現像処理後の感光性樹脂組成物層の表面に金属層を形成する、金属層形成工程と、上記金属層および感光性樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部を表面活性化処理する、表面活性化処理工程とを含み、さらに、再度、上記感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程、上記露光工程、および、上記現像処理工程を、上記順に行うことを含み、上記感光性樹脂組成物が、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリイミド、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体およびポリベンゾオキサゾールから選択される樹脂を含み、さらに、上記樹脂が重合性基を含むこと、および、上記感光性樹脂組成物が重合性化合物を含むことの少なくとも一方を満たす、積層体の製造方法。
<2>上記感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程、上記露光工程、および、上記現像処理工程を、上記順に、3~7回行う、<1>に記載の積層体の製造方法。
<3>上記金属層が銅を含む、<1>または<2>に記載の積層体の製造方法。
<4>上記樹脂がポリイミド前駆体またはポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体である、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の積層体の製造方法。
<5>上記樹脂が、-Ar-L-Ar-で表される部分構造を含む、<1>~<4>のいずれかに記載の積層体の製造方法;但し、Arは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基であり、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-または-NHCO-、あるいは、上記の2つ以上の組み合わせからなる基である。
<6>上記表面活性化処理が、プラズマ処理およびコロナ放電処理から選択される、<1>~<5>のいずれかに記載の積層体の製造方法。
<7>上記感光性樹脂組成物が、光重合開始剤を含む、<1>~<6>のいずれかに記載の積層体の製造方法。
<8><1>~<7>のいずれかに記載の積層体の製造方法を含む、半導体デバイスの製造方法。
As a result of investigation by the present inventors based on the above problems, it has been found that the above problems can be solved by forming a resin layer by negative development of the photosensitive resin composition. Specifically, the above problem has been solved by the following means <1>, preferably <2> to <8>.
<1> a photosensitive resin composition layer forming step of applying a photosensitive resin composition to a substrate to form a layer;
An exposure process for exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer, a development process for performing a negative development process on the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer, and a photosensitive resin composition after the development process A metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the surface of the layer, and a surface activation treatment step of subjecting at least a part of the metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer to a surface activation treatment. Including performing the photosensitive resin composition layer forming step, the exposure step, and the development processing step in the order described above, wherein the photosensitive resin composition comprises a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a poly A resin selected from benzoxazole, and further satisfying at least one of the resin containing a polymerizable group and the photosensitive resin composition containing a polymerizable compound. Method of manufacturing a layer body.
<2> The method for producing a laminate according to <1>, wherein the photosensitive resin composition layer forming step, the exposing step, and the developing step are performed 3 to 7 times in the order described above.
<3> The method for producing a laminate according to <1> or <2>, wherein the metal layer contains copper.
<4> The method for producing a laminate according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the resin is a polyimide precursor or a polybenzoxazole precursor.
<5> The method for producing a laminate according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the resin includes a partial structure represented by -Ar-L-Ar-; , An aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO 2 — or —NHCO -Or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above.
<6> The method for producing a laminate according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the surface activation treatment is selected from plasma treatment and corona discharge treatment.
<7> The method for producing a laminate according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the photosensitive resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator.
<8> A method for producing a semiconductor device, comprising the method for producing a laminate according to any one of <1> to <7>.
 本発明により、樹脂層と樹脂層、または、樹脂層と金属層との密着性に優れた積層体の製造方法、および、上記製造方法を含む半導体デバイスの製造方法が提供された。 According to the present invention, there are provided a method for producing a laminate having excellent adhesion between a resin layer and a resin layer, or a resin layer and a metal layer, and a method for producing a semiconductor device including the production method.
半導体デバイスの一実施形態の構成を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows the structure of one Embodiment of a semiconductor device. 本発明の製造方法で得られる積層体の一実施形態の構成を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows the structure of one Embodiment of the laminated body obtained with the manufacturing method of this invention.
 以下に記載する本発明における構成要素の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされることがあるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されるものではない。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基と共に置換基を有する基をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も含む。また、露光に用いられる光としては、一般的に、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線または放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、「アクリレート」および「メタクリレート」の双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アリル」は、「アリル」および「メタリル」の双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、「アクリル」および「メタクリル」の双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、「アクリロイル」および「メタクリロイル」の双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において、「工程」との語は、独立した工程を表すだけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書において、固形分濃度とは、組成物の総質量に対する、溶剤を除く他の成分の質量百分率である。また、固形分濃度は、特に述べない限り25℃における濃度をいう。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)および数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に述べない限り、ゲル浸透クロマトグラフィー(GPC)により測定したポリスチレン換算値として定義される。本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)および数平均分子量(Mn)は、例えば、HLC-8220(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとしてガードカラムHZ-L、TSKgel Super HZM-M、TSKgel Super HZ4000、TSKgel Super HZ3000、TSKgel Super HZ2000(東ソー(株)製)を用いることによって求めることができる。溶離液は特に述べない限り、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いて測定したものとする。また、検出は特に述べない限り、UV線(紫外線)の波長254nm検出器を使用したものとする。
The description of the components in the present invention described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in this specification, the notation which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the group which has a substituent with the group which does not have a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In this specification, “exposure” includes not only exposure using light, but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. The light used for exposure generally includes active rays or radiation such as an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
In the present specification, a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In the present specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or “acrylate” and “methacrylate”, and “(meth) allyl” means both “allyl” and “methallyl”, or “(Meth) acryl” represents either “acryl” and “methacryl” or any one, and “(meth) acryloyl” represents both “acryloyl” and “methacryloyl”, or Represents either.
In this specification, the term “process” not only indicates an independent process, but also if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, include.
In this specification, solid content concentration is the mass percentage of the other component except a solvent with respect to the gross mass of a composition. Moreover, solid content concentration says the density | concentration in 25 degreeC unless there is particular mention.
In this specification, a weight average molecular weight (Mw) and a number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined as polystyrene conversion values measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified. In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and guard columns HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel. It can be determined by using Super HZ4000, TSKgel Super HZ3000, TSKgel Super HZ2000 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation). Unless otherwise stated, the eluent was measured using THF (tetrahydrofuran). Unless otherwise specified, detection is performed using a UV ray (ultraviolet) wavelength 254 nm detector.
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、感光性樹脂組成物を基板に適用して層状にする、感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程と、上記感光性樹脂組成物層を露光する露光工程と、上記露光された感光性樹脂組成物層に対して、ネガ型現像処理を行う現像処理工程と、上記現像処理後の感光性樹脂組成物層の表面に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程と、上記金属層及び感光性樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部を表面活性化処理する表面活性化処理工程を含み、さらに、再度、上記感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程、上記露光工程、および、上記現像処理工程を、上記順に行うことを含み、上記感光性樹脂組成物が、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリイミド、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体およびポリベンゾオキサゾールから選択される樹脂を含み、
さらに、上記樹脂が重合性基を含むこと、および、上記感光性樹脂組成物が重合性化合物を含むことの少なくとも一方を満たすことを特徴とする。
 このように、絶縁膜を積層するに際し、ネガ型現像し、さらに、表面活性化処理することにより、層間の密着性を向上させることが可能になる。これに対し、上記特許文献1には、このような樹脂層を積層した例がない。また、特許文献1では、ポジ型現像を行っており、露光した部分をアルカリ現像するため、密着性が不十分となりやすい。さらに、ポジ型現像を行う場合、樹脂層の未露光部が表面活性化処理を受けることとなり、感光性樹脂組成物(樹脂層)がダメージを受けやすく、密着性の低下が起こったと推定される。これに対し、ネガ型では3次元架橋構造を形成することができ、膜の強度を高めることができ、表面活性化処理に対してもダメージを受けにくくできる。
 以上に基づき、本発明では、上記手段を採用することにより、多層構成としても、樹脂層と樹脂層、および、樹脂層と金属層との間の高い密着性を達成できる。
 以下、本発明の詳細を説明する。
The method for producing a laminate of the present invention includes a photosensitive resin composition layer forming step of applying a photosensitive resin composition to a substrate to form a layer, an exposure step of exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer, and the above A development process for performing a negative development process on the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer, a metal layer formation process for forming a metal layer on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the development process, and the above A surface activation treatment step of performing surface activation treatment on at least a part of the metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer, and again, the photosensitive resin composition layer formation step, the exposure step, and the development treatment. Including performing steps in the above order, wherein the photosensitive resin composition includes a resin selected from a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a polybenzoxazole,
Furthermore, the resin satisfies at least one of containing a polymerizable group and the photosensitive resin composition containing a polymerizable compound.
As described above, when laminating the insulating films, it is possible to improve the adhesion between the layers by performing the negative development and further performing the surface activation treatment. On the other hand, Patent Document 1 does not have an example in which such a resin layer is laminated. In Patent Document 1, since positive development is performed and the exposed portion is alkali-developed, the adhesion tends to be insufficient. Furthermore, when performing positive development, it is estimated that the unexposed portion of the resin layer is subjected to surface activation treatment, and the photosensitive resin composition (resin layer) is easily damaged, resulting in a decrease in adhesion. . On the other hand, the negative type can form a three-dimensional crosslinked structure, can increase the strength of the film, and can be hardly damaged even by the surface activation treatment.
Based on the above, in the present invention, by adopting the above means, high adhesion between the resin layer and the resin layer and between the resin layer and the metal layer can be achieved even in a multilayer configuration.
Details of the present invention will be described below.
<感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、感光性樹脂組成物を基板に適用して層状にする、感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程を含む。
 感光性樹脂組成物を基板に適用する手段としては、塗布が好ましい。
 具体的には、適用する手段としては、ディップコート法、エアーナイフコート法、カーテンコート法、ワイヤーバーコート法、グラビアコート法、エクストルージョンコート法、スピンコート法、スリットスキャン法、およびインクジェット法などが例示される。感光性樹脂組成物層の厚さの均一性の観点から、より好ましくはスピンコート法である。スピンコート法の場合、例えば、500~2000rpmの回転数で、10秒~1分程度適用することができる。
 感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)の厚さは、露光後で、0.1~100μmとなるように塗布することが好ましく、1~50μmとなるように塗布することがより好ましい。また、後述する図2に示すように、形成される感光性樹脂組成物層の厚さは、必ずしも均一である必要はない。特に、凹凸のある表面上に感光性樹脂組成物層が設けられる場合、図2に示すように、厚さの異なる樹脂層となるであろう。特に複数層積層した場合、凹部として、深さの大きい凹部も形成されうるが、本発明はこのような構成に対し、層間の剥離をより効果的に抑制できる点で技術的価値が高い。なお、本発明の積層体が厚さの異なる樹脂層を有する場合、最も薄い部分の樹脂層の厚さが上記厚さであることが好ましい。
 基板の種類は、用途に応じて適宜定めることができるが、シリコン、窒化シリコン、ポリシリコン、酸化シリコン、アモルファスシリコンなどの半導体作製基板、石英、ガラス、光学フィルム、セラミック材料、蒸着膜、磁性膜、反射膜、Ni、Cu、Cr、Feなどの金属基板、紙、SOG(Spin  On  Glass)、TFT(薄膜トランジスタ)アレイ基板、プラズマディスプレイパネル(PDP)の電極板など、特に制約されない。本発明では、特に、半導体作製基板が好ましく、シリコンがより好ましい。
 また、樹脂層の表面や金属層の表面に感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する場合は、樹脂層や金属層が基板となる。

 感光性樹脂組成物の詳細については、後述する。
<Photosensitive resin composition layer forming step>
The manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the photosensitive resin composition layer formation process which applies the photosensitive resin composition to a board | substrate, and makes it layered.
As a means for applying the photosensitive resin composition to the substrate, coating is preferable.
Specifically, examples of applicable means include dip coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, wire bar coating, gravure coating, extrusion coating, spin coating, slit scanning, and inkjet. Is exemplified. From the viewpoint of the uniformity of the thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer, the spin coating method is more preferable. In the case of the spin coating method, for example, it can be applied at a rotational speed of 500 to 2000 rpm for about 10 seconds to 1 minute.
The thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) is preferably applied to be 0.1 to 100 μm after exposure, and more preferably 1 to 50 μm. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 2 described later, the thickness of the formed photosensitive resin composition layer is not necessarily uniform. In particular, when a photosensitive resin composition layer is provided on an uneven surface, the resin layers will have different thicknesses as shown in FIG. In particular, when a plurality of layers are laminated, a concave portion having a large depth can be formed as the concave portion. However, the present invention has a high technical value in that the delamination between layers can be more effectively suppressed with respect to such a configuration. In addition, when the laminated body of this invention has a resin layer from which thickness differs, it is preferable that the thickness of the resin layer of the thinnest part is the said thickness.
The type of the substrate can be appropriately determined according to the application, but a semiconductor production substrate such as silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, amorphous silicon, quartz, glass, optical film, ceramic material, vapor deposition film, magnetic film , Reflective films, metal substrates such as Ni, Cu, Cr, and Fe, paper, SOG (Spin On Glass), TFT (thin film transistor) array substrates, plasma display panel (PDP) electrode plates, and the like are not particularly limited. In the present invention, a semiconductor manufacturing substrate is particularly preferable, and silicon is more preferable.
Moreover, when forming the photosensitive resin composition layer on the surface of a resin layer or the surface of a metal layer, a resin layer or a metal layer becomes a board | substrate.

Details of the photosensitive resin composition will be described later.
<ろ過工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、感光性樹脂組成物を基板に適用する前に、感光性樹脂組成物をろ過する工程を含んでいてもよい。ろ過は、フィルターを用いて行うことが好ましい。フィルター孔径としては、1μm以下が好ましく、0.5μm以下がより好ましく、0.1μm以下がさらに好ましい。フィルターの材質としては、ポリテトラフロロエチレン製、ポリエチレン製、ナイロン製のフィルターが好ましい。フィルターは、有機溶剤であらかじめ洗浄したものを用いてもよい。フィルター濾過工程では、複数種のフィルターを直列または並列に接続して用いてもよい。複数種のフィルターを使用する場合は、孔径および/または材質が異なるフィルターを組み合わせて使用しても良い。また、各種材料を複数回濾過してもよく、複数回濾過する工程が循環濾過工程であっても良い。また、加圧してろ過を行ってもよく、加圧する圧力は0.05MPa以上0.3MPa以下が好ましい。 フィルターを用いたろ過の他、吸着材を用いた不純物の除去を行っても良く、フィルターろ過と吸着材を組み合わせて使用しても良い。吸着材としては、公知の吸着材を用いることができ、例えば、シリカゲル、ゼオライトなどの無機系吸着材、活性炭などの有機系吸着材を使用することができる。
<Filtration process>
The manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention may include the process of filtering the photosensitive resin composition, before applying the photosensitive resin composition to a board | substrate. Filtration is preferably performed using a filter. The filter pore diameter is preferably 1 μm or less, more preferably 0.5 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.1 μm or less. As a material of the filter, a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon is preferable. A filter that has been washed in advance with an organic solvent may be used. In the filter filtration step, a plurality of types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel. When a plurality of types of filters are used, filters having different pore diameters and / or materials may be used in combination. Moreover, various materials may be filtered a plurality of times, and the step of filtering a plurality of times may be a circulating filtration step. Moreover, you may pressurize and filter and the pressure to pressurize is 0.05 MPa or more and 0.3 MPa or less. In addition to filtration using a filter, impurities may be removed using an adsorbent, or a combination of filter filtration and adsorbent may be used. As the adsorbent, known adsorbents can be used. For example, inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon can be used.
<乾燥工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、感光性樹脂組成物層を形成後、溶剤を乾燥する工程を含んでいてもよい。好ましい乾燥温度は50~150℃であり、70℃~130℃がより好ましく、90℃~110℃がさらに好ましい。乾燥時間としては、30秒~20分が好ましく、1分~10分がより好ましく、3分~7分がさらに好ましい。
<Drying process>
The manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention may include the process of drying a solvent, after forming the photosensitive resin composition layer. A preferable drying temperature is 50 to 150 ° C, more preferably 70 to 130 ° C, and further preferably 90 to 110 ° C. The drying time is preferably 30 seconds to 20 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes, and further preferably 3 minutes to 7 minutes.
<露光工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、上記感光性樹脂組成物層を露光する露光工程を含む。露光は、感光性樹脂組成物を硬化できる限り特に定めるものではないが、例えば、波長365nmでの露光エネルギー換算で100~10,000mJ/cm照射することが好ましく、200~8000mJ/cm照射することがより好ましい。
 露光波長は、190~1000nmの範囲で適宜定めることができ、240~550nmが好ましい。
<Exposure process>
The manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the exposure process which exposes the said photosensitive resin composition layer. The exposure is not particularly defined as long as the photosensitive resin composition can be cured, but for example, it is preferable to irradiate 100 to 10,000 mJ / cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at a wavelength of 365 nm, and 200 to 8000 mJ / cm 2 irradiation. More preferably.
The exposure wavelength can be appropriately determined in the range of 190 to 1000 nm, and is preferably 240 to 550 nm.
<現像処理工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、露光された感光性樹脂組成物層に対してネガ型現像処理を行う、現像処理工程を含む。ネガ型現像を行うことにより、露光されていない部分(非露光部)が除去される。現像は現像液を用いて行う。現像液は、露光されていない部分(非露光部)を除去できるものであれば、特に制限なく使用できる。溶剤が好ましく、エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、γ-ブチロラクトン、ε-カプロラクトン、δ-バレロラクトン、アルコキシ酢酸アルキル(例えば、アルコキシ酢酸メチル、アルコキシ酢酸エチル、アルコキシ酢酸ブチル(例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-アルコキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、3-アルコキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-アルコキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-アルコキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチルおよび2-アルコキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例えば、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル等、ならびに、エーテル類として、例えば、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート等、ならびに、ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン等、ならびに、芳香族炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン、アニソール、リモネン等、ならびに、スルホキシド類としてジメチルスルホキシド、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、が好適に挙げられる。なかでも、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、およびプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートが好ましく、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトンがより好ましい。
 現像時間としては、10秒~5分が好ましい。現像時の温度は、特に定めるものではないが、通常、20~40℃で行うことができる。
 現像液を用いた処理の後、さらに、リンスを行ってもよい。リンスは、現像液とは異なる溶剤で行うことが好ましい。例えば、感光性樹脂組成物に含まれる溶剤を用いてリンスすることができる。リンス時間は、5秒~1分が好ましい。
<Development process>
The manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the image development process process which performs negative development processing with respect to the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer. By performing negative development, the unexposed part (non-exposed part) is removed. Development is performed using a developer. The developer can be used without particular limitation as long as it can remove the unexposed part (non-exposed part). Solvents are preferred, and examples of esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, and γ-butyrolactone. , Ε-caprolactone, δ-valerolactone, alkyl alkoxyacetate (eg, methyl alkoxyacetate, ethyl alkoxyacetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc. )), 3-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (for example, methyl 3-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkoxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate) Methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.), 2-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (for example, methyl 2-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkoxypropionate, propyl 2-alkoxypropionate, etc.) For example, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate and Ethyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate (for example, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, aceto vinegar Methyl, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate and the like, and ethers such as diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate , Diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, etc., and ketones such as methyl ethyl Ketones, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and the like, and aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene, anisole, limonene and the like, and sulfoxides Preferable examples include dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, and butyl carbitol acetate. Among them, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone Dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate are preferred, and cyclopentanone and γ-butyrolactone are more preferred.
The development time is preferably 10 seconds to 5 minutes. The temperature at the time of development is not particularly defined, but it can usually be carried out at 20 to 40 ° C.
After treatment with a developer, rinsing may be further performed. The rinsing is preferably performed with a solvent different from the developer. For example, it can rinse using the solvent contained in the photosensitive resin composition. The rinse time is preferably 5 seconds to 1 minute.
<加熱工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、加熱工程を含むことが好ましい。加熱工程では、ポリイミド前駆体およびポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の環化反応が進行する。ポリイミドやポリベンゾオキサゾールでは、架橋剤と共に加熱する場合、3次元ネットワーク構造を形成する。また、未反応のラジカル重合性化合物の硬化なども進行する。最高加熱温度としては、100~500℃が好ましく、140~400℃がより好ましく、160~350℃がさらに好ましい。
 加熱は、20~150℃の温度から最高加熱温度まで1~12℃/分の昇温速度で行うことが好ましく、2~10℃/分がより好ましく、3~10℃/分がさらに好ましい。昇温速度を1℃/分以上とすることにより、生産性を確保しつつ、アミンの過剰な揮発を防止することができ、昇温速度を12℃/分以下とすることにより、硬化膜の残存応力を緩和することができる。
 加熱開始時の温度は、20~150℃が好ましく、20℃~130℃がより好ましく、25℃~120℃がさらに好ましい。加熱開始時の温度とは、最高加熱温度まで加熱する工程を開始する際の温度のことをいう。例えば、感光性樹脂組成物を基板の上に適用した後、乾燥させる場合、この乾燥後の温度であり、例えば、感光性樹脂組成物に含まれる溶剤の沸点より30~200℃低い温度から徐々に昇温させることが好ましい。
 加熱は、最高加熱温度に到達した後、10~360分間加熱を行うことが好ましく、20~300分間加熱を行うことがさらに好ましく、30~240分間加熱を行うことが特に好ましい。
<Heating process>
It is preferable that the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes a heating process. In the heating step, the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor proceeds. In polyimide and polybenzoxazole, when heated with a crosslinking agent, a three-dimensional network structure is formed. In addition, curing of the unreacted radical polymerizable compound also proceeds. The maximum heating temperature is preferably 100 to 500 ° C, more preferably 140 to 400 ° C, and further preferably 160 to 350 ° C.
Heating is preferably performed at a temperature rising rate of 1 to 12 ° C./min from a temperature of 20 to 150 ° C. to a maximum heating temperature, more preferably 2 to 10 ° C./min, and further preferably 3 to 10 ° C./min. By setting the heating rate to 1 ° C./min or more, it is possible to prevent excessive volatilization of the amine while ensuring productivity, and by setting the heating rate to 12 ° C./min or less, the cured film Residual stress can be relaxed.
The temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20 to 150 ° C., more preferably 20 to 130 ° C., and further preferably 25 to 120 ° C. The temperature at the start of heating refers to the temperature at the start of the step of heating to the maximum heating temperature. For example, when the photosensitive resin composition is applied onto a substrate and then dried, the temperature is the temperature after the drying, for example, gradually from a temperature lower by 30 to 200 ° C. than the boiling point of the solvent contained in the photosensitive resin composition. It is preferable to raise the temperature to
Heating is preferably performed for 10 to 360 minutes after reaching the maximum heating temperature, more preferably for 20 to 300 minutes, and particularly preferably for 30 to 240 minutes.
 加熱は段階的に行ってもよい。例として、25℃から180℃まで3℃/分で昇温し、180℃にて60分置き、180から200℃まで2℃/分で昇温し、200℃にて120分置く、といった工程が挙げられる。
 さらに、加熱後冷却してもよく、この場合の冷却速度としては、1~5℃/分であることが好ましい。
Heating may be performed in stages. As an example, the temperature is raised from 25 ° C. to 180 ° C. at 3 ° C./min, placed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes, heated from 180 to 200 ° C. at 2 ° C./minute, and placed at 200 ° C. for 120 minutes. Is mentioned.
Further, it may be cooled after heating, and the cooling rate in this case is preferably 1 to 5 ° C./min.
 加熱工程は、窒素、ヘリウム、アルゴンなどの不活性ガスを流す等により、低酸素濃度の雰囲気で行うことが、ポリイミド前駆体等の分解を防ぐ点で好ましい。酸素濃度は、50ppm(v/v)以下が好ましく、20ppm(v/v)以下がより好ましい。 The heating step is preferably performed in an atmosphere having a low oxygen concentration by flowing an inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, or argon in order to prevent decomposition of the polyimide precursor or the like. The oxygen concentration is preferably 50 ppm (v / v) or less, and more preferably 20 ppm (v / v) or less.
<<金属層形成工程>>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、現像処理後の感光性樹脂組成物層の表面に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程を含む。
 金属層としては、特に限定はなく、既存の金属種を使用することができ、銅、アルミニウム、ニッケル、バナジウム、チタン、クロム、コバルト、金およびタングステンが例示され、銅およびアルミニウムがより好ましく、銅がさらに好ましい。
 金属層の形成方法は、特に限定はなく、既存の方法を適用することができる。例えば、特開2007-157879号公報、特表2001-521288号公報、特開2004-214501号公報、特開2004-101850号公報に記載された方法を使用することができる。例えば、フォトリソグラフィ、リフトオフ、電解メッキ、無電解メッキ、エッチング、印刷、およびこれらを組み合わせた方法などが考えられる。より具体的には、スパッタリング、フォトリソグラフィおよびエッチングを組み合わせたパターニング方法、フォトリソグラフィと電解メッキを組み合わせたパターニング方法が挙げられる。
 金属層の厚さとしては、最も厚い部分で、0.1~50μmであることが好ましく、1~10μmがより好ましい。
<< Metal layer formation process >>
The manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the metal layer formation process which forms a metal layer on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after image development processing.
The metal layer is not particularly limited, and an existing metal species can be used. Examples thereof include copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, chromium, cobalt, gold, and tungsten, and copper and aluminum are more preferable. Is more preferable.
The method for forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and an existing method can be applied. For example, the methods described in JP 2007-157879 A, JP 2001-521288 A, JP 2004-214501 A, and JP 2004-101850 A can be used. For example, photolithography, lift-off, electrolytic plating, electroless plating, etching, printing, and a combination of these can be considered. More specifically, a patterning method that combines sputtering, photolithography, and etching, and a patterning method that combines photolithography and electrolytic plating may be mentioned.
The thickness of the metal layer is preferably 0.1 to 50 μm, more preferably 1 to 10 μm at the thickest portion.
<表面活性化処理工程>
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、上記金属層および感光性樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部を表面活性化処理する、表面活性化処理工程を含む。
 表面活性化処理工程は、通常、金属層形成工程の後に行うが、上記露光現像工程の後、感光性樹脂組成物層に表面活性化処理工程を行ってから、金属層形成工程を行ってもよい。
 表面活性化処理は、金属層の少なくとも一部のみに行ってもよいし、露光後の感光性樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部のみに行ってもよいし、金属層および露光後の感光性樹脂組成物層の両方について、それぞれ、少なくとも一部に行ってもよい。表面活性化処理は、金属層の少なくとも一部について行うことが好ましく、金属層のうち、表面に感光性樹脂組成物層を形成する領域の一部または全部に表面活性化処理を行うことが好ましい。このように、金属層の表面に表面活性化処理を行うことにより、その表面に設けられる樹脂層との密着性を向上させることができる。
 また、表面活性化処理は、露光後の感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)の一部または全部についても行うことが好ましい。このように、感光性樹脂組成物層の表面に表面活性化処理を行うことにより、表面活性化処理した表面に設けられる金属層や樹脂層との密着性を向上させることができる。特にポジ型現像を行う場合、未露光部が表面活性化処理を受けることとなり、感光性樹脂組成物(樹脂層)がダメージを受けやすく、密着性の低下が起こる。本発明では、ネガ型現像をするため、露光部が表面処理を受けることとなり、硬化などにより膜の強度が向上していることから、感光性樹脂組成物(樹脂層)がダメージを受けず、かかる問題がない。
 表面活性化処理としては、具体的には、各種原料ガス(酸素、水素、アルゴン、窒素、窒素/水素混合ガス、アルゴン/酸素混合ガスなど)のプラズマ処理、コロナ放電処理、CF/O、NF/O、SF、NF、NF/Oによるエッチング処理、紫外線(UV)オゾン法による表面処理、塩酸水溶液に浸漬して酸化皮膜を除去した後にアミノ基とチオール基を少なくとも一種有する化合物を含む有機表面処理剤への浸漬処理、ブラシを用いた機械的な粗面化処理から選択され、プラズマ処理が好ましく、特に原料ガスに酸素を用いた酸素プラズマ処理が好ましい。コロナ放電処理の場合、エネルギーは、500~200,000J/mが好ましく、1000~100,000J/mがより好ましく、10,000~50,000J/mが最も好ましい。
<Surface activation treatment process>
The manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the surface activation process process of carrying out the surface activation process of at least one part of the said metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer.
The surface activation treatment step is usually performed after the metal layer formation step, but after the exposure and development step, the surface activation treatment step is performed on the photosensitive resin composition layer, and then the metal layer formation step is performed. Good.
The surface activation treatment may be performed only on at least a part of the metal layer, or may be performed only on at least a part of the photosensitive resin composition layer after exposure, or the metal layer and the photosensitive resin after exposure. You may go to at least one part about both of a composition layer, respectively. The surface activation treatment is preferably performed on at least a part of the metal layer, and the surface activation treatment is preferably performed on a part or all of the region of the metal layer where the photosensitive resin composition layer is formed on the surface. . Thus, by performing the surface activation treatment on the surface of the metal layer, the adhesion with the resin layer provided on the surface can be improved.
The surface activation treatment is also preferably performed on part or all of the photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) after exposure. Thus, by performing the surface activation treatment on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer, it is possible to improve the adhesion with a metal layer or a resin layer provided on the surface subjected to the surface activation treatment. In particular, when positive development is performed, the unexposed portion is subjected to a surface activation treatment, and the photosensitive resin composition (resin layer) is easily damaged, resulting in a decrease in adhesion. In the present invention, since the negative development is performed, the exposed portion is subjected to a surface treatment, and the strength of the film is improved by curing or the like, so that the photosensitive resin composition (resin layer) is not damaged, There is no such problem.
Specifically, the surface activation treatment includes plasma treatment of various source gases (oxygen, hydrogen, argon, nitrogen, nitrogen / hydrogen mixed gas, argon / oxygen mixed gas, etc.), corona discharge treatment, CF 4 / O 2. Etching treatment with NF 3 / O 2 , SF 6 , NF 3 , NF 3 / O 2 , surface treatment by ultraviolet (UV) ozone method, immersion in hydrochloric acid aqueous solution to remove oxide film, amino group and thiol group It is selected from an immersion treatment in an organic surface treatment agent containing at least one compound and a mechanical surface roughening treatment using a brush, and a plasma treatment is preferred, and an oxygen plasma treatment using oxygen as a raw material gas is particularly preferred. For corona discharge treatment, the energy is preferably 500 ~ 200,000J / m 2, more preferably 1000 ~ 100,000J / m 2, and most preferably 10,000 ~ 50,000J / m 2.
<積層工程>
 本発明の製造方法は、さらに、以下の積層工程を含む。
 積層工程とは、再度、上記感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程、上記露光工程、および、上記現像処理工程を、上記順に行うことを含む、一連の工程である。すなわち、積層工程には、さらに、上記乾燥工程や加熱工程等を含んでいてもよいことは言うまでもない。
 積層工程後、さらに積層工程を行う場合には、上記露光工程後、または、上記金属層形成工程後に、さらに、上記表面活性化処理工程を行うことが好ましい。
 上記積層工程は、3~7回行うことが好ましく、3~5回行うことがより好ましい。
 例えば、樹脂層/金属層/樹脂層/金属層/樹脂層/金属層のような、樹脂層が3層以上7層以下の構成が好ましく、3層以上5層以下がさらに好ましい。2層以下であれば酸素プラズマ処理等がなくても十分に密着する場合があるが、多層構成にするほど、繰り返し現像液や金属エッチング処理、キュアによる高温処理にさらされるため、金属層/樹脂層界面や樹脂層/樹脂層界面で剥がれが生じやすくなる。
 このような構成とすることにより、感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)と金属層を交互に積層することができ、半導体の多層配線構造として用いることができる。
<Lamination process>
The manufacturing method of the present invention further includes the following lamination steps.
A lamination process is a series of processes including performing the said photosensitive resin composition layer formation process, the said exposure process, and the said image development process again in the said order again. That is, it goes without saying that the laminating step may further include the drying step and the heating step.
When the lamination process is further performed after the lamination process, it is preferable that the surface activation treatment process is further performed after the exposure process or after the metal layer formation process.
The lamination step is preferably performed 3 to 7 times, more preferably 3 to 5 times.
For example, the resin layer / metal layer / resin layer / metal layer / resin layer / metal layer has a resin layer structure of 3 to 7 layers, more preferably 3 to 5 layers. If there are two layers or less, there may be sufficient adhesion without oxygen plasma treatment or the like, but the more the multi-layer structure, the more repeatedly exposed to a high temperature treatment by a developing solution, metal etching treatment, and curing. Peeling tends to occur at the layer interface or at the resin layer / resin layer interface.
By setting it as such a structure, the photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) and a metal layer can be laminated | stacked alternately, and it can use as a multilayer wiring structure of a semiconductor.
<感光性樹脂組成物>
 本発明で用いる感光性樹脂組成物(以下、「本発明で用いる組成物」ということがある)は、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリイミド、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体およびポリベンゾオキサゾールから選択される樹脂(以下、「ポリイミド前駆体等」ということがある)を含み、ポリイミド前駆体またはポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体を含むことが好ましく、ポリイミド前駆体を含むことがより好ましい。
 さらに、ポリイミド前駆体等の樹脂が重合性基を含むこと、および、上記感光性樹脂組成物が重合性化合物を含むことの少なくとも一方を満たす。特に、ポリイミド前駆体等の樹脂が重合性基を含み、かつ、上記感光性樹脂組成物が重合性化合物を含むことが好ましい。このような構成とすることにより、露光部に3次元ネットワークが形成され、強固な架橋膜となり、表面活性化処理により感光性樹脂組成物(樹脂層)がダメージを受けず、表面活性化処理により、密着性がより効果的に向上する。
 さらにまた、ポリイミド前駆体等の樹脂が、-Ar-L-Ar-で表される部分構造を含むことが好ましい。但し、Arは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基であり、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基(好ましくは、アルキレン基)、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-または-NHCO-、あるいは、上記の2つ以上の組み合わせからなる基である。このような構成とすることにより、樹脂層が柔軟な構造となり、剥がれの発生を抑制する効果がより効果的に発揮される。Arは、フェニレン基が好ましく、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1または2の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-または-SO-が好ましい。
 以下、本発明で用いる感光性樹脂組成物の詳細について説明する。
<Photosensitive resin composition>
The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the composition used in the present invention”) is a resin selected from a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a polybenzoxazole (hereinafter referred to as “polybenzoxazole”). It is preferable that a polyimide precursor or a polybenzoxazole precursor is included, and a polyimide precursor is more preferable.
Furthermore, it satisfies at least one of a resin such as a polyimide precursor containing a polymerizable group and a case where the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymerizable compound. In particular, it is preferable that a resin such as a polyimide precursor contains a polymerizable group, and the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymerizable compound. By adopting such a configuration, a three-dimensional network is formed in the exposed area, and a strong cross-linked film is formed. The photosensitive resin composition (resin layer) is not damaged by the surface activation treatment, and the surface activation treatment , Adhesion is more effectively improved.
Furthermore, it is preferable that the resin such as a polyimide precursor includes a partial structure represented by —Ar—L—Ar—. However, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably an alkylene group) which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO 2 — or —NHCO—, or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above. By setting it as such a structure, a resin layer becomes a flexible structure and the effect which suppresses generation | occurrence | production of peeling is exhibited more effectively. Ar is preferably a phenylene group, and L is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S— or —SO 2 —. .
Hereinafter, the detail of the photosensitive resin composition used by this invention is demonstrated.
<<ポリイミド前駆体>>
 本発明で用いるポリイミド前駆体は、その種類等特に定めるものではないが、下記式(2)で表される繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。
式(2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式(2)中、AおよびAは、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子またはNHを表し、R111は、2価の有機基を表し、R115は、4価の有機基を表し、R113およびR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または1価の有機基を表す。
<< Polyimide precursor >>
The polyimide precursor used in the present invention is not particularly defined in terms of its type and the like, but preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (2).
Formula (2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
In formula (2), A 1 and A 2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH, R 111 represents a divalent organic group, R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group, R 113 And R 114 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
 式(2)におけるAおよびAは、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子またはNHを表し、酸素原子が好ましい。
 式(2)におけるR111は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、直鎖または分岐の脂肪族基、環状の脂肪族基および芳香族基を含む基が例示され、炭素数2~20の直鎖または分岐の脂肪族基、炭素数6~20の環状の脂肪族基、炭素数6~20の芳香族基、または、これらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、炭素数6~60の芳香族基を含む基がより好ましい。本発明の特に好ましい実施形態として、-Ar-L-Ar-で表される基であることが例示される。但し、Arは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基であり、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-または-NHCO-、あるいは、上記の2つ以上の組み合わせからなる基である。これらの好ましい範囲は、上述のとおりである。
A 1 and A 2 in Formula (2) each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH, and preferably an oxygen atom.
R 111 in Formula (2) represents a divalent organic group. Examples of the divalent organic group include a straight chain or branched aliphatic group, a group containing a cyclic aliphatic group and an aromatic group, a straight chain or branched aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a carbon number A group consisting of a cyclic aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms or a combination thereof is preferable, and a group containing an aromatic group having 6 to 60 carbon atoms is more preferable. As a particularly preferred embodiment of the present invention, a group represented by —Ar—L—Ar— is exemplified. However, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—. , —SO 2 — or —NHCO—, or a group comprising a combination of two or more of the above. These preferable ranges are as described above.
 R111は、ジアミンから誘導されることが好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体の製造に用いられるジアミンとしては、直鎖または分岐の脂肪族、環状の脂肪族または芳香族ジアミンなどが挙げられる。ジアミンは、1種のみ用いても良いし、2種以上用いても良い。
 具体的には、炭素数2~20の直鎖または分岐の脂肪族基、炭素数6~20の環状の脂肪族基、炭素数6~20の芳香族基、または、これらの組み合わせからなる基を含むジアミンであることが好ましく、炭素数6~60の芳香族基からなる基を含むジアミンであることがより好ましい。芳香族基の例としては、下記が挙げられる。
R 111 is preferably derived from a diamine. Examples of the diamine used in the production of the polyimide precursor include linear or branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic or aromatic diamine. One type of diamine may be used, or two or more types may be used.
Specifically, a group consisting of a linear or branched aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyclic aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a combination thereof. A diamine containing is preferable, and a diamine containing a group consisting of an aromatic group having 6 to 60 carbon atoms is more preferable. The following are mentioned as an example of an aromatic group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式中、Aは、単結合、または、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-S(=O)-、および-NHCO-ならびに、これらの組み合わせから選択される基であることが好ましく、単結合、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキレン基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-SO-から選択される基であることがより好ましく、-CH-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-C(CF-、および、-C(CH-からなる群から選択される2価の基であることがさらに好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
In the formula, A is a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —C (═O) —, —S—, —S (═O) 2 — and —NHCO—, and a group selected from these combinations are preferable, a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O It is more preferably a group selected from —, —C (═O) —, —S—, —SO 2 —, —CH 2 —, —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —C More preferably, it is a divalent group selected from the group consisting of (CF 3 ) 2 — and —C (CH 3 ) 2 —.
 ジアミンとしては、具体的には、1,2-ジアミノエタン、1,2-ジアミノプロパン、1,3-ジアミノプロパン、1,4-ジアミノブタンおよび1,6-ジアミノヘキサン;1,2-または1,3-ジアミノシクロペンタン、1,2-、1,3-または1,4-ジアミノシクロヘキサン、1,2-、1,3-または1,4-ビス(アミノメチル)シクロヘキサン、ビス-(4-アミノシクロヘキシル)メタン、ビス-(3-アミノシクロヘキシル)メタン、4,4’-ジアミノ-3,3’-ジメチルシクロヘキシルメタンおよびイソホロンジアミン;m-またはp-フェニレンジアミン、ジアミノトルエン、4,4’-または3,3’-ジアミノビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、3,3-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、4,4’-および3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、4,4’-および3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、4,4’-および3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルフィド、4,4’-または3,3’-ジアミノベンゾフェノン、3,3’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、2,2’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、3,3’-ジメトキシ-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、2,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)スルホン、ビス(4-アミノ-3-ヒドロキシフェニル)スルホン、4,4’-ジアミノパラテルフェニル、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ビフェニル、ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、ビス[4-(3-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、ビス[4-(2-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]スルホン、1,4-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、9,10-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)アントラセン、3,3’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、1,3-ビス(3-アミノフェノキシ)ベンゼン、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ベンゼン、3,3’-ジエチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、3,3’-ジメチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、4,4’-ジアミノオクタフルオロビフェニル、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]プロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、9,9-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)-10-ヒドロアントラセン、3,3’,4,4’-テトラアミノビフェニル、3,3’,4,4’-テトラアミノジフェニルエーテル、1,4-ジアミノアントラキノン、1,5-ジアミノアントラキノン、3,3-ジヒドロキシ-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、9,9’-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)フルオレン、4,4’-ジメチル-3,3’-ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、3,3’,5,5’-テトラメチル-4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルメタン、2,4-および2,5-ジアミノクメン、2,5-ジメチル-p-フェニレンジアミン、アセトグアナミン、2,3,5,6-テトラメチル-p-フェニレンジアミン、2,4,6-トリメチル-m-フェニレンジアミン、ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、2,7-ジアミノフルオレン、2,5-ジアミノピリジン、1,2-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)エタン、ジアミノベンズアニリド、ジアミノ安息香酸のエステル、1,5-ジアミノナフタレン、ジアミノベンゾトリフルオライド、1,3-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、1,4-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)オクタフルオロブタン、1,5-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)デカフルオロペンタン、1,7-ビス(4-アミノフェニル)テトラデカフルオロヘプタン、2,2-ビス[4-(3-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(2-アミノフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)-3,5-ジメチルフェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノフェノキシ)-3,5-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、p-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ベンゼン、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ビフェニル、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノ-3-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ビフェニル、4,4’-ビス(4-アミノ-2-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルホン、4,4’-ビス(3-アミノ-5-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)ジフェニルスルホン、2,2-ビス[4-(4-アミノ-3-トリフルオロメチルフェノキシ)フェニル]ヘキサフルオロプロパン、3,3’,5,5’-テトラメチル-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノ-2,2’-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ビフェニル、2,2’,5,5’,6,6’-ヘキサフルオロトリジンおよび4,4’’’-ジアミノクアテルフェニルから選ばれる少なくとも1種のジアミンが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the diamine include 1,2-diaminoethane, 1,2-diaminopropane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,4-diaminobutane and 1,6-diaminohexane; 1,2- or 1 , 3-diaminocyclopentane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-diaminocyclohexane, 1,2-, 1,3- or 1,4-bis (aminomethyl) cyclohexane, bis- (4- Aminocyclohexyl) methane, bis- (3-aminocyclohexyl) methane, 4,4′-diamino-3,3′-dimethylcyclohexylmethane and isophoronediamine; m- or p-phenylenediamine, diaminotoluene, 4,4′- Or 3,3′-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4′-diaminodiphenyl ether, 3,3-diaminodiphenyl ether 4,4'- and 3,3'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 4,4'- and 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfone, 4,4'- and 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide, 4,4 ' -Or 3,3'-diaminobenzophenone, 3,3'-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2'-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 3,3'-dimethoxy-4,4 '-Diaminobiphenyl, 2,2-bis (4-aminophenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (4-aminophenyl) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis (3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) propane, , 2-bis (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) hexafluoropropane, bis (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) sulfone, bis (4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) sulfone, 4,4'-diamino Paraterphenyl, 4,4′-bis (4-aminophenoxy) biphenyl, bis [4- (4-aminophenoxy) phenyl] sulfone, bis [4- (3-aminophenoxy) phenyl] sulfone, bis [4- (2-aminophenoxy) phenyl] sulfone, 1,4-bis (4-aminophenoxy) benzene, 9,10-bis (4-aminophenyl) anthracene, 3,3′-dimethyl-4,4′-diaminodiphenyl Sulfone, 1,3-bis (4-aminophenoxy) benzene, 1,3-bis (3-aminophenoxy) benzene 1,3-bis (4-aminophenyl) benzene, 3,3′-diethyl-4,4′-diaminodiphenylmethane, 3,3′-dimethyl-4,4′-diaminodiphenylmethane, 4,4′- Diaminooctafluorobiphenyl, 2,2-bis [4- (4-aminophenoxy) phenyl] propane, 2,2-bis [4- (4-aminophenoxy) phenyl] hexafluoropropane, 9,9-bis (4 -Aminophenyl) -10-hydroanthracene, 3,3 ', 4,4'-tetraaminobiphenyl, 3,3', 4,4'-tetraaminodiphenyl ether, 1,4-diaminoanthraquinone, 1,5-diamino Anthraquinone, 3,3-dihydroxy-4,4′-diaminobiphenyl, 9,9′-bis (4-aminophenyl) fluorene, 4 4'-dimethyl-3,3'-diaminodiphenylsulfone, 3,3 ', 5,5'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 2,4- and 2,5-diaminocumene, 2,5 -Dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, acetoguanamine, 2,3,5,6-tetramethyl-p-phenylenediamine, 2,4,6-trimethyl-m-phenylenediamine, bis (3-aminopropyl) tetramethyldi Siloxane, 2,7-diaminofluorene, 2,5-diaminopyridine, 1,2-bis (4-aminophenyl) ethane, diaminobenzanilide, ester of diaminobenzoic acid, 1,5-diaminonaphthalene, diaminobenzotrifluoride 1,3-bis (4-aminophenyl) hexafluoropropane, 1,4-bis (4-amino) Phenyl) octafluorobutane, 1,5-bis (4-aminophenyl) decafluoropentane, 1,7-bis (4-aminophenyl) tetradecafluoroheptane, 2,2-bis [4- (3-aminophenoxy) ) Phenyl] hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis [4- (2-aminophenoxy) phenyl] hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis [4- (4-aminophenoxy) -3,5-dimethylphenyl] hexa Fluoropropane, 2,2-bis [4- (4-aminophenoxy) -3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) phenyl] hexafluoropropane, p-bis (4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy) benzene 4,4′-bis (4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy) biphenyl, 4,4′-bis (4 -Amino-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy) biphenyl, 4,4'-bis (4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy) diphenyl sulfone, 4,4'-bis (3-amino-5-trifluoromethylphenoxy) ) Diphenylsulfone, 2,2-bis [4- (4-amino-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy) phenyl] hexafluoropropane, 3,3 ′, 5,5′-tetramethyl-4,4′-diaminobiphenyl 4,4′-diamino-2,2′-bis (trifluoromethyl) biphenyl, 2,2 ′, 5,5 ′, 6,6′-hexafluorotolidine and 4,4 ′ ″-diaminoquater The at least 1 sort (s) of diamine chosen from phenyl is mentioned.
 また、下記に示すジアミン(DA-1)~(DA-18)も好ましい。 Further, diamines (DA-1) to (DA-18) shown below are also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 また、少なくとも2つ以上のアルキレングリコール単位を主鎖にもつジアミンも好ましい例として挙げられる。好ましくは、エチレングリコール鎖、プロピレングリコール鎖のいずれかまたは両方を一分子中にあわせて2つ以上含むジアミン、より好ましくは芳香環を含まないジアミンである。具体例としては、ジェファーミン(登録商標)KH-511、ジェファーミン(登録商標)ED-600、ジェファーミン(登録商標)ED-900、ジェファーミン(登録商標)ED-2003、ジェファーミン(登録商標)EDR-148、ジェファーミン(登録商標)EDR-176、D-200、D-400、D-2000、D-4000(以上商品名、HUNTSMAN(株)製)、1-(2-(2-(2-アミノプロポキシ)エトキシ)プロポキシ)プロパン-2-アミン、1-(1-(1-(2-アミノプロポキシ)プロパン-2-イル)オキシ)プロパン-2-アミンなどが挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。
 ジェファーミン(登録商標)KH-511、ジェファーミン(登録商標)ED-600、ジェファーミン(登録商標)ED-900、ジェファーミン(登録商標)ED-2003、ジェファーミン(登録商標)EDR-148、ジェファーミン(登録商標)EDR-176の構造を以下に示す。
A diamine having at least two alkylene glycol units in the main chain is also a preferred example. Preferred is a diamine containing at least two ethylene glycol chains or propylene glycol chains in one molecule, more preferably a diamine containing no aromatic ring. Specific examples include Jeffermin (registered trademark) KH-511, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-600, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-900, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-2003, Jeffermin (registered trademark). ) EDR-148, Jeffamine (registered trademark) EDR-176, D-200, D-400, D-2000, D-4000 (trade name, manufactured by HUNTSMAN Co., Ltd.), 1- (2- (2- (2-aminopropoxy) ethoxy) propoxy) propan-2-amine, 1- (1- (1- (2-aminopropoxy) propan-2-yl) oxy) propan-2-amine, and the like. It is not limited to.
Jeffermin (registered trademark) KH-511, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-600, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-900, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-2003, Jeffermin (registered trademark) EDR-148, The structure of Jeffamine (registered trademark) EDR-176 is shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 上記において、x、y、zは平均値である。 In the above, x, y, and z are average values.
 R111は、得られる硬化膜の柔軟性の観点から、-Ar-L-Ar-で表されることが好ましい。但し、Arは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基であり、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基(好ましくは、アルキレン基)、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-または-NHCO-、あるいは、上記の2つ以上の組み合わせからなる基である。Arは、フェニレン基が好ましく、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1または2の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-または-SO-がさらに好ましい。 R 111 is preferably represented by —Ar—L—Ar— from the viewpoint of the flexibility of the resulting cured film. However, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably an alkylene group) which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO 2 — or —NHCO—, or a group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above. Ar is preferably a phenylene group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S— or —SO 2 —. preferable.
 また、R111は、i線透過率の観点から、下記式(51)または式(61)で表わされる2価の有機基であることが好ましい。特に、i線透過率、入手のし易さの観点から、式(61)で表わされる2価の有機基であることがより好ましい。
 式(51)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 式(51)中、R10~R17は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子または1価の有機基であり、R10~R17の少なくとも1つは、フッ素原子、メチル基またはトリフルオロメチル基である。
 R10~R17の1価の有機基としては、炭素数1~10(好ましくは炭素数1~6)の無置換のアルキル基、炭素数1~10(好ましくは炭素数1~6)のフッ化アルキル基等が挙げられる。
 式(61)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式(61)中、R18およびR19は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子またはトリフルオロメチル基である。
 式(51)または(61)の構造を有するジアミン化合物としては、2,2’-ジメチルベンジジン、2,2’-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、2,2’-ビス(フルオロ)-4,4’-ジアミノビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノオクタフルオロビフェニル等が挙げられる。これらは1種でまたは2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
R 111 is preferably a divalent organic group represented by the following formula (51) or formula (61) from the viewpoint of i-line transmittance. In particular, from the viewpoints of i-line transmittance and availability, a divalent organic group represented by the formula (61) is more preferable.
Formula (51)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
In formula (51), R 10 to R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 10 to R 17 is a fluorine atom, a methyl group or trifluoro It is a methyl group.
Examples of the monovalent organic group represented by R 10 to R 17 include an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms) and an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples include a fluorinated alkyl group.
Formula (61)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
In formula (61), R 18 and R 19 are each independently a fluorine atom or a trifluoromethyl group.
Examples of the diamine compound having the structure of the formula (51) or (61) include 2,2′-dimethylbenzidine, 2,2′-bis (trifluoromethyl) -4,4′-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2′- Bis (fluoro) -4,4′-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4′-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl and the like can be mentioned. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 式(2)におけるR115は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、芳香環を含む4価の有機基が好ましく、下記式(5)または式(6)で表される基がより好ましい。
式(5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 式(5)中、R112は、単結合、または、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-、および-NHCO-、ならびに、これらの組み合わせから選択される基であることが好ましく、単結合、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキレン基、-O-、-CO-、-S-および-SO-から選択される基であることがより好ましく、-CH-、-C(CF-、-C(CH-、-O-、-CO-、-S-および-SO-からなる群から選択される2価の基であることがさらに好ましい。
R 115 in the formula (2) represents a tetravalent organic group. As the tetravalent organic group, a tetravalent organic group containing an aromatic ring is preferable, and a group represented by the following formula (5) or formula (6) is more preferable.
Formula (5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
In the formula (5), R 112 represents a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO. 2 -, and -NHCO-, and is preferably a group selected from these combinations, a single bond, an alkylene group which ~ 1 carbon atoms which may be 3-substituted by fluorine atoms, -O -, - More preferably, it is a group selected from CO—, —S— and —SO 2 —, and —CH 2 —, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, —C (CH 3 ) 2 —, —O—, More preferably, it is a divalent group selected from the group consisting of —CO—, —S— and —SO 2 —.
式(6)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Formula (6)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 R115は、具体的には、テトラカルボン酸二無水物から無水物基の除去後に残存するテトラカルボン酸残基などが挙げられる。テトラカルボン酸二無水物は、1種のみ用いても良いし、2種以上用いても良い。
 テトラカルボン酸二無水物は、下記式(0)で表されることが好ましい。
式(O)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式(0)中、R115は、4価の有機基を表す。R115の好ましい範囲は式(2)におけるR115と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
Specific examples of R 115 include a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of the anhydride group from tetracarboxylic dianhydride. Only one tetracarboxylic dianhydride may be used, or two or more tetracarboxylic dianhydrides may be used.
The tetracarboxylic dianhydride is preferably represented by the following formula (0).
Formula (O)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
In formula (0), R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group. A preferred range of R 115 has the same meaning as R 115 in formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.
 テトラカルボン酸二無水物の具体例としては、ピロメリット酸二無水物(PMDA)、3,3’,4,4’-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジフェニルスルフィドテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジフェニルスルホンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,3’,4,4’-ジフェニルメタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2’,3,3’-ジフェニルメタンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,3,3’,4’-ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,3,3’,4’-ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、4,4’-オキシジフタル酸二無水物、2,3,6,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,7-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)プロパン二無水物、2,2-ビス(2,3-ジカルボキシフェニル)プロパン二無水物、2,2-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン二無水物、1,3-ジフェニルヘキサフルオロプロパン-3,3,4,4-テトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,6-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、2,2’,3,3’-ジフェニルテトラカルボン酸二無水物、3,4,9,10-ペリレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,2,4,5-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,4,5,8-ナフタレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,8,9,10-フェナントレンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、1,1-ビス(2,3-ジカルボキシフェニル)エタン二無水物、1,1-ビス(3,4-ジカルボキシフェニル)エタン二無水物、1,2,3,4-ベンゼンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、ならびに、これらの炭素数1~6のアルキルおよび炭素数1~6のアルコキシ誘導体が挙げられる。 Specific examples of tetracarboxylic dianhydride include pyromellitic dianhydride (PMDA), 3,3 ′, 4,4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′- Diphenyl sulfide tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-diphenylsulfone tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′, 4,4′-benzophenone tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3 ′ , 4,4′-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2 ′, 3,3′-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3 ′, 4′-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3 ′, 4′-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4′-oxydiphthalic dianhydride, 2,3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5 , Naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenyl) propane dianhydride, 2,2-bis (2,3-dicarboxyphenyl) propane dianhydride, 2,2 -Bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenyl) hexafluoropropane dianhydride, 1,3-diphenylhexafluoropropane-3,3,4,4-tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,6- Naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2 ′, 3,3′-diphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,4,9,10-perylenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,2,4,5- Naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,8-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,8,9,10-phenanthrenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,1-bis (2,3 Dicarboxyphenyl) ethane dianhydride, 1,1-bis (3,4-dicarboxyphenyl) ethane dianhydride, 1,2,3,4-benzenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, and their carbon number Examples thereof include alkyl having 1 to 6 and alkoxy derivatives having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 また、下記に示すテトラカルボン酸二無水物(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)も好ましい例として挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Further, tetracarboxylic dianhydrides (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) shown below are also preferable examples.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 R111とR115の少なくとも一方がOH基を有することも好ましい。より具体的には、R111として、ビスアミノフェノール誘導体の残基が挙げられる。 It is also preferred that at least one of R 111 and R 115 has an OH group. More specifically, examples of R 111 include a residue of a bisaminophenol derivative.
 R113およびR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または1価の有機基を表し、R113およびR114の少なくとも一方が重合性基を含むことが好ましく、両方が重合性基を含むことがより好ましい。重合性基としては、熱、ラジカル等の作用により、架橋反応することが可能な基であって、光ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。重合性基の具体例としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、アルコキシメチル基、ヒドロキシメチル基、アシルオキシメチル基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ベンゾオキサゾリル基、ブロックイソシアネート基、メチロール基、アミノ基が挙げられる。ポリイミド前駆体等が有するラジカル重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、下記式(III)で表される基などが挙げられる。
R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 113 and R 114 preferably contains a polymerizable group, and more preferably both contain a polymerizable group. preferable. The polymerizable group is a group capable of undergoing a crosslinking reaction by the action of heat, radicals, etc., and is preferably a photoradical polymerizable group. Specific examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, alkoxymethyl group, hydroxymethyl group, acyloxymethyl group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, benzoxazolyl group, blocked isocyanate group, methylol group, amino group. Groups. The radical polymerizable group possessed by the polyimide precursor or the like is preferably a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, a group represented by the following formula (III), and the like.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 式(III)において、R200は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、メチル基がより好ましい。
 式(III)において、R201は、炭素数2~12のアルキレン基、-CHCH(OH)CH-または炭素数4~30のポリオキシアルキレン基を表す。
 好適なR201の例は、エチレン基、プロピレン基、トリメチレン基、テトラメチレン基、1,2-ブタンジイル基、1,3-ブタンジイル基、ペンタメチレン基、ヘキサメチレン基、オクタメチレン基、ドデカメチレン基、-CHCH(OH)CH-が挙げられ、エチレン基、プロピレン基、トリメチレン基、-CHCH(OH)CH-がより好ましい。
 特に好ましくは、R200がメチル基で、R201がエチレン基である。
In the formula (III), R 200 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and a methyl group is more preferable.
In the formula (III), R 201 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, —CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 — or a polyoxyalkylene group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms.
Examples of suitable R 201 are ethylene group, propylene group, trimethylene group, tetramethylene group, 1,2-butanediyl group, 1,3-butanediyl group, pentamethylene group, hexamethylene group, octamethylene group, dodecamethylene group. , —CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 —, and ethylene group, propylene group, trimethylene group, and —CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 — are more preferable.
Particularly preferably, R 200 is a methyl group and R 201 is an ethylene group.
 R113およびR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または1価の有機基を表す。1価の有機基としては、アリール基を構成する炭素に結合している1つ、2つまたは3つの、好ましくは1つの酸性基を有する、芳香族基およびアラルキル基などが挙げられる。具体的には、酸性基を有する炭素数6~20の芳香族基、酸性基を有する炭素数7~25のアラルキル基が挙げられる。より具体的には、酸性基を有するフェニル基および酸性基を有するベンジル基が挙げられる。酸性基は、OH基が好ましい。
 R113またはR114は、水素原子、2-ヒドロキシベンジル、3-ヒドロキシベンジルおよび4-ヒドロキシベンジルであることが好ましい。
R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. Examples of the monovalent organic group include an aromatic group and an aralkyl group having one, two, or three, preferably one acidic group bonded to carbon constituting the aryl group. Specific examples include an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms having an acidic group and an aralkyl group having 7 to 25 carbon atoms having an acidic group. More specifically, a phenyl group having an acidic group and a benzyl group having an acidic group can be mentioned. The acidic group is preferably an OH group.
R 113 or R 114 is preferably a hydrogen atom, 2-hydroxybenzyl, 3-hydroxybenzyl and 4-hydroxybenzyl.
 有機溶剤への溶解度の観点からは、R113またはR114は、1価の有機基であることが好ましい。 アルキル基の炭素数は1~30が好ましい。アルキル基は直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。直鎖または分岐のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ドデシル基、テトラデシル基、オクタデシル基、イソプロピル基、イソブチル基、sec-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、1-エチルペンチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、2-(2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ)エトキシ基、2-(2-(2-エトキシエトキシ)エトキシ)エトキシ)エトキシ基、2-(2-(2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ)エトキシ)エトキシ基、および2-(2-(2-(2-エトキシエトキシ)エトキシ)エトキシ)エトキシ基が挙げられる。環状のアルキル基は、単環の環状のアルキル基であってもよく、多環の環状のアルキル基であってもよい。単環の環状のアルキル基としては、例えば、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、シクロヘプチル基およびシクロオクチル基が挙げられる。多環の環状のアルキル基としては、例えば、アダマンチル基、ノルボルニル基、ボルニル基、カンフェニル基、デカヒドロナフチル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、カンホロイル基、ジシクロヘキシル基およびピネニル基が挙げられる。中でも、高感度化との両立の観点から、シクロヘキシル基が最も好ましい。また、芳香族基で置換されたアルキル基としては、後述する芳香族基で置換された直鎖アルキル基が好ましい。
 芳香族基としては、具体的には、置換または無置換のベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、ペンタレン環、インデン環、アズレン環、ヘプタレン環、インダセン環、ペリレン環、ペンタセン環、アセナフテン環、フェナントレン環、アントラセン環、ナフタセン環、クリセン環、トリフェニレン環、フルオレン環、ビフェニル環、ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピリミジン環、ピリダジン環、インドリジン環、インドール環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、イソベンゾフラン環、キノリジン環、キノリン環、フタラジン環、ナフチリジン環、キノキサリン環、キノキサゾリン環、イソキノリン環、カルバゾール環、フェナントリジン環、アクリジン環、フェナントロリン環、チアントレン環、クロメン環、キサンテン環、フェノキサチイン環、フェノチアジン環またはフェナジン環である。ベンゼン環が最も好ましい。
From the viewpoint of solubility in an organic solvent, R 113 or R 114 is preferably a monovalent organic group. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic. Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a dodecyl group, a tetradecyl group, and an octadecyl group. , Isopropyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, 1-ethylpentyl, 2-ethylhexyl, 2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy) ethoxy, 2- (2- ( 2-ethoxyethoxy) ethoxy) ethoxy) ethoxy group, 2- (2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy) ethoxy) ethoxy group, and 2- (2- (2- (2-ethoxyethoxy) ethoxy) Ethoxy) ethoxy group. The cyclic alkyl group may be a monocyclic cyclic alkyl group or a polycyclic cyclic alkyl group. Examples of the monocyclic alkyl group include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cycloheptyl group, and a cyclooctyl group. Examples of the polycyclic alkyl group include an adamantyl group, a norbornyl group, a bornyl group, a camphenyl group, a decahydronaphthyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a camphoroyl group, a dicyclohexyl group, and a pinenyl group. Is mentioned. Among these, a cyclohexyl group is most preferable from the viewpoint of achieving high sensitivity. Moreover, as an alkyl group substituted by the aromatic group, the linear alkyl group substituted by the aromatic group mentioned later is preferable.
Specific examples of the aromatic group include substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pentalene ring, indene ring, azulene ring, heptalene ring, indacene ring, perylene ring, pentacene ring, acenaphthene ring, phenanthrene ring, anthracene. Ring, naphthacene ring, chrysene ring, triphenylene ring, fluorene ring, biphenyl ring, pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring, indolizine ring , Indole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring, isobenzofuran ring, quinolidine ring, quinoline ring, phthalazine ring, naphthyridine ring, quinoxaline ring, quinoxazoline ring, isoquinoline ring, carbazole ring, phenanthridine ring, acridine ring, fluorine Nantororin ring, a thianthrene ring, a chromene ring, a xanthene ring, a phenoxathiin ring, a phenothiazine ring or a phenazine ring. A benzene ring is most preferred.
 式(2)において、R113が水素原子である場合、または、R114が水素原子である場合、ポリイミド前駆体は、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する3級アミン化合物と対塩を形成していてもよい。このようなエチレン性不飽和結合を有する3級アミン化合物の例としては、N,N-ジメチルアミノプロピルメタクリレートが挙げられる。 In the formula (2), when R 113 is a hydrogen atom, or when R 114 is a hydrogen atom, the polyimide precursor forms a counter salt with a tertiary amine compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. Also good. Examples of such tertiary amine compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include N, N-dimethylaminopropyl methacrylate.
 また、ポリイミド前駆体は、構造単位中にフッ素原子を有することも好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体中のフッ素原子含有量は、10質量%以上が好ましく、また、20質量%以下が好ましい。 The polyimide precursor preferably has a fluorine atom in the structural unit. The fluorine atom content in the polyimide precursor is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.
 また、基板との密着性を向上させる目的で、ポリイミド前駆体は、シロキサン構造を有する脂肪族基と共重合していてもよい。具体的には、ジアミン成分として、ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、ビス(p-アミノフェニル)オクタメチルペンタシロキサンなどが挙げられる。 Further, for the purpose of improving the adhesion to the substrate, the polyimide precursor may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure. Specifically, examples of the diamine component include bis (3-aminopropyl) tetramethyldisiloxane and bis (p-aminophenyl) octamethylpentasiloxane.
 式(2)で表される繰り返し単位は、式(2-A)で表される繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。すなわち、本発明で用いるポリイミド前駆体等の少なくとも1種が、式(2-A)で表される繰り返し単位を有する前駆体であることが好ましい。このような構造とすることにより、露光ラチチュードの幅をより広げることが可能になる。
式(2-A)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式(2-A)中、AおよびAは、酸素原子を表し、R111およびR112は、それぞれ独立に、2価の有機基を表し、R113およびR114は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または1価の有機基を表し、R113およびR114の少なくとも一方は、重合性基を含む基であり、両方が重合性基であることが好ましい。
The repeating unit represented by the formula (2) is preferably a repeating unit represented by the formula (2-A). That is, at least one of the polyimide precursors and the like used in the present invention is preferably a precursor having a repeating unit represented by the formula (2-A). By adopting such a structure, it becomes possible to further widen the width of the exposure latitude.
Formula (2-A)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
In formula (2-A), A 1 and A 2 each represent an oxygen atom, R 111 and R 112 each independently represent a divalent organic group, and R 113 and R 114 each independently represent It represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 113 and R 114 is a group containing a polymerizable group, and preferably both are a polymerizable group.
 A、A、R111、R113およびR114は、それぞれ独立に、式(2)におけるA、A、R111、R113およびR114と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
112は、式(5)におけるR112と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
A 1, A 2, R 111 , R 113 and R 114 are each independently the same meaning as A 1, A 2, R 111 , R 113 and R 114 in formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same .
R 112 has the same meaning as R 112 in formula (5), and the preferred range is also the same.
 ポリイミド前駆体は、式(2)で表される繰り返し構造単位を1種含んでいてもよいが、2種以上含んでいてもよい。また、式(2)で表される繰り返し単位の構造異性体を含んでいてもよい。また、ポリイミド前駆体は、上記の式(2)の繰り返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰り返し構造単位も含んでよいことはいうまでもない。 The polyimide precursor may contain one type of repeating structural unit represented by the formula (2), but may contain two or more types. Moreover, the structural isomer of the repeating unit represented by Formula (2) may be included. Needless to say, the polyimide precursor may contain other types of repeating structural units in addition to the repeating unit of the above formula (2).
 本発明におけるポリイミド前駆体の一実施形態として、全繰り返し単位の50モル%以上、さらには70モル%以上、特に90モル%以上が式(2)で表される繰り返し単位であるポリイミド前駆体が例示される。 As one embodiment of the polyimide precursor in the present invention, there is a polyimide precursor in which 50 mol% or more, further 70 mol% or more, particularly 90 mol% or more of all repeating units are repeating units represented by the formula (2). Illustrated.
 ポリイミド前駆体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、好ましくは18,000~30,000であり、より好ましくは20,000~27,000であり、さらに好ましくは22,000~25,000である。また、数平均分子量(Mn)は、好ましくは7,200~14,000であり、より好ましくは8,000~12,000であり、さらに好ましくは9,200~11,200である。
 上記ポリイミド前駆体の分散度は、2.5以上が好ましく、2.7以上がより好ましく、2.8以上であることがさらに好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、4.5以下が好ましく、4.0以下がより好ましく、3.8以下がさらに好ましく、3.2以下が一層好ましく、3.1以下がより一層好ましく、3.0以下がさらに一層好ましく、2.95以下が特に好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 18,000 to 30,000, more preferably 20,000 to 27,000, and further preferably 22,000 to 25,000. The number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, and still more preferably 9,200 to 11,200.
The dispersion degree of the polyimide precursor is preferably 2.5 or more, more preferably 2.7 or more, and further preferably 2.8 or more. The upper limit of the degree of dispersion of the polyimide precursor is not particularly defined, but is, for example, preferably 4.5 or less, more preferably 4.0 or less, still more preferably 3.8 or less, still more preferably 3.2 or less, 3.1 or less is even more preferable, 3.0 or less is even more preferable, and 2.95 or less is particularly preferable.
<<ポリイミド>>
 本発明で用いるポリイミドとしては、イミド環を有する高分子化合物であれば、特に限定はないが、下記式(4)で表される化合物であることが好ましく、式(4)で表される化合物であって、重合性基を有する化合物であることがより好ましい。
式(4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式(4)中、R131は、2価の有機基を表し、R132は、4価の有機基を表す。
 重合性基を有する場合、重合性基は、R131およびR132の少なくとも一方に位置していてもよいし、下記式(4-1)または式(4-2)に示すようにポリイミドの末端に位置していてもよい。
式(4-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
式(4-2)中、R133は重合性基であり、他の基は式(4)と同義である。
式(4-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 R134およびR135の少なくとも一方は重合性基であり、重合性基でない場合は有機基であり、他の基は式(4)と同義である。
<< Polyimide >>
The polyimide used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imide ring, but is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (4), and a compound represented by the formula (4) And it is more preferable that it is a compound which has a polymeric group.
Formula (4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
In formula (4), R 131 represents a divalent organic group, and R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group.
In the case of having a polymerizable group, the polymerizable group may be located in at least one of R 131 and R 132 , or as shown in the following formula (4-1) or formula (4-2), May be located.
Formula (4-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
In the formula (4-2), R 133 is a polymerizable group, and other groups are as defined in the formula (4).
Formula (4-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
At least one of R 134 and R 135 is a polymerizable group. When it is not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups have the same meanings as in formula (4).
 重合性基は、上記のポリイミド前駆体等が有している重合性基で述べた重合性基と同義である。
 R131は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、式(2)におけるR111と同様のものが例示され、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 また、R131としては、ジアミンのアミノ基の除去後に残存するジアミン残基が挙げられる。ジアミンとしては、脂肪族、環式脂肪族または芳香族ジアミンなどが挙げられる。具体的な例としては、ポリイミド前駆体の式(2)中のR111の例が挙げられる。
A polymerizable group is synonymous with the polymerizable group described in the polymerizable group which said polyimide precursor etc. have.
R 131 represents a divalent organic group. Examples of the divalent organic group include those similar to R 111 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
As the R 131, include diamine residues remaining after removal of the amino groups of the diamine. Examples of the diamine include aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic diamines. As a specific example, an example of R 111 in the formula (2) of the polyimide precursor can be given.
 R131は、少なくとも2つ以上のアルキレングリコール単位を主鎖にもつジアミン残基であることが、焼成時における反りの発生をより効果的に抑制する点で好ましい。より好ましくは、エチレングリコール鎖、プロピレングリコール鎖のいずれかまたは両方を一分子中にあわせて2つ以上含むジアミン残基であり、さらに好ましくは芳香環を含まないジアミン残基である。 R 131 is preferably a diamine residue having at least two alkylene glycol units in the main chain from the viewpoint of more effectively suppressing the occurrence of warpage during firing. More preferred is a diamine residue containing at least two ethylene glycol chains or propylene glycol chains in one molecule, and more preferred is a diamine residue containing no aromatic ring.
 エチレングリコール鎖、プロピレングリコール鎖のいずれかまたは両方を一分子中にあわせて2つ以上含むジアミンとしては、ジェファーミン(登録商標)KH-511、ジェファーミン(登録商標)ED-600、ジェファーミン(登録商標)ED-900、ジェファーミン(登録商標)ED-2003、ジェファーミン(登録商標)EDR-148、ジェファーミン(登録商標)EDR-176、D-200、D-400、D-2000、D-4000(以上商品名、HUNTSMAN(株)製)、1-(2-(2-(2-アミノプロポキシ)エトキシ)プロポキシ)プロパン-2-アミン、1-(1-(1-(2-アミノプロポキシ)プロパン-2-イル)オキシ)プロパン-2-アミン、1-(2-(2-(2-アミノプロポキシ)エトキシ)プロポキシ)プロパン-2-アミンなどが挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。 Examples of diamines containing two or more ethylene glycol chains and / or propylene glycol chains in one molecule include Jeffamine (registered trademark) KH-511, Jeffamine (registered trademark) ED-600, Jeffamine ( (Registered trademark) ED-900, Jeffermin (registered trademark) ED-2003, Jeffermin (registered trademark) EDR-148, Jeffermin (registered trademark) EDR-176, D-200, D-400, D-2000, D -4000 (trade name, manufactured by HUNTSMAN Co., Ltd.), 1- (2- (2- (2-aminopropoxy) ethoxy) propoxy) propan-2-amine, 1- (1- (1- (2-amino) Propoxy) propan-2-yl) oxy) propan-2-amine, 1- (2- (2- (2-aminopropoxy) Ethoxy) propoxy) the like-2-amine include, but are not limited to.
 R132は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、式(2)におけるR115と同様のものが例示され、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 例えば、R115として例示される4価の有機基の4つの結合子が、上記式(4)中の4つの-C(=O)-の部分と結合して縮合環を形成する。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group. Examples of the tetravalent organic group include those similar to R 115 in formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.
For example, four bonds of a tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 115 are bonded to four —C (═O) — moieties in the above formula (4) to form a condensed ring.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 また、R132は、テトラカルボン酸二無水物から無水物基の除去後に残存するテトラカルボン酸残基などが挙げられる。具体的な例としては、ポリイミド前駆体の式(2)中のR115の例が挙げられる。硬化膜の強度の観点から、R132は1~4つの芳香環を有する芳香族ジアミン残基であることが好ましい。 Examples of R 132 include a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of the anhydride group from tetracarboxylic dianhydride. Specific examples include those exemplified R 115 in formula (2) of the polyimide precursor. From the viewpoint of the strength of the cured film, R 132 is preferably an aromatic diamine residue having 1 to 4 aromatic rings.
 R131とR132の少なくとも一方にOH基を有することも好ましい。より具体的には、R131として、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、上記の(DA-1)~(DA-18)が好ましい例として挙げられ、R132として、上記の(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)が好ましい例として挙げられる。 It is also preferable that at least one of R 131 and R 132 has an OH group. More specifically, as R 131 , 2,2-bis (3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl) hexafluoropropane, 2,2- Preferred examples include bis (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) hexafluoropropane, and (DA-1) to (DA-18) above. As R 132 , the above-mentioned (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) are mentioned as preferred examples.
 また、ポリイミドは、構造単位中にフッ素原子を有することも好ましい。ポリイミド中のフッ素原子の含有量は、10質量%以上が好ましく、また、20質量%以下が好ましい。 Also, it is preferable that the polyimide has a fluorine atom in the structural unit. The content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide is preferably 10% by mass or more, and preferably 20% by mass or less.
 また、基板との密着性を向上させる目的で、ポリイミドは、シロキサン構造を有する脂肪族の基を共重合してもよい。具体的には、ジアミン成分として、ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン、ビス(p-アミノフェニル)オクタメチルペンタシロキサンなどが挙げられる。 Also, for the purpose of improving the adhesion to the substrate, the polyimide may be copolymerized with an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure. Specifically, examples of the diamine component include bis (3-aminopropyl) tetramethyldisiloxane and bis (p-aminophenyl) octamethylpentasiloxane.
 また、組成物の保存安定性を向上させるため、ポリイミドは主鎖末端をモノアミン、酸無水物、モノカルボン酸、モノ酸クロリド化合物、モノ活性エステル化合物などの末端封止剤で封止することが好ましい。これらのうち、モノアミンを用いることがより好ましく、モノアミンの好ましい化合物としては、アニリン、2-エチニルアニリン、3-エチニルアニリン、4-エチニルアニリン、5-アミノ-8-ヒドロキシキノリン、1-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-アミノ安息香酸、3-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノサリチル酸、5-アミノサリチル酸、6-アミノサリチル酸、2-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノ-4,6-ジヒドロキシピリミジン、2-アミノフェノール、3-アミノフェノール、4-アミノフェノール、2-アミノチオフェノール、3-アミノチオフェノール、4-アミノチオフェノールなどが挙げられる。これらを2種以上用いてもよく、複数の末端封止剤を反応させることにより、複数の異なる末端基を導入してもよい。 In order to improve the storage stability of the composition, the end of the main chain of the polyimide may be sealed with a terminal blocking agent such as a monoamine, acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, or monoactive ester compound. preferable. Of these, it is more preferable to use a monoamine. Preferred examples of the monoamine include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, and 1-hydroxy-7. -Aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2, -Hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6- Aminonaphthalene, 2-carbo Ci-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino Benzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3-aminothiophenol, 4 -Aminothiophenol and the like. Two or more of these may be used, and a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of terminal blocking agents.
 ポリイミドはイミド化率が85%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。イミド化率が85%以上であることにより、加熱によりイミド化される時に起こる閉環による膜収縮が小さくなり、反りの発生を抑えることができる。 The polyimide preferably has an imidization ratio of 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more. When the imidization ratio is 85% or more, film shrinkage due to ring closure that occurs when imidization is performed by heating is reduced, and generation of warpage can be suppressed.
 ポリイミドは、すべてが1種のR131またはR132に基づく上記式(4)の繰り返し構造単位に加え、これらの基の2つ以上の異なる種類に基づく繰り返し単位を含んでもよい。また、ポリイミドは、上記の式(4)の繰り返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰り返し構造単位も含んでよい。 The polyimide may contain repeating units based on two or more different types of these groups in addition to the repeating structural unit of the above formula (4) all based on one kind of R 131 or R 132 . The polyimide may also contain other types of repeating structural units in addition to the repeating unit of the above formula (4).
 ポリイミドは、例えば、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物とジアミン化合物(一部をモノアミンである末端封止剤に置換)を反応させる方法、低温中でテトラカルボン酸二無水物(一部を酸無水物またはモノ酸クロリド化合物またはモノ活性エステル化合物である末端封止剤に置換)とジアミン化合物を反応させる方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後ジアミン(一部をモノアミンである末端封止剤に置換)と縮合剤の存在下で反応させる方法、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とアルコールとによりジエステルを得、その後残りのジカルボン酸を酸クロリド化し、ジアミン(一部をモノアミンである末端封止剤に置換)と反応させる方法などの方法を利用して、ポリイミド前駆体を得、これを、既知のイミド化反応法を用いて完全イミド化させる方法、または、途中でイミド化反応を停止し、一部イミド構造を導入する方法、さらには、完全イミド化したポリマーと、そのポリイミド前駆体をブレンドする事によって、一部イミド構造を導入する方法を利用して合成することができる。
 ポリイミドの市販品としては、Durimide(登録商標)284(富士フイルム(株)製)、Matrimide5218(HUNTSMAN(株)製)が例示される。
For example, polyimide can be prepared by reacting tetracarboxylic dianhydride with a diamine compound (partially replaced with a monoamine end-capping agent) at low temperature, or tetracarboxylic dianhydride (partially acid at low temperature). A method of reacting an anhydride, a monoacid chloride compound or a mono-active ester compound with an end-capping agent) and a diamine compound, a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol to obtain a diester, and then a diamine (partly a monoamine) A method of reacting in the presence of a condensing agent and a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and an alcohol to obtain a diester, and then converting the remaining dicarboxylic acid to an acid chloride to obtain a diamine (partially a monoamine) The polyimide precursor is obtained using a method such as a method of reacting with an end-capping agent that is a known method. A method of complete imidization using the imidation reaction method, a method of stopping the imidization reaction in the middle and introducing a part of an imide structure, and further blending a completely imidized polymer and its polyimide precursor By some things, it can synthesize | combine using the method of introduce | transducing a partial imide structure.
Examples of commercially available polyimide products include Durimide (registered trademark) 284 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Corporation) and Matrimid 5218 (manufactured by HUNTSMAN Co., Ltd.).
 ポリイミドの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5,000~70,000が好ましく、8,000~50,000がより好ましく、10,000~30,000がさらに好ましい。重量平均分子量を5,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性に優れた硬化膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、20,000以上が特に好ましい。また、ポリイミドを2種以上含有する場合、少なくとも1種のポリイミドの重量平均分子量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and still more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the bending resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain a cured film having excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more. Moreover, when it contains 2 or more types of polyimides, it is preferable that the weight average molecular weight of at least 1 type of polyimide is the said range.
<<ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体>>
 本発明で用いるポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、その構造等について特に定めるものではないが、好ましくは下記式(3)で表される。
式(3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式(3)中、R121は、2価の有機基を表し、R122は、4価の有機基を表し、R123およびR124は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または1価の有機基を表す。
<< Polybenzoxazole precursor >>
The polybenzoxazole precursor used in the present invention is not particularly defined with respect to its structure and the like, but is preferably represented by the following formula (3).
Formula (3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
In Formula (3), R 121 represents a divalent organic group, R 122 represents a tetravalent organic group, and R 123 and R 124 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. To express.
 式(3)において、R123およびR124は、それぞれ、式(2)におけるR113と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。すなわち、少なくとも一方は、重合性基であることが好ましい。
 式(3)において、R121は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、脂肪族基および芳香族基の少なくとも一方を含む基が好ましい。脂肪族基としては、直鎖の脂肪族基が好ましい。R121は、ジカルボン酸残基が好ましい。ジカルボン酸残基は、1種のみ用いても良いし、2種以上用いても良い。
In the formula (3), R 123 and R 124 have the same meaning as R 113 in the formula (2), respectively, and the preferred range is also the same. That is, at least one is preferably a polymerizable group.
In the formula (3), R 121 represents a divalent organic group. The divalent organic group is preferably a group containing at least one of an aliphatic group and an aromatic group. As the aliphatic group, a linear aliphatic group is preferable. R 121 is preferably a dicarboxylic acid residue. Only one type of dicarboxylic acid residue may be used, or two or more types may be used.
 ジカルボン酸としては、脂肪族基を含むジカルボン酸および芳香族基を含むジカルボン酸が好ましく、芳香族基を含むジカルボン酸がより好ましい。
 脂肪族基を含むジカルボン酸としては、直鎖または分岐(好ましくは直鎖)の脂肪族基を含むジカルボン酸が好ましく、直鎖または分岐(好ましくは直鎖)の脂肪族基と2つのCOOHからなるジカルボン酸がより好ましい。直鎖または分岐(好ましくは直鎖)の脂肪族基の炭素数は、2~30であることが好ましく、2~25であることがより好ましく、3~20であることがさらに好ましく、4~15であることが一層好ましく、5~10であることが特に好ましい。直鎖の脂肪族基はアルキレン基であることが好ましい。
 直鎖の脂肪族基を含むジカルボン酸としては、マロン酸、ジメチルマロン酸、エチルマロン酸、イソプロピルマロン酸、ジ-n-ブチルマロン酸、スクシン酸、テトラフルオロスクシン酸、メチルスクシン酸、2,2-ジメチルスクシン酸、2,3-ジメチルスクシン酸、ジメチルメチルスクシン酸、グルタル酸、ヘキサフルオログルタル酸、2-メチルグルタル酸、3-メチルグルタル酸、2,2-ジメチルグルタル酸、3,3-ジメチルグルタル酸、3-エチル-3-メチルグルタル酸、アジピン酸、オクタフルオロアジピン酸、3-メチルアジピン酸、ピメリン酸、2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピメリン酸、スベリン酸、ドデカフルオロスベリン酸、アゼライン酸、セバシン酸、ヘキサデカフルオロセバシン酸、1,9-ノナン二酸、ドデカン二酸、トリデカン二酸、テトラデカン二酸、ペンタデカン二酸、ヘキサデカン二酸、ヘプタデカン二酸、オクタデカン二酸、ノナデカン二酸、エイコサン二酸、ヘンエイコサン二酸、ドコサン二酸、トリコサン二酸、テトラコサン二酸、ペンタコサン二酸、ヘキサコサン二酸、ヘプタコサン二酸、オクタコサン二酸、ノナコサン二酸、トリアコンタン二酸、ヘントリアコンタン二酸、ドトリアコンタン二酸、ジグリコール酸、さらに下記式で表されるジカルボン酸等が挙げられる。
As the dicarboxylic acid, a dicarboxylic acid containing an aliphatic group and a dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group are preferred, and a dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group is more preferred.
As the dicarboxylic acid containing an aliphatic group, a dicarboxylic acid containing a linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic group is preferable, and a linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic group and two COOHs are used. More preferred is a dicarboxylic acid. The linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 25 carbon atoms, still more preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms. 15 is more preferable, and 5 to 10 is particularly preferable. The linear aliphatic group is preferably an alkylene group.
Examples of the dicarboxylic acid containing a linear aliphatic group include malonic acid, dimethylmalonic acid, ethylmalonic acid, isopropylmalonic acid, di-n-butylmalonic acid, succinic acid, tetrafluorosuccinic acid, methylsuccinic acid, 2, 2-dimethylsuccinic acid, 2,3-dimethylsuccinic acid, dimethylmethylsuccinic acid, glutaric acid, hexafluoroglutaric acid, 2-methylglutaric acid, 3-methylglutaric acid, 2,2-dimethylglutaric acid, 3,3-dimethylglutaric acid, 3-ethyl-3-methylglutaric acid, adipic acid, octafluoroadipic acid, 3-methyladipic acid, pimelic acid, 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpimelic acid, suberin Acid, dodecafluorosuberic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, hexadecafluorosebacic acid, 1,9-nonanedioic acid Dodecanedioic acid, tridecanedioic acid, tetradecanedioic acid, pentadecanedioic acid, hexadecanedioic acid, heptadecanedioic acid, octadecanedioic acid, nonadecanedioic acid, eicosandioic acid, heneicosanedioic acid, docosanedioic acid, tricosanedioic acid, tetracosane diacid Acid, pentacosanedioic acid, hexacosanedioic acid, heptacosanedioic acid, octacosanedioic acid, nonacosandioic acid, triacontanedioic acid, hentriacontanedioic acid, dotriacontanedioic acid, diglycolic acid, and the following formula And dicarboxylic acid.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
(式中、Zは炭素数1~6の炭化水素基であり、nは1~6の整数である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
(In the formula, Z is a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and n is an integer of 1 to 6)
 芳香族基を含むジカルボン酸としては、以下の芳香族基を有するジカルボン酸が好ましく、以下の芳香族基と2つのCOOHのみからなるジカルボン酸がより好ましい。 The dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group is preferably a dicarboxylic acid having the following aromatic group, more preferably a dicarboxylic acid comprising only the following aromatic group and two COOH.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 式中、Aは-CH-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-CO-、-NHCO-、-C(CF-、および、-C(CH-からなる群から選択される2価の基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
In the formula, A represents —CH 2 —, —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, and —C (CH 3 ) 2 —. Represents a divalent group selected from the group consisting of
 芳香族基を含むジカルボン酸の具体例としては、4,4’-カルボニル二安息香酸および4,4’-ジカルボキシジフェニルエーテル、テレフタル酸が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group include 4,4'-carbonyldibenzoic acid, 4,4'-dicarboxydiphenyl ether, and terephthalic acid.
 式(3)において、R122は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、上記式(2)におけるR115と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 R122は、また、ビスアミノフェノール誘導体由来の基であることが好ましく、ビスアミノフェノール誘導体由来の基としては、例えば、3,3’-ジアミノ-4,4’-ジヒドロキシビフェニル、4,4’-ジアミノ-3,3’-ジヒドロキシビフェニル、3,3’-ジアミノ-4,4’-ジヒドロキシジフェニルスルホン、4,4’-ジアミノ-3,3’-ジヒドロキシジフェニルスルホン、ビス-(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メタン、2,2-ビス-(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス-(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、2,2-ビス-(4-アミノ-3-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパン、ビス-(4-アミノ-3-ヒドロキシフェニル)メタン、2,2-ビス-(4-アミノ-3-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン、4,4’-ジアミノ-3,3’-ジヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、3,3’-ジアミノ-4,4’-ジヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ジアミノ-3,3’-ジヒドロキシジフェニルエーテル、3,3’-ジアミノ-4,4’-ジヒドロキシジフェニルエーテル、1,4-ジアミノ-2,5-ジヒドロキシベンゼン、1,3-ジアミノ-2,4-ジヒドロキシベンゼン、1,3-ジアミノ-4,6-ジヒドロキシベンゼンなどが挙げられる。これらのビスアミノフェノールは、単独で、あるいは混合して使用してもよい。
In the formula (3), R 122 represents a tetravalent organic group. The tetravalent organic group has the same meaning as R 115 in the formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.
R 122 is preferably a group derived from a bisaminophenol derivative. Examples of the group derived from a bisaminophenol derivative include 3,3′-diamino-4,4′-dihydroxybiphenyl, 4,4 ′ -Diamino-3,3'-dihydroxybiphenyl, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxydiphenylsulfone, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dihydroxydiphenylsulfone, bis- (3-amino- 4-hydroxyphenyl) methane, 2,2-bis- (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) propane, 2,2-bis- (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis -(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) hexafluoropropane, bis- (4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) methane, 2,2 -Bis- (4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) propane, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dihydroxybenzophenone, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxybenzophenone, 4,4'- Diamino-3,3′-dihydroxydiphenyl ether, 3,3′-diamino-4,4′-dihydroxydiphenyl ether, 1,4-diamino-2,5-dihydroxybenzene, 1,3-diamino-2,4-dihydroxybenzene 1,3-diamino-4,6-dihydroxybenzene and the like. These bisaminophenols may be used alone or in combination.
 ビスアミノフェノール誘導体のうち、下記芳香族基を有するビスアミノフェノール誘導体が好ましい。 Of the bisaminophenol derivatives, bisaminophenol derivatives having the following aromatic groups are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 式中、Xは、-O-、-S-、-C(CF-、-CH-、-SO-、-NHCO-を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
In the formula, X 1 represents —O—, —S—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, —CH 2 —, —SO 2 —, —NHCO—.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 式(A-s)中、Rは、水素原子、アルキレン、置換アルキレン、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-CO-、-NHCO-、単結合、または下記式(A-sc)の群から選ばれる有機基である。Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基、環状のアルキル基のいずれかであり、同一でも異なっても良い。Rは、水素原子、直鎖または分岐のアルキル基、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基、環状のアルキル基のいずれかであり、同一でも異なっても良い。 In the formula (As), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, alkylene, substituted alkylene, —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, a single bond, or the following formula (A— an organic group selected from the group of sc). R 2 is any one of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and a cyclic alkyl group, and may be the same or different. R 3 is a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, or a cyclic alkyl group, and may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
(式(A-sc)中、*は上記式(A-s)で示されるビスアミノフェノール誘導体のアミノフェノール基の芳香環に結合することを示す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
(In the formula (A-sc), * indicates binding to the aromatic ring of the aminophenol group of the bisaminophenol derivative represented by the above formula (As).)
 上記式(A-s)中、フェノール性水酸基のオルソ位、すなわち、Rにも置換基を有することが、アミド結合のカルボニル炭素と水酸基の距離をより接近させると考えられ、低温で硬化した際に高環化率になる効果がさらに高まる点で、特に好ましい。 In the above formula (As), it is considered that the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group, that is, that R 3 also has a substituent is considered to make the distance between the carbonyl carbon of the amide bond and the hydroxyl group closer, and cured at a low temperature. In particular, it is particularly preferable in that the effect of increasing the cyclization rate is further increased.
 また、上記式(A-s)中、Rがアルキル基であり、かつRがアルキル基であることが、i線に対する高透明性と低温で硬化した際に高環化率であるという効果を維持することができ、好ましい。 Further, in the above formula (As), R 2 is an alkyl group and R 3 is an alkyl group, which means that it has high transparency to i-line and a high cyclization rate when cured at low temperature. The effect can be maintained and is preferable.
 また、上記式(A-s)中、Rがアルキレンまたは置換アルキレンであることが、さらに好ましい。Rに係るアルキレンおよび置換アルキレンの具体的な例としては、-CH-、-CH(CH)-、-C(CH-、-CH(CHCH)-、-C(CH)(CHCH)-、-C(CHCH)(CHCH)-、-CH(CHCHCH)-、-C(CH)(CHCHCH)-、-CH(CH(CH)-、-C(CH)(CH(CH)-、-CH(CHCHCHCH)-、-C(CH)(CHCHCHCH)-、-CH(CHCH(CH)-、-C(CH)(CHCH(CH)-、-CH(CHCHCHCHCH)-、-C(CH)(CHCHCHCHCH)-、-CH(CHCHCHCHCHCH)-、-C(CH)(CHCHCHCHCHCH)-等が挙げられるが、その中でも-CH-、-CH(CH)-、-C(CH-が、i線に対する高透明性と低温で硬化した際の高環化率であるという効果を維持しながら、溶剤に対して十分な溶解性を持つ、バランスに優れるポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体を得ることができる点で、より好ましい。 In the above formula (As), it is more preferable that R 1 is alkylene or substituted alkylene. Specific examples of alkylene and substituted alkylene according to R 1 include —CH 2 —, —CH (CH 3 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) 2 —, —CH (CH 2 CH 3 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 3 )-, -C (CH 2 CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 3 )-, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 )-, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) —, —CH (CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) (CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) —, —CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 )-, -CH (CH 2 CH (CH 3 ) 2 )-, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH (CH 3 ) 2 )-, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3) -, - C (CH 3) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 C 2 CH 3) -, - CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3) -, - C (CH 3) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3) - but the like Among them, —CH 2 —, —CH (CH 3 ) —, —C (CH 3 ) 2 — maintain the effect of high transparency to i-line and high cyclization rate when cured at low temperature. However, it is more preferable in that a polybenzoxazole precursor having sufficient solubility in a solvent and excellent in balance can be obtained.
 上記式(A-s)で示されるビスアミノフェノール誘導体の製造方法としては、例えば、特開2013-256506号公報の段落番号0085~0094および実施例1(段落番号0189~0190)を参考にすることができ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As a method for producing the bisaminophenol derivative represented by the above formula (As), for example, refer to paragraph numbers 0085 to 0094 and Example 1 (paragraph numbers 0189 to 0190) of JP2013-256506A. The contents of which are incorporated herein.
 上記式(A-s)で示されるビスアミノフェノール誘導体の構造の具体例としては、特開2013-256506号公報の段落番号0070~0080に記載のものが挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。もちろん、これらに限定されるものではないことは言うまでもない。 Specific examples of the structure of the bisaminophenol derivative represented by the formula (As) include those described in JP-A-2013-256506, paragraphs 0070 to 0080, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Incorporated into. Of course, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to these.
 ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は上記の式(3)の繰り返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰り返し構造単位も含んでよい。
 閉環に伴う反りの発生を抑制できる点で、下記式(SL)で表されるジアミン残基を他の種類の繰り返し構造単位として含むことが好ましい。
The polybenzoxazole precursor may contain other types of repeating structural units in addition to the repeating unit of the above formula (3).
It is preferable that the diamine residue represented by the following formula (SL) is included as another type of repeating structural unit in that the occurrence of warpage accompanying ring closure can be suppressed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 式(SL)中、Zは、a構造とb構造を有し、R1sは、水素原子または炭素数1~10の炭化水素基であり、R2sは、炭素数1~10の炭化水素基であり、R3s、R4s、R5s、R6sのうち少なくとも1つは芳香族基で、残りは水素原子または炭素数1~30の有機基で、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。a構造およびb構造の重合は、ブロック重合でもランダム重合でもよい。Z部分のモル%は、a構造は5~95モル%、b構造は95~5モル%であり、a+bは100モル%である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
In formula (SL), Z has an a structure and a b structure, R 1s is a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 2s is a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. And at least one of R 3s , R 4s , R 5s and R 6s is an aromatic group, and the remainder is a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, which may be the same or different. The polymerization of the a structure and the b structure may be block polymerization or random polymerization. The mol% of the Z moiety is 5 to 95 mol% for the a structure, 95 to 5 mol% for the b structure, and a + b is 100 mol%.
 式(SL)において、好ましいZとしては、b構造中のR5sおよびR6sがフェニル基であるものが挙げられる。また、式(SL)で示される構造の分子量は、400~4,000であることが好ましく、500~3,000がより好ましい。上記分子量を上記範囲とすることで、より効果的に、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の脱水閉環後の弾性率を下げ、反りを抑制できる効果と溶剤溶解性を向上させる効果を両立することができる。 In the formula (SL), preferred Z includes those in which R 5s and R 6s in the b structure are phenyl groups. The molecular weight of the structure represented by the formula (SL) is preferably 400 to 4,000, and more preferably 500 to 3,000. By making the said molecular weight into the said range, the effect which can lower the elasticity modulus after spin-drying | dehydration cyclization of a polybenzoxazole precursor, and can suppress curvature, and the effect which improves solvent solubility can be made more effective.
 他の種類の繰り返し構造単位として式(SL)で表されるジアミン残基を含む場合、テトラカルボン酸二無水物から無水物基の除去後に残存するテトラカルボン酸残基を繰り返し構造単位として含むことも好ましい。このようなテトラカルボン酸残基の例としては、式(2)中のR115の例が挙げられる。 When a diamine residue represented by the formula (SL) is included as another type of repeating structural unit, a tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removal of the anhydride group from the tetracarboxylic dianhydride is included as a repeating structural unit. Is also preferable. Examples of such tetracarboxylic acid residue, and examples of R 115 in formula (2).
 ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、例えば、後述する組成物に用いる場合、好ましくは18,000~30,000であり、より好ましくは20,000~29,000であり、さらに好ましくは22,000~28,000である。また、数平均分子量(Mn)は、好ましくは7,200~14,000であり、より好ましくは8,000~12,000であり、さらに好ましくは9,200~11,200である。
 上記ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の分散度は、1.4以上であることが好ましく、1.5以上がより好ましく、1.6以上であることがさらに好ましい。ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の分散度の上限値は特に定めるものではないが、例えば、2.6以下が好ましく、2.5以下がより好ましく、2.4以下がさらに好ましく、2.3以下が一層好ましく、2.2以下がより一層好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polybenzoxazole precursor is, for example, preferably 18,000 to 30,000, more preferably 20,000 to 29,000 when used in the composition described below. It is preferably 22,000 to 28,000. The number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, and still more preferably 9,200 to 11,200.
The degree of dispersion of the polybenzoxazole precursor is preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and further preferably 1.6 or more. The upper limit value of the degree of dispersion of the polybenzoxazole precursor is not particularly defined, but is preferably 2.6 or less, more preferably 2.5 or less, further preferably 2.4 or less, and more preferably 2.3 or less. Preferably, 2.2 or less is even more preferable.
<<ポリベンゾオキサゾール>>
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールとしては、ベンゾオキサゾール環を有する高分子化合物であれば、特に限定はないが、下記式(X)で表される化合物であることが好ましく、下記式(X)で表される化合物であって、重合性基を有する化合物であることがより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 式(X)中、R133は、2価の有機基を表し、R134は、4価の有機基を表す。 
 重合性基を有する場合、重合性基は、R133およびR134の少なくとも一方に位置していても良いし、下記式(X-1)または式(X-2)に示すようにポリベンゾオキサゾールの末端に位置していてもよい。
式(X-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式(X-1)中、R135およびR136の少なくとも一方は、重合性基であり、重合性基でない場合は有機基であり、他の基は式(X)と同義である。
式(X-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式(X-2)中、R135は重合性基であり、他は置換基であり、他の基は式(X)と同義である。
<< Polybenzoxazole >>
The polybenzoxazole is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having a benzoxazole ring, but is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (X), and a compound represented by the following formula (X) And it is more preferable that it is a compound which has a polymeric group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
In formula (X), R 133 represents a divalent organic group, and R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group.
In the case of having a polymerizable group, the polymerizable group may be located in at least one of R 133 and R 134 , or polybenzoxazole as shown in the following formula (X-1) or formula (X-2) It may be located at the end of.
Formula (X-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
In formula (X-1), at least one of R 135 and R 136 is a polymerizable group, and when not a polymerizable group, it is an organic group, and the other groups are as defined in formula (X).
Formula (X-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
In the formula (X-2), R 135 is a polymerizable group, the other is a substituent, and the other groups are as defined in the formula (X).
 重合性基は、上記のポリイミド前駆体等が有している重合性基で述べた重合性基と同義である。 The polymerizable group has the same meaning as the polymerizable group described in the polymerizable group possessed by the polyimide precursor or the like.
 R133は、2価の有機基を表す。2価の有機基としては、脂肪族または芳香族基が挙げられる。具体的な例としては、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の式(3)中のR121の例が挙げられる。また、その好ましい例はR121と同様である。 R 133 represents a divalent organic group. Examples of the divalent organic group include an aliphatic or aromatic group. Specific examples include R 121 in the polybenzoxazole precursor (3). Moreover, the preferable example is the same as that of R121 .
 R134は、4価の有機基を表す。4価の有機基としては、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の式(3)中のR122の例が挙げられる。また、その好ましい例はR122と同様である。
 例えば、R122として例示される4価の有機基の4つの結合子が、上記式(X)中の窒素原子、酸素原子と結合して縮合環を形成する。例えば、R134が、下記有機基である場合、下記構造を形成する。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group. As a tetravalent organic group, the example of R122 in Formula (3) of a polybenzoxazole precursor is mentioned. Moreover, the preferable example is the same as that of R122 .
For example, four bonds of a tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 122 are bonded to a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom in the above formula (X) to form a condensed ring. For example, when R 134 is the following organic group, the following structure is formed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールはオキサゾール化率が85%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましい。オキサゾール化率が85%以上であることにより、加熱によりオキサゾール化される時に起こる閉環による膜収縮が小さくなり、反りの発生をより効果的に抑えることができる。 Polybenzoxazole preferably has an oxazolation rate of 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more. When the oxazolation rate is 85% or more, film shrinkage due to ring closure that occurs when oxazolation is performed by heating is reduced, and the occurrence of warpage can be more effectively suppressed.
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールは、すべてが1種のR131またはR132に基づく上記式(X)の繰り返し構造単位に加え、2つ以上の異なる種類のR131またはR132を含む上記式(X)で表される繰り返し単位を含んでもよい。また、ポリベンゾオキサゾールは、上記の式(X)の繰り返し単位のほかに、他の種類の繰り返し構造単位も含んでよい。 Polybenzoxazoles, In addition to all the repeating structural units of the formula based on one R 131 or R 132 (X), the table in the above formula (X) comprising two or more different types of R 131 or R 132 May be included. The polybenzoxazole may also contain other types of repeating structural units in addition to the repeating unit of the above formula (X).
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールは、例えば、ビスアミノフェノール誘導体と、R133を含むジカルボン酸または上記ジカルボン酸の、ジカルボン酸ジクロライドおよびジカルボン酸誘導体等から選ばれる化合物とを反応させて、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体を得、これを既知のオキサゾール化反応法を用いてオキサゾール化させることで得られる。
 なお、ジカルボン酸の場合には反応収率等を高めるため、1-ヒドロキシ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール等を予め反応させた活性エステル型のジカルボン酸誘導体を用いてもよい。
Polybenzoxazole is obtained, for example, by reacting a bisaminophenol derivative with a dicarboxylic acid containing R 133 or a compound selected from dicarboxylic acid dichloride and dicarboxylic acid derivative of the above dicarboxylic acid to obtain a polybenzoxazole precursor. This can be obtained by oxazolation using a known oxazolation reaction method.
In the case of dicarboxylic acid, an active ester type dicarboxylic acid derivative obtained by reacting 1-hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole or the like in advance may be used in order to increase the reaction yield or the like.
 ポリベンゾオキサゾールの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5,000~70,000が好ましく、8,000~50,000がより好ましく、10,000~30,000がさらに好ましい。重量平均分子量を5,000以上とすることにより、硬化後の膜の耐折れ性を向上させることができる。機械特性に優れた硬化膜を得るため、重量平均分子量は、20,000以上が特に好ましい。また、ポリベンゾオキサゾールを2種以上含有する場合、少なくとも1種のポリベンゾオキサゾールの重量平均分子量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of polybenzoxazole is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and still more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the bending resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain a cured film having excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is particularly preferably 20,000 or more. Moreover, when it contains 2 or more types of polybenzoxazole, it is preferable that the weight average molecular weight of at least 1 type of polybenzoxazole is the said range.
<<ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法>>
 ポリイミド前駆体等は、ジカルボン酸またはジカルボン酸誘導体とジアミンとを反応させて得られる。好ましくは、ジカルボン酸またはジカルボン酸誘導体を、ハロゲン化剤を用いてハロゲン化させた後、ジアミンと反応させて得られる。
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法では、反応に際し、有機溶剤を用いることが好ましい。有機溶剤は1種でもよいし、2種以上でもよい。
 有機溶剤としては、原料に応じて適宜定めることができるが、ピリジン、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(ジグリム)、N-メチルピロリドンおよびN-エチルピロリドンが例示される。
 ポリイミドは、ポリイミド前駆体を合成してから、加熱して環化させて製造してもよいし、直接、ポリイミドを合成してもよい。
<< Method for producing polyimide precursor, etc. >>
A polyimide precursor or the like is obtained by reacting a dicarboxylic acid or a dicarboxylic acid derivative with a diamine. Preferably, it is obtained by halogenating a dicarboxylic acid or a dicarboxylic acid derivative with a halogenating agent and then reacting with a diamine.
In the method for producing a polyimide precursor or the like, an organic solvent is preferably used for the reaction. One or more organic solvents may be used.
The organic solvent can be appropriately determined according to the raw material, and examples thereof include pyridine, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (diglyme), N-methylpyrrolidone and N-ethylpyrrolidone.
Polyimide may be produced by synthesizing a polyimide precursor and then cyclized by heating, or may be synthesized directly.
<<<末端封止剤>>>
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造方法に際し、保存安定性をより向上させるため、酸無水物、モノカルボン酸、モノ酸クロリド化合物、モノ活性エステル化合物などの末端封止剤で、ポリイミド前駆体等の末端を封止することが好ましい。末端封止剤としては、モノアミンを用いることがより好ましく、モノアミンの好ましい化合物としては、アニリン、2-エチニルアニリン、3-エチニルアニリン、4-エチニルアニリン、5-アミノ-8-ヒドロキシキノリン、1-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-ヒドロキシ-4-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-ヒドロキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、1-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-7-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-6-アミノナフタレン、2-カルボキシ-5-アミノナフタレン、2-アミノ安息香酸、3-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノ安息香酸、4-アミノサリチル酸、5-アミノサリチル酸、6-アミノサリチル酸、2-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、4-アミノベンゼンスルホン酸、3-アミノ-4,6-ジヒドロキシピリミジン、2-アミノフェノール、3-アミノフェノール、4-アミノフェノール、2-アミノチオフェノール、3-アミノチオフェノール、4-アミノチオフェノールなどが挙げられる。これらを2種以上用いてもよく、複数の末端封止剤を反応させることにより、複数の異なる末端基を導入してもよい。
<<< End sealant >>>
In order to further improve the storage stability in the production method of the polyimide precursor, etc., the end of the polyimide precursor etc. is terminated with an end-capping agent such as an acid anhydride, monocarboxylic acid, monoacid chloride compound, monoactive ester compound, etc. It is preferable to seal. As the end-capping agent, it is more preferable to use monoamine, and preferable monoamine compounds include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1- Hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-amino Naphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy -6-aminonaphthalene, 2- Ruboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino Benzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3-aminothiophenol, 4 -Aminothiophenol and the like. Two or more of these may be used, and a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of terminal blocking agents.
<<<固体析出>>>
 ポリイミド前駆体等の製造に際し、固体を析出する工程を含んでいても良い。具体的には、反応液中のポリイミド前駆体等を、水中に沈殿させ、テトラヒドロフラン等のポリイミド前駆体等が可溶な溶剤に溶解させることによって、固体析出することができる。
 その後、ポリイミド前駆体等を乾燥して、粉末状のポリイミド前駆体等を得ることができる。
<<< Solid precipitation >>>
When manufacturing a polyimide precursor etc., the process of depositing a solid may be included. Specifically, solid precipitation can be achieved by precipitating a polyimide precursor or the like in the reaction solution in water and dissolving the polyimide precursor or the like such as tetrahydrofuran in a soluble solvent.
Then, a polyimide precursor etc. can be dried and a powdery polyimide precursor etc. can be obtained.
 本発明で用いる組成物は、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリイミド、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体およびポリベンゾオキサゾールのうち、1種のみ含んでいても良いし、2種以上含んでいても良い。また、ポリイミド前駆体を2種等、同じ種類の樹脂であって、構造の異なる樹脂を2種以上含んでいても良い。
 本発明で用いる組成物における、ポリイミド前駆体等の含有量は、固形分の10~99質量%が好ましく、50~98質量%がより好ましく、70~96質量%がさらに好ましい。
 以下、本発明で用いる組成物が含みうる成分について説明する。本発明はこれら以外の成分を含んでいてもよく、また、これらの成分を必須とするわけではないことは言うまでもない。
The composition used in the present invention may contain only one of polyimide precursor, polyimide, polybenzoxazole precursor and polybenzoxazole, or may contain two or more. Also, two or more types of polyimide precursors may be included, which are the same type of resin and have different structures.
The content of the polyimide precursor or the like in the composition used in the present invention is preferably 10 to 99% by mass, more preferably 50 to 98% by mass, and further preferably 70 to 96% by mass.
Hereinafter, components that can be contained in the composition used in the present invention will be described. It goes without saying that the present invention may contain components other than these, and these components are not essential.
<<重合性化合物>>
 本発明では、上述のとおり、ポリイミド前駆体等の樹脂が重合性基を有するか、感光性樹脂組成物が重合性化合物を含むことが好ましい。このような構成とすることにより、より耐熱性に優れた硬化膜を形成することができる。
 重合性化合物は、重合性基を有する化合物であって、ラジカル、酸、塩基などにより架橋反応が可能な公知の化合物を用いることができる。重合性基とは、上記ポリイミド前駆体等の所で述べた重合性基などが例示される。重合性化合物は1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
 重合性化合物は、例えば、モノマー、プレポリマー、オリゴマーおよびそれらの混合物ならびにそれらの多量体などの化学的形態のいずれであってもよい。
<< polymerizable compound >>
In this invention, as above-mentioned, it is preferable that resin, such as a polyimide precursor, has a polymeric group or the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymeric compound. By setting it as such a structure, the cured film excellent in heat resistance can be formed.
The polymerizable compound is a compound having a polymerizable group, and a known compound that can be crosslinked by a radical, an acid, a base, or the like can be used. Examples of the polymerizable group include the polymerizable groups described in the above-mentioned polyimide precursor and the like. The polymerizable compound may contain only 1 type, and may contain 2 or more types.
The polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as, for example, a monomer, a prepolymer, an oligomer and a mixture thereof, and a multimer thereof.
 本発明において、モノマータイプの重合性化合物(以下、重合性モノマーともいう)は、高分子化合物とは異なる化合物である。重合性モノマーは、典型的には、低分子化合物であり、分子量2,000以下の低分子化合物であることが好ましく、1,500以下の低分子化合物であることがより好ましく、分子量900以下の低分子化合物であることがさらに好ましい。なお、重合性モノマーの分子量は、通常、100以上である。
 また、オリゴマータイプの重合性化合物は、典型的には比較的低い分子量の重合体であり、10個から100個の重合性モノマーが結合した重合体であることが好ましい。オリゴマータイプの重合性化合物の重量平均分子量は、2,000~20,000であることが好ましく、2,000~15,000がより好ましく、2,000~10,000であることが最も好ましい。
In the present invention, a monomer type polymerizable compound (hereinafter also referred to as a polymerizable monomer) is a compound different from a polymer compound. The polymerizable monomer is typically a low molecular compound, preferably a low molecular compound having a molecular weight of 2,000 or less, more preferably a low molecular compound having a molecular weight of 1,500 or less, and a molecular weight of 900 or less. More preferably, it is a low molecular weight compound. The molecular weight of the polymerizable monomer is usually 100 or more.
The oligomer type polymerizable compound is typically a polymer having a relatively low molecular weight, and is preferably a polymer in which 10 to 100 polymerizable monomers are bonded. The weight average molecular weight of the oligomer type polymerizable compound is preferably 2,000 to 20,000, more preferably 2,000 to 15,000, and most preferably 2,000 to 10,000.
 本発明における重合性化合物の官能基数は、1分子中における重合性基の数を意味する。
 重合性化合物は、解像性の観点から、重合性基を2個以上含む2官能以上の重合性化合物を少なくとも1種含むことが好ましく、3官能以上の重合性化合物を少なくとも1種含むことがより好ましい。
 また、本発明における重合性化合物は、三次元架橋構造を形成して耐熱性を向上できるという点から、3官能以上の重合性化合物を少なくとも1種含むことが好ましい。また、2官能以下の重合性化合物と3官能以上の重合性化合物との混合物であってもよい。
The number of functional groups of the polymerizable compound in the present invention means the number of polymerizable groups in one molecule.
From the viewpoint of resolution, the polymerizable compound preferably contains at least one bifunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound containing two or more polymerizable groups, and preferably contains at least one trifunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound. More preferred.
Moreover, it is preferable that the polymeric compound in this invention contains at least 1 sort (s) of polymeric compounds more than trifunctional from the point that a three-dimensional crosslinked structure can be formed and heat resistance can be improved. Also, a mixture of a bifunctional or lower polymerizable compound and a trifunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound may be used.
<<<エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物>>>
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、スチリル基、ビニル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基および(メタ)アリル基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましい。
<<< Compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond >>>
As the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a styryl group, a vinyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group and a (meth) allyl group are preferable, and a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable.
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物の具体例としては、不飽和カルボン酸(例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸など)やそのエステル類、アミド類、ならびにこれらの多量体が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、および不飽和カルボン酸と多価アミン化合物とのアミド類、ならびにこれらの多量体である。また、ヒドロキシ基やアミノ基、メルカプト基等の求核性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステルあるいはアミド類と、単官能もしくは多官能イソシアネート類またはエポキシ類との付加反応物や、単官能もしくは多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基やエポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステルあるいはアミド類と、単官能もしくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との付加反応物、さらに、ハロゲン基やトシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステルあるいはアミド類と、単官能もしくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との置換反応物も好適である。また、別の例として、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン等のビニルベンゼン誘導体、ビニルエーテル、アリルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。 Specific examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), esters thereof, amides, and the like. Preferred are an ester of an unsaturated carboxylic acid and a polyhydric alcohol compound, an amide of an unsaturated carboxylic acid and a polyvalent amine compound, and a multimer thereof. Further, addition reaction products of monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies with unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxy group, amino group, mercapto group, etc., monofunctional or polyfunctional A dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. Further, an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol, and further a halogen group A substituted reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a detachable substituent such as thiol or tosyloxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable. As another example, it is also possible to use a compound group in which an unsaturated phosphonic acid, a vinylbenzene derivative such as styrene, vinyl ether, allyl ether or the like is used instead of the unsaturated carboxylic acid.
 多価アルコール化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルのモノマーの具体例としては、アクリル酸エステルとして、エチレングリコールジアクリレート、トリエチレングリコールジアクリレート、1,3-ブタンジオールジアクリレート、テトラメチレングリコールジアクリレート、プロピレングリコールジアクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(アクリロイルオキシプロピル)エーテル、トリメチロールエタントリアクリレート、ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート、1,4-シクロヘキサンジオールジアクリレート、テトラエチレングリコールジアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールジアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールジアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、ソルビトールトリアクリレート、ソルビトールテトラアクリレート、ソルビトールペンタアクリレート、ソルビトールヘキサアクリレート、トリ(アクリロイルオキシエチル)イソシアヌレート、イソシアヌル酸エチレンオキシド変性トリアクリレート、ポリエステルアクリレートオリゴマー等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of esters of polyhydric alcohol compounds and unsaturated carboxylic acids include acrylic acid esters such as ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, and tetramethylene glycol diacrylate. , Propylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, trimethylolethane triacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol diacrylate, tetra Ethylene glycol diacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, Pentaerythritol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, sorbitol triacrylate, sorbitol tetraacrylate, sorbitol pentaacrylate, sorbitol hexaacrylate, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, isocyanuric acid ethylene oxide modified triacrylate, polyester acrylate An oligomer etc. are mentioned.
 メタクリル酸エステルとしては、テトラメチレングリコールジメタクリレート、トリエチレングリコールジメタクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジメタクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリメタクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリメタクリレート、エチレングリコールジメタクリレート、1,3-ブタンジオールジメタクリレート、ヘキサンジオールジメタクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールジメタクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリメタクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールジメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート、ソルビトールトリメタクリレート、ソルビトールテトラメタクリレート、ビス〔p-(3-メタクリルオキシ-2-ヒドロキシプロポキシ)フェニル〕ジメチルメタン、ビス-〔p-(メタクリルオキシエトキシ)フェニル〕ジメチルメタン等が挙げられる。 Methacrylic acid esters include tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, trimethylolethane trimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, 1,3-butanediol dimethacrylate, Hexanediol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol dimethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, sorbitol trimethacrylate, sorbitol tetramethacrylate, bis [p- (3-methacryloxy- 2-hydroxyp Epoxy) phenyl] dimethyl methane, bis - [p- (methacryloxyethoxy) phenyl] dimethyl methane, and the like.
 イタコン酸エステルとしては、エチレングリコールジイタコネート、プロピレングリコールジイタコネート、1,3-ブタンジオールジイタコネート、1,4-ブタンジオールジイタコネート、テトラメチレングリコールジイタコネート、ペンタエリスリトールジイタコネート、ソルビトールテトライタコネート等が挙げられる。 Itaconic acid esters include ethylene glycol diitaconate, propylene glycol diitaconate, 1,3-butanediol diitaconate, 1,4-butanediol diitaconate, tetramethylene glycol diitaconate, pentaerythritol diitaconate Sorbitol tetritaconate and the like.
 クロトン酸エステルとしては、エチレングリコールジクロトネート、テトラメチレングリコールジクロトネート、ペンタエリスリトールジクロトネート、ソルビトールテトラジクロトネート等が挙げられる。 Examples of crotonic acid esters include ethylene glycol dicrotonate, tetramethylene glycol dicrotonate, pentaerythritol dicrotonate, and sorbitol tetradicrotonate.
 イソクロトン酸エステルとしては、エチレングリコールジイソクロトネート、ペンタエリスリトールジイソクロトネート、ソルビトールテトライソクロトネート等が挙げられる。 Examples of isocrotonic acid esters include ethylene glycol diisocrotonate, pentaerythritol diisocrotonate, and sorbitol tetraisocrotonate.
 マレイン酸エステルとしては、エチレングリコールジマレート、トリエチレングリコールジマレート、ペンタエリスリトールジマレート、ソルビトールテトラマレート等が挙げられる。 Examples of maleic acid esters include ethylene glycol dimaleate, triethylene glycol dimaleate, pentaerythritol dimaleate, and sorbitol tetramaleate.
 その他のエステルの例として、例えば、特公昭46-27926号公報、特公昭51-47334号公報、特開昭57-196231号公報に記載の脂肪族アルコール系エステル類や、特開昭59-5240号公報、特開昭59-5241号公報、特開平2-226149号公報に記載の芳香族系骨格を有するもの、特開平1-165613号公報に記載のアミノ基を含むもの等も好適に用いられる。 Examples of other esters include aliphatic alcohol esters described in JP-B-46-27926, JP-B-51-47334, JP-A-57-196231, and JP-A-59-5240. No. 1, JP-A-59-5241, JP-A-2-226149, those having an aromatic skeleton, those having an amino group described in JP-A-1-165613, etc. are preferably used. It is done.
 また、多価アミン化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのアミドのモノマーの具体例としては、メチレンビス-アクリルアミド、メチレンビス-メタクリルアミド、1,6-ヘキサメチレンビス-アクリルアミド、1,6-ヘキサメチレンビス-メタクリルアミド、ジエチレントリアミントリスアクリルアミド、キシリレンビスアクリルアミド、キシリレンビスメタクリルアミド等がある。 Specific examples of amide monomers of polyvalent amine compounds and unsaturated carboxylic acids include methylene bis-acrylamide, methylene bis-methacrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bis-acrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bis-methacrylic. Examples include amide, diethylenetriamine trisacrylamide, xylylene bisacrylamide, and xylylene bismethacrylamide.
 その他の好ましいアミド系モノマーの例としては、特公昭54-21726号公報に記載のシクロへキシレン構造を有するものを挙げることができる。 Examples of other preferable amide monomers include those having a cyclohexylene structure described in JP-B No. 54-21726.
 また、イソシアネートと水酸基の付加反応を用いて製造されるウレタン系付加重合性モノマーも好適であり、そのような具体例としては、例えば、特公昭48-41708号公報に記載されている1分子に2個以上のイソシアネート基を有するポリイソシアネート化合物に、下記式で示される水酸基を含むビニルモノマーを付加させた、1分子中に2個以上の重合性ビニル基を含むビニルウレタン化合物等が挙げられる。
 CH=C(R)COOCHCH(R)OH 
(ただし、RおよびRは、HまたはCHを示す。)
 また、特開昭51-37193号公報、特公平2-32293号公報、特公平2-16765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-49860号公報、特公昭56-17654号公報、特公昭62-39417号公報、特公昭62-39418号公報に記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。
In addition, urethane-based addition-polymerizable monomers produced using an addition reaction of isocyanate and hydroxyl group are also suitable. Specific examples thereof include, for example, one molecule described in JP-B-48-41708. Examples thereof include a vinylurethane compound containing two or more polymerizable vinyl groups in one molecule obtained by adding a vinyl monomer containing a hydroxyl group represented by the following formula to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups.
CH 2 = C (R 4) COOCH 2 CH (R 5) OH
(However, R 4 and R 5 represent H or CH 3. )
Further, urethane acrylates as described in JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, JP-B-2-16765, JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56- Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP 17654, JP-B 62-39417, and JP-B 62-39418 are also suitable.
 また、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物としては、特開2009-288705号公報の段落番号0095~0108に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。 As the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0095 to 0108 of JP-A-2009-288705 can also be suitably used in the present invention.
 また、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物としては、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。その例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等の単官能のアクリレートやメタクリレート;ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサンジオール(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(アクリロイルオキシプロピル)エーテル、トリ(アクリロイルオキシエチル)イソシアヌレート、グリセリンやトリメチロールエタン等の多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後(メタ)アクリレート化したもの、特公昭48-41708号、特公昭50-6034号、特開昭51-37193号の各公報に記載されているようなウレタン(メタ)アクリレート類、特開昭48-64183号、特公昭49-43191号、特公昭52-30490号の各公報に記載されているポリエステルアクリレート類、エポキシ樹脂と(メタ)アクリル酸との反応生成物であるエポキシアクリレート類等の多官能のアクリレートやメタクリレート、およびこれらの混合物を挙げることができる。また、特開2008-292970号公報の段落番号0254~0257に記載の化合物も好適である。また、多官能カルボン酸にグリシジル(メタ)アクリレート等の環状エーテル基とエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物とを反応させて得られる多官能(メタ)アクリレートなども挙げることができる。
 また、その他の好ましいエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物として、特開2010-160418号公報、特開2010-129825号公報、特許第4364216号公報等に記載される、フルオレン環を有し、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基を2個以上有する化合物、カルド樹脂も使用することが可能である。
 さらに、その他の例としては、特公昭46-43946号公報、特公平1-40337号公報、特公平1-40336号公報に記載の特定の不飽和化合物や、特開平2-25493号公報に記載のビニルホスホン酸系化合物等も挙げることができる。また、ある場合には、特開昭61-22048号公報に記載のペルフルオロアルキル基を含む構造が好適に使用される。さらに日本接着協会誌vol.20、No.7、300~308ページ(1984年)に光重合性モノマーおよびオリゴマーとして紹介されているものも使用することができる。
Moreover, as a compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated bond, the compound which has a boiling point of 100 degreeC or more under a normal pressure is also preferable. Examples include monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethanetri (meta ) Acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol (meth) ) Acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) iso (Meth) acrylate obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to polyfunctional alcohols such as nurate, glycerin and trimethylolethane, JP-B-48-41708, JP-B-50-6034, JP-A-51- Urethane (meth) acrylates as described in JP-B-37193, polyester acrylates described in JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49-43191 and JP-B-52-30490 And polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as epoxy acrylates which are reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth) acrylic acid, and mixtures thereof. Further, the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0254 to 0257 of JP-A-2008-292970 are also suitable. Moreover, the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by making cyclic ether groups, such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, and the compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated group, react with polyfunctional carboxylic acid etc. can be mentioned.
Further, as other preferable compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, those having a fluorene ring described in JP 2010-160418 A, JP 2010-129825 A, JP 4364216 A, etc. A compound having two or more groups having an unsaturated bond, a cardo resin can also be used.
Other examples include specific unsaturated compounds described in JP-B-46-43946, JP-B-1-40337, JP-B-1-40336, and JP-A-2-25493. The vinyl phosphonic acid-type compound of these can also be mentioned. In some cases, a structure containing a perfluoroalkyl group described in JP-A-61-22048 is preferably used. Furthermore, Journal of Japan Adhesion Association vol. 20, no. 7, pages 300 to 308 (1984), which are introduced as photopolymerizable monomers and oligomers, can also be used.
 上記のほか、下記式(MO-1)~(MO-5)で表される、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物も好適に用いることができる。なお、式中、Tがオキシアルキレン基の場合には、炭素原子側の末端がRに結合する。 In addition to the above, compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond represented by the following formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) can also be suitably used. In the formula, when T is an oxyalkylene group, the terminal on the carbon atom side is bonded to R.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 上記式において、nは0~14の整数であり、mは0~8の整数である。一分子内に複数存在するR、Tは、同一であっても、各々異なっていてもよい。
 上記式(MO-1)~(MO-5)で表される重合性化合物の各々において、複数のRの内の少なくとも1つは、-OC(=O)CH=CH、または、-OC(=O)C(CH)=CHで表される基を表す。
 上記式(MO-1)~(MO-5)で表される、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物の具体例としては、特開2007-269779号公報の段落番号0248~0251に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。
In the above formula, n is an integer from 0 to 14, and m is an integer from 0 to 8. A plurality of R and T present in one molecule may be the same or different.
In each of the polymerizable compounds represented by the above formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5), at least one of a plurality of R is —OC (═O) CH═CH 2 or —OC (= O) represents a group represented by C (CH 3 ) ═CH 2 .
Specific examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond represented by the above formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) are described in paragraph numbers 0248 to 0251 of JP-A-2007-267979. The compound can also be suitably used in the present invention.
 また、特開平10-62986号公報において、式(1)および(2)としてその具体例と共に記載の、多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後に(メタ)アクリレート化した化合物も、重合性化合物として用いることができる。 In addition, in JP-A-10-62986, compounds (meth) acrylates obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to a polyfunctional alcohol described in the formulas (1) and (2) together with specific examples thereof are also provided. It can be used as a polymerizable compound.
 さらに、特開2015-187211号公報の段落番号0104~0131に記載の化合物も採用でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。特に、同公報の段落番号0128~0130に記載の化合物が好ましい形態として例示される。 Furthermore, the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0104 to 0131 of JP-A No. 2015-187211 can also be employed, the contents of which are incorporated herein. In particular, the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0128 to 0130 of the publication are exemplified as preferred forms.
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としては、KAYARAD D-330;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としては、KAYARAD D-320;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては、KAYARAD D-310;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては、KAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬(株)製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造のものが好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。
 また、上記式(MO-1)、式(MO-2)のペンタエリスリトール誘導体および/またはジペンタエリスリトール誘導体も好ましい例として挙げられる。
Examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include dipentaerythritol triacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D- 320; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available product) As such, KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and those having a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are bonded via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues are preferred. These oligomer types can also be used.
Further, preferred examples include pentaerythritol derivatives and / or dipentaerythritol derivatives of the above formulas (MO-1) and (MO-2).
 重合性化合物の市販品としては、例えば、エチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する4官能アクリレートであるSR-494、エチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する2官能メタクリレートであるSR-209(以上、サートマー・ジャパン(株)製)、ペンチレンオキシ鎖を6個有する6官能アクリレートであるDPCA-60、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を3個有する3官能アクリレートであるTPA-330(以上、日本化薬(株)製)、ウレタンオリゴマーUAS-10、UAB-140(以上、山陽国策パルプ(株)製)、NKエステルM-40G、NKエステル4G、NKエステルM-9300、NKエステルA-9300、UA-7200(以上、新中村化学工業(株)製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(以上、共栄社化学(株)製)、ブレンマーPME400(日油(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds include SR-494, which is a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains, and SR-209, which is a bifunctional methacrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains (above, Sartomer Japan, Inc. )), DPCA-60 which is a 6-functional acrylate having 6 pentyleneoxy chains, TPA-330 which is a 3-functional acrylate having 3 isobutyleneoxy chains (above, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), urethane oligomer UAS-10, UAB-140 (Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), NK ester M-40G, NK ester 4G, NK ester M-9300, NK ester A-9300, UA-7200 (above, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industrial Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306 , UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co.), BLEMMER PME400 (NOF Corporation) and the like.
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物としては、特公昭48-41708号公報、特開昭51-37193号公報、特公平2-32293号公報、特公平2-16765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-49860号公報、特公昭56-17654号公報、特公昭62-39417号公報、特公昭62-39418号公報に記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。さらに、重合性化合物として、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平1-105238号公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する付加重合性モノマー類を用いることもできる。 Examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include those described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765. Urethane acrylates and urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable. It is. Furthermore, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are described as polymerizable compounds. Monomers can also be used.
 エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物は、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基等の酸基を有する多官能モノマーであっても良い。酸基を有する多官能モノマーは、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルが好ましく、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシ基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせた多官能モノマーがより好ましく、特に好ましくは、このエステルにおいて、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトールおよび/またはジペンタエリスリトールであるものである。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成(株)製の多塩基酸変性アクリルオリゴマーである、M-510、M-520などが挙げられる。
 酸基を有する多官能モノマーは、1種を単独で用いてもよいが、2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。また、必要に応じて酸基を有しない多官能モノマーと酸基を有する多官能モノマーを併用してもよい。
 酸基を有する多官能モノマーの好ましい酸価としては、0.1~40mgKOH/gであり、特に好ましくは5~30mgKOH/gである。多官能モノマーの酸価が上記範囲であれば、製造や取扱性に優れ、さらには、現像性に優れる。また、重合性が良好である。
The compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond may be a polyfunctional monomer having an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group. The polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is preferably an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and an unreacted hydroxy group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is reacted with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride to form an acid group. More preferably, the ester is a polyfunctional monomer in which the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol. Examples of commercially available products include M-510 and M-520, which are polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
As the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group, one kind may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be mixed and used. Moreover, you may use together the polyfunctional monomer which does not have an acid group, and the polyfunctional monomer which has an acid group as needed.
A preferable acid value of the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g. When the acid value of the polyfunctional monomer is in the above range, the production and handling properties are excellent, and further, the developability is excellent. Also, the polymerizability is good.
 このようなカプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20(上記式(C)~(E)においてm=1、式(D)で表される基の数=2、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-30(同式、m=1、式(D)で表される基の数=3、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-60(同式、m=1、式(D)で表される基の数=6、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-120(同式においてm=2、式(D)で表される基の数=6、Rが全て水素原子である化合物)等を挙げることができる。
 本発明において、カプロラクトン構造とエチレン性不飽和結合とを有する化合物は、単独でまたは2種以上を混合して使用することができる。
Such a polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure is commercially available, for example, from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as KAYARAD DPCA series, and DPCA-20 (m = 1 in the above formulas (C) to (E), The number of groups represented by D) = 2, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-30 (formula, m = 1, the number of groups represented by formula (D) = 3, R 1 In which all are hydrogen atoms), DPCA-60 (same formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (D) = 6, R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-120 (same as above) In the formula, m = 2, the number of groups represented by formula (D) = 6, and compounds in which R 1 is all a hydrogen atom).
In the present invention, the compounds having a caprolactone structure and an ethylenically unsaturated bond can be used alone or in admixture of two or more.
 組成物において、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物の含有量は、良好な重合性と耐熱性の観点から、組成物の全固形分に対して、1~50質量%が好ましい。下限は5質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、30質量%以下がより好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物は1種を単独で用いてもよいが、2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。
 また、ポリイミド前駆体等とエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物との質量割合(ポリイミド前駆体等/重合性化合物)は、98/2~10/90が好ましく、95/5~30/70がより好ましく、90/10~50/50が最も好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体等とエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物との質量割合が上記範囲であれば、重合性および耐熱性により優れた硬化膜を形成できる。
In the composition, the content of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably 1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition from the viewpoint of good polymerizability and heat resistance. The lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less. As the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, one kind may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be mixed and used.
The mass ratio of the polyimide precursor or the like and the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond (polyimide precursor or the like / polymerizable compound) is preferably 98/2 to 10/90, more preferably 95/5 to 30/70. 90/10 to 50/50 is most preferable. If the mass ratio of a polyimide precursor etc. and the compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated bond is the said range, the cured film excellent in polymerizability and heat resistance can be formed.
<<<ヒドロキシメチル基、アルコキシメチル基またはアシルオキシメチル基を有する化合物>>>
 ヒドロキシメチル基、アルコキシメチル基またはアシルオキシメチル基を有する化合物としては、下記式(AM1)で示される化合物が好ましい。
<<< Compound having hydroxymethyl group, alkoxymethyl group or acyloxymethyl group >>>
As the compound having a hydroxymethyl group, an alkoxymethyl group or an acyloxymethyl group, a compound represented by the following formula (AM1) is preferable.
(AM1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
(式中、tは、1~20の整数を示し、Rは、炭素数1~200のt価の有機基を示し、Rは、下記式(AM2)または下記式(AM3)で示される基を示す。)
(AM1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
(Wherein t represents an integer of 1 to 20, R 4 represents a t-valent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3): Represents a group to be selected.)
式(AM2)   式(AM3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
(式中、Rは、水酸基または炭素数1~10の有機基を示す。)
Formula (AM2) Formula (AM3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
(Wherein R 6 represents a hydroxyl group or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.)
 ポリイミド前駆体等100質量部に対して、式(AM1)で示される化合物が5質量部以上40質量部以下であることが好ましい。より好ましくは、10質量部以上35質量部以下である。また、全重合性化合物中、下記式(AM4)で表される化合物を10質量%以上90質量%以下含有し、下記式(AM5)で表される化合物を全熱架橋剤中10質量%以上90質量%以下含有することも好ましい。 The compound represented by the formula (AM1) is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like. More preferably, it is 10 to 35 mass parts. Moreover, 10 mass% or more and 90 mass% or less of the compound represented by a following formula (AM4) are contained in all the polymeric compounds, and the compound represented by a following formula (AM5) is 10 mass% or more in a total thermal crosslinking agent. It is also preferable to contain 90 mass% or less.
(AM4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
(式中、Rは、炭素数1~200の2価の有機基を示し、Rは、下記式(AM2)または下記式(AM3)で示される基を示す。)
(AM4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
(Wherein R 4 represents a divalent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3)).
(AM5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
(式中、uは3~8の整数を示し、Rは、炭素数1~200のu価の有機基を示し、Rは、下記式(AM2)または下記式(AM3)で示される基を示す。)
(AM5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
(Wherein u represents an integer of 3 to 8, R 4 represents a u-valent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 is represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3) Group.)
式(AM2)  式(AM3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
(式中、Rは、水酸基または炭素数1~10の有機基を示す。)
Formula (AM2) Formula (AM3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
(Wherein R 6 represents a hydroxyl group or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.)
 この範囲とすることで、凹凸のある基板上で組成物を硬化した際に、クラックが生じることがより少なくなる。パターン加工性に優れ、5%質量減少温度が350℃以上、より好ましくは380℃以上となる高い耐熱性を有することができる。式(AM4)で示される化合物の具体例としては、46DMOC、46DMOEP(以上、商品名、旭有機材工業(株)製)、DML-MBPC、DML-MBOC、DML-OCHP、DML-PCHP、DML-PC、DML-PTBP、DML-34X、DML-EP、DML-POP、dimethyolBisOC-P、DML-PFP、DML-PSBP、DML-MTrisPC(以上、商品名、本州化学工業(株)製)、NIKALAC MX-290(以上、商品名、(株)三和ケミカル製)、2,6-ジメトキシメチル-4-t-ブチルフェノール、2,6-ジメトキシメチル-p-クレゾール、2,6-ジアセトキシメチル-p-クレゾールなどが挙げられる。 By setting it within this range, cracks are less likely to occur when the composition is cured on an uneven substrate. It has excellent pattern processability and can have high heat resistance such that the 5% mass reduction temperature is 350 ° C. or higher, more preferably 380 ° C. or higher. Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (AM4) include 46DMOC, 46DMOEP (trade name, manufactured by Asahi Organic Materials Co., Ltd.), DML-MBPC, DML-MBOC, DML-OCHP, DML-PCHP, DML. -PC, DML-PTBP, DML-34X, DML-EP, DML-POP, dimethylolBisOC-P, DML-PFP, DML-PSBP, DML-MTrisPC (above, trade name, manufactured by Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), NIKACALAC MX-290 (trade name, manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.), 2,6-dimethoxymethyl-4-t-butylphenol, 2,6-dimethoxymethyl-p-cresol, 2,6-diacetoxymethyl- Examples thereof include p-cresol.
 また、式(AM5)で示される化合物の具体例としては、TriML-P、TriML-35XL、TML-HQ、TML-BP、TML-pp-BPF、TML-BPA、TMOM-BP、HML-TPPHBA、HML-TPHAP、HMOM-TPPHBA、HMOM-TPHAP(以上、商品名、本州化学工業(株)製)、TM-BIP-A(商品名、旭有機材工業(株)製)、NIKALAC MX-280、NIKALAC MX-270、NIKALAC MW-100LM(以上、商品名、(株)三和ケミカル製)が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (AM5) include TriML-P, TriML-35XL, TML-HQ, TML-BP, TML-pp-BPF, TML-BPA, TMOM-BP, HML-TPPHBA, HML-TPHAP, HMOM-TPPHBA, HMOM-TPPHAP (trade name, manufactured by Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), TM-BIP-A (trade name, manufactured by Asahi Organic Materials Co., Ltd.), NIKALAC MX-280, NIKALAC MX-270, NIKALAC MW-100LM (trade name, manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.).
<<<エポキシ化合物(エポキシ基を有する化合物)>>>
 エポキシ化合物としては、一分子中にエポキシ基を2以上有する化合物であることが好ましい。エポキシ基は、200℃以下で架橋反応し、かつ、架橋による脱水反応が起こらないため膜収縮が起きにくい。このため、エポキシ化合物を含有することは、組成物の低温硬化および低反り化に効果的である。
<<< Epoxy Compound (Compound Having Epoxy Group) >>>
The epoxy compound is preferably a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule. The epoxy group undergoes a cross-linking reaction at 200 ° C. or less and does not cause a dehydration reaction due to cross-linking, so that film shrinkage hardly occurs. For this reason, containing an epoxy compound is effective for low-temperature curing and low warpage of the composition.
 エポキシ化合物は、ポリエチレンオキサイド基を含有することが好ましい。これにより、より弾性率が低下し、またより低反り化することができる。また柔軟性が高いため、伸度等にも優れた硬化膜を得ることができる。ポリエチレンオキサイド基は、エチレンオキサイドの繰り返し単位数が2以上のものを意味し、繰り返し単位数が2~15であることが好ましい。 The epoxy compound preferably contains a polyethylene oxide group. As a result, the elastic modulus can be further reduced and the warpage can be further reduced. Moreover, since the flexibility is high, a cured film having excellent elongation and the like can be obtained. The polyethylene oxide group means that the number of repeating units of ethylene oxide is 2 or more, and the number of repeating units is preferably 2 to 15.
 エポキシ化合物の例としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂;ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂;プロピレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル等のアルキレングリコール型エポキシ樹脂;ポリプロピレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル等のポリアルキレングリコール型エポキシ樹脂;ポリメチル(グリシジロキシプロピル)シロキサン等のエポキシ基含有シリコーンなどを挙げることができるが、これらに限定されない。具体的には、エピクロン(登録商標)850-S、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-4032、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-7200、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-820、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-4700、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-4710、エピクロン(登録商標)HP-4770、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-859CRP、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-1514、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-4880、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-4850-150、エピクロンEXA-4850-1000、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-4816、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-4822(以上商品名、DIC(株)製)、リカレジン(登録商標)BEO-60E(商品名、新日本理化(株)製)、EP-4003S、EP-4000S(以上商品名、(株)アデカ)などが挙げられる。この中でも、ポリエチレンオキサイド基を含有するエポキシ樹脂が、低反りおよび耐熱性に優れる点で好ましい。例えば、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-4880、エピクロン(登録商標)EXA-4822、リカレジン(登録商標)BEO-60Eは、ポリエチレンオキサイド基を含有するので好ましい。 Examples of the epoxy compound include bisphenol A type epoxy resin; bisphenol F type epoxy resin; alkylene glycol type epoxy resin such as propylene glycol diglycidyl ether; polyalkylene glycol type epoxy resin such as polypropylene glycol diglycidyl ether; polymethyl (glycidyl Examples include, but are not limited to, epoxy group-containing silicones such as (roxypropyl) siloxane. Specifically, Epicron (registered trademark) 850-S, Epicron (registered trademark) HP-4032, Epicron (registered trademark) HP-7200, Epicron (registered trademark) HP-820, Epicron (registered trademark) HP-4700, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4710, Epicron (registered trademark) HP-4770, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-859CRP, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-1514, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4880, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4850-150, Epicron EXA-4850-1000, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4816, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4822 (trade name, manufactured by DIC Corporation), Rica Resin (registered trademark) BEO-60E (Product name, Shin Nippon Rika Co., Ltd.), EP 4003S, EP-4000S (trade names, Ltd. Adeka), and the like. Among these, an epoxy resin containing a polyethylene oxide group is preferable in terms of excellent low warpage and heat resistance. For example, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4880, Epicron (registered trademark) EXA-4822, and Licaredin (registered trademark) BEO-60E are preferable because they contain a polyethylene oxide group.
 エポキシ化合物の配合量は、ポリイミド前駆体等100質量部に対し、5~50質量部であることが好ましく、10~50質量部がより好ましく、10~40質量部がさらに好ましい。配合量が、5質量部以上で硬化膜の反りをより抑制でき、50質量部以下でキュア時のリフローによるパターン埋まりをより抑制できる。 The compounding amount of the epoxy compound is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by mass, and further preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like. When the blending amount is 5 parts by mass or more, warpage of the cured film can be further suppressed, and when it is 50 parts by mass or less, pattern filling due to reflow during curing can be further suppressed.
<<<オキセタン化合物(オキセタニル基を有する化合物)>>>
 オキセタン化合物としては、一分子中にオキセタン環を2つ以上有する化合物、3-エチル-3-ヒドロキシメチルオキセタン、1,4-ビス{[(3-エチル-3-オキセタニル)メトキシ]メチル}ベンゼン、3-エチル-3-(2-エチルヘキシルメチル)オキセタン、1,4-ベンゼンジカルボン酸-ビス[(3-エチル-3-オキセタニル)メチル]エステル等を挙げることができる。具体的な例としては、東亞合成(株)製のアロンオキセタンシリーズ(例えば、OXT-121、OXT-221、OXT-191、OXT-223)を好適に使用することができ、これらは単独で、あるいは2種以上混合してもよい。
<<< Oxetane compound (compound having oxetanyl group) >>>
Examples of the oxetane compound include compounds having two or more oxetane rings in one molecule, 3-ethyl-3-hydroxymethyloxetane, 1,4-bis {[(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl) methoxy] methyl} benzene, Examples include 3-ethyl-3- (2-ethylhexylmethyl) oxetane and 1,4-benzenedicarboxylic acid-bis [(3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl) methyl] ester. As a specific example, Aron Oxetane series (for example, OXT-121, OXT-221, OXT-191, OXT-223) manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. can be preferably used. Or you may mix 2 or more types.
 オキセタン化合物の配合量は、ポリイミド前駆体等100質量部に対し、5~50質量部であることが好ましく、10~50質量部がより好ましく、10~40質量部がさらに好ましい。 The blending amount of the oxetane compound is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by mass, and further preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like.
<<<ベンゾオキサジン化合物(ベンゾオキサゾリル基を有する化合物)>>>
 ベンゾオキサジン化合物は、開環付加反応による架橋反応を行うため、キュアによる脱ガスが発生せず、さらに熱による収縮が小さいために反りの発生が抑えられることから好ましい。
<<< benzoxazine compound (compound having a benzoxazolyl group) >>>
A benzoxazine compound is preferable because it undergoes a crosslinking reaction by a ring-opening addition reaction, so that degassing due to curing does not occur, and further, since shrinkage due to heat is small, generation of warpage is suppressed.
 ベンゾオキサジン化合物の好ましい例としては、B-a型ベンゾオキサジン、B-m型ベンゾオキサジン(以上商品名、四国化成工業(株)製)、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂のベンゾオキサジン付加物、フェノールノボラック型ジヒドロベンゾオキサジン化合物が挙げられる。これらは単独で、あるいは2種以上混合してもよい。 Preferred examples of the benzoxazine compound include Ba type benzoxazine, Bm type benzoxazine (trade name, manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.), benzoxazine adduct of polyhydroxystyrene resin, phenol novolac type dihydro A benzoxazine compound is mentioned. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 ベンゾオキサジン化合物の配合量は、ポリイミド前駆体等100質量部に対し、5~50質量部であることが好ましく、10~50質量部がより好ましく、10~40質量部がさらに好ましい。 The blending amount of the benzoxazine compound is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 50 parts by mass, and further preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like.
<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明で用いる組成物は、光重合開始剤を含有しても良い。特に、組成物が光ラジカル重合開始剤を含むことにより、組成物を半導体ウェハなどに適用して組成物層を形成した後、光を照射することで、ラジカルによる硬化が起こり、光照射部における溶解性を低下させることができる。このため、例えば、電極部のみをマスクしたパターンを持つフォトマスクを介して上記組成物層を露光することで、電極のパターンにしたがって、溶解性の異なる領域を簡便に作製できるという利点がある。
<< photopolymerization initiator >>
The composition used in the present invention may contain a photopolymerization initiator. In particular, when the composition contains a photo radical polymerization initiator, the composition is applied to a semiconductor wafer or the like to form a composition layer, and then irradiation with light causes curing by radicals. Solubility can be reduced. For this reason, there exists an advantage that the area | region from which solubility differs can be easily produced according to the pattern of an electrode by exposing the said composition layer through the photomask with the pattern which masked only the electrode part, for example.
 光重合開始剤としては、光により重合性化合物の重合反応(架橋反応)を開始する能力を有する限り、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有するものが好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と何らかの作用を生じ、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよい。
 光重合開始剤は、約300~800nm(好ましくは330~500nm)の範囲内に少なくとも約50のモル吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができる。具体的には、例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶剤を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。
The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate a polymerization reaction (crosslinking reaction) of the polymerizable compound with light, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet region to the visible region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some active radicals by generating some action with the photoexcited sensitizer.
The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 to 800 nm (preferably 330 to 500 nm). The molar extinction coefficient of the compound can be measured using a known method. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to measure with a UV-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) at a concentration of 0.01 g / L using an ethyl acetate solvent.
 光重合開始剤としては、公知の化合物を制限なく使用できるが、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有するもの、オキサジアゾール骨格を有するもの、トリハロメチル基を有するものなど)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン、アゾ系化合物、アジド化合物、メタロセン化合物、有機ホウ素化合物、鉄アレーン錯体などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, known compounds can be used without limitation. For example, halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, those having a trihalomethyl group), Acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, oxime compounds such as hexaarylbiimidazole and oxime derivatives, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenones, azo series Examples thereof include compounds, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, organoboron compounds, iron arene complexes, and the like.
 トリアジン骨格を有するハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体としては、例えば、若林ら著、Bull.Chem.Soc.Japan,42、2924(1969)記載の化合物、英国特許1388492号明細書記載の化合物、特開昭53-133428号公報に記載の化合物、独国特許3337024号明細書記載の化合物、F.C.SchaeferなどによるJ.Org.Chem.;29、1527(1964)記載の化合物、特開昭62-58241号公報に記載の化合物、特開平5-281728号公報に記載の化合物、特開平5-34920号公報に記載の化合物、米国特許第4212976号明細書に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。 Examples of halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives having a triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in British Patent 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in German Patent 3333724, F.I. C. J. Schaefer et al. Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), compounds described in JP-A-62-258241, compounds described in JP-A-5-281728, compounds described in JP-A-5-34920, US patents And the compounds described in the specification of No. 42122976.
 米国特許第4212976号明細書に記載されている化合物としては、例えば、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物(例えば、2-トリクロロメチル-5-フェニル-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(4-クロロフェニル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(1-ナフチル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(2-ナフチル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリブロモメチル-5-フェニル-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリブロモメチル-5-(2-ナフチル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール;2-トリクロロメチル-5-スチリル-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(4-クロロスチリル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(4-メトキシスチリル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリクロロメチル-5-(4-n-ブトキシスチリル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、2-トリブロモメチル-5-スチリル-1,3,4-オキサジアゾールなど)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the compounds described in US Pat. No. 4,221,976 include compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton (for example, 2-trichloromethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloro Methyl-5- (4-chlorophenyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (1-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5 (2-naphthyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5- (2-naphthyl)- 1,3,4-oxadiazole; 2-trichloromethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (4-chlorostyryl) 1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (4-methoxystyryl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- (4-n-butoxystyryl)- 1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, etc.).
 また、上記以外の光重合開始剤として、特開2015-087611号公報の段落番号0086に記載の化合物、特開昭53-133428号公報、特公昭57-1819号公報、同57-6096号公報、および米国特許第3615455号明細書に記載された化合物などが例示され、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Further, as photopolymerization initiators other than those described above, compounds described in paragraph No. 0086 of JP-A-2015-087611, JP-A-53-133428, JP-B-57-1819, JP-A-57-6096 And the compounds described in US Pat. No. 3,615,455, and the like, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 ケトン化合物としては、例えば、特開2015-087611号公報の段落番号0087に記載の化合物が例示され、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 市販品では、カヤキュアーDETX(日本化薬(株)製)も好適に用いられる。
Examples of the ketone compound include compounds described in paragraph No. 0087 of JP-A-2015-087611, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
As a commercial product, Kaya Cure DETX (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) is also preferably used.
 光重合開始剤としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、および、アシルホスフィン化合物も好適に用いることができる。より具体的には、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特許第4225898号公報に記載のアシルホスフィンオキシド系開始剤も用いることができる。
 ヒドロキシアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、IRGACURE-184(IRGACUREは登録商標)、DAROCUR-1173、IRGACURE-500、IRGACURE-2959、IRGACURE-127(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。
 アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369、および、IRGACURE-379(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。
 アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤として、365nmまたは405nm等の長波領域に極大吸収波長がマッチングされた特開2009-191179号公報に記載の化合物も用いることができる。
 アシルホスフィン系開始剤としては、2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル-ジフェニル-フォスフィンオキサイドなどが挙げられる。また、市販品であるIRGACURE-819やIRGACURE-TPO(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。
 メタロセン化合物としては、IRGACURE-784(BASF社製)などが例示される。
As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
As the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-184 (IRGACURE is a registered trademark), DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 having a maximum absorption wavelength matched in a long wave region such as 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used.
Examples of the acylphosphine initiator include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-diphenyl-phosphine oxide. Further, IRGACURE-819 and IRGACURE-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) which are commercially available products can be used.
Examples of the metallocene compound include IRGACURE-784 (manufactured by BASF).
 光重合開始剤として、より好ましくはオキシム化合物が挙げられる。オキシム化合物を用いることにより、露光ラチチュードをより効果的に向上させることが可能になる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物を用いることができる。
 好ましいオキシム化合物としては、例えば、下記化合物や、3-ベンゾオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、およ2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、1-フェニル-1,2-ブタンジオン-2-(O-メトキシカルボニル)オキシム、1-フェニル-1,2-ブタンジオン-2-(O-エトキシカルボニル)オキシム、1-フェニル-1,2-プロパンジオン-2-(O-メトキシカルボニル)オキシム、1-フェニル-1,2-プロパンジオン-2-(O-エトキシカルボニル)オキシム、1-フェニル-1,2-プロパンジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイル)オキシム、1,3-ジフェニルプロパントリオン-2-(O-エトキシカルボニル)オキシム、および1-フェニル-3-エトキシプロパントリオン-2-(O-ベンゾイル)オキシムなどが挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
More preferred examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds. By using the oxime compound, the exposure latitude can be improved more effectively. Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
Preferred oxime compounds include, for example, the following compounds, 3-benzooxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane- 3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutan-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 1-phenyl-1,2-butanedione-2- (O-methoxycarbonyl) oxime, 1-phenyl-1,2-butanedione-2- (O -Ethoxycarbonyl) oxime, 1-phenyl-1,2-propanedione-2- (O-me Xycarbonyl) oxime, 1-phenyl-1,2-propanedione-2- (O-ethoxycarbonyl) oxime, 1-phenyl-1,2-propanedione-2- (O-benzoyl) oxime, 1,3- Examples thereof include diphenylpropanetrione-2- (O-ethoxycarbonyl) oxime and 1-phenyl-3-ethoxypropanetrione-2- (O-benzoyl) oxime.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 オキシム化合物としては、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.1653-1660、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.156-162、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年)pp.202-232、および、特開2000-66385号公報、特開2000-80068号公報、特表2004-534797号公報、特開2006-342166号公報の各公報に記載の化合物等が挙げられる。
 市販品ではIRGACURE OXE-01(BASF社製)、IRGACURE OXE-02(BASF社製)、N-1919((株)ADEKA製)も好適に用いられる。また、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカアークルズNCI-831およびアデカアークルズNCI-930((株)ADEKA製)も用いることができる。また、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司社製)、アデカアークルズNCI-831およびアデカアークルズNCI-930((株)ADEKA製)も用いることができる。また、DFI-091(ダイトーケミックス(株)製)も用いることができる。
Examples of oxime compounds include JCSPerkin II (1979) pp.1653-1660, JCSPerkin II (1979) pp.156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp.202-232, and -66385, JP-A 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A 2006-342166, and the like.
IRGACURE OX-01 (manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE OXE-02 (manufactured by BASF), and N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA) are also preferably used as commercial products. In addition, TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arcles NCI-831 and Adeka Arcles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can also be used. Also, TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arkles NCI-831 and Adeka Arkles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be used. Further, DFI-091 (manufactured by Daitokemix Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
 また、カルバゾールのN位にオキシムが連結した特表2009-519904号公報に記載の化合物、ベンゾフェノン部位にヘテロ置換基が導入された米国特許7626957号明細書に記載の化合物、色素部位にニトロ基が導入された特開2010-15025号公報および米国特許公開2009-292039号明細書に記載の化合物、国際公開WO2009-131189号公報に記載のケトオキシム化合物、トリアジン骨格とオキシム骨格を同一分子内に含む米国特許7556910号明細書に記載の化合物、405nmに吸収極大を有しg線光源に対して良好な感度を有する特開2009-221114号公報に記載の化合物などを用いてもよい。
 また、特開2007-231000号公報、および、特開2007-322744号公報に記載される環状オキシム化合物も好適に用いることができる。環状オキシム化合物の中でも、特に特開2010-32985号公報、特開2010-185072号公報に記載されるカルバゾール色素に縮環した環状オキシム化合物は、高い光吸収性を有し高感度化の観点から好ましい。
 また、オキシム化合物の特定部位に不飽和結合を有する化合物である、特開2009-242469号公報に記載の化合物も好適に使用することができる。
 さらに、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることも可能である。そのようなオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報に記載されている化合物、特表2014-500852号公報の段落番号0345に記載されている化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報の段落番号0101に記載されている化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。具体例としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 最も好ましいオキシム化合物としては、特開2007-269779号公報に示される特定置換基を有するオキシム化合物や、特開2009-191061号公報に示されるチオアリール基を有するオキシム化合物などが挙げられる。
Further, compounds described in JP-A-2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the N-position of carbazole, compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into a benzophenone moiety, and a nitro group in a dye moiety The compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039, the ketoxime compound described in International Publication No. WO2009-131189, the United States containing a triazine skeleton and an oxime skeleton in the same molecule A compound described in Japanese Patent No. 7556910, a compound described in JP2009-221114A having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-ray light source may be used.
In addition, the cyclic oxime compounds described in JP-A-2007-231000 and JP-A-2007-322744 can also be suitably used. Among cyclic oxime compounds, in particular, cyclic oxime compounds fused to carbazole dyes described in JP2010-32985A and JP2010-185072A have high light absorptivity and high sensitivity. preferable.
In addition, a compound described in JP-A-2009-242469, which is a compound having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound, can also be suitably used.
Furthermore, it is also possible to use an oxime compound having a fluorine atom. Specific examples of such oxime compounds include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in paragraph No. 0345 of JP-T-2014-500852, JP Examples thereof include compound (C-3) described in paragraph No. 0101 of 2013-164471. Specific examples include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
As the most preferred oxime compounds, there are oxime compounds having a specific substituent as disclosed in JP-A-2007-267979, oxime compounds having a thioaryl group as disclosed in JP-A-2009-191061, and the like.
 光重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム塩化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物およびその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体およびその塩、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、3-アリール置換クマリン化合物からなる群より選択される化合物が好ましい。
 より好ましくは、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム塩化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物であり、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリールイミダゾールダイマー、ベンゾフェノン化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物がさらに好ましく、メタロセン化合物またはオキシム化合物を用いるのが一層好ましく、オキシム化合物が特に好ましい。
 また、光重合開始剤は、ベンゾフェノン、N,N′-テトラメチル-4,4′-ジアミノベンゾフェノン(ミヒラーケトン)等のN,N′-テトラアルキル-4,4′-ジアミノベンゾフェノン、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルホリノフェニル)-ブタノン-1、2-メチル-1-[4-(メチルチオ)フェニル]-2-モルフォリノ-プロパノン-1等の芳香族ケトン、アルキルアントラキノン等の芳香環と縮環したキノン類、ベンゾインアルキルエーテル等のベンゾインエーテル化合物、ベンゾイン、アルキルベンゾイン等のベンゾイン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール等のベンジル誘導体などを用いることもできる。また、下記式(I)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
式(I)中、R50は、炭素数1~20のアルキル基;1個以上の酸素原子によって中断された炭素数2~20のアルキル基;炭素数1~12のアルコキシ基;フェニル基;炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数1~12のアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、炭素数2~12のアルケニル基、1個以上の酸素原子によって中断された炭素数2~18のアルキル基および炭素数1~4のアルキル基の少なくとも1つで、置換されたフェニル基;またはビフェニリルであり、R51は、式(II)で表される基であるか、R50と同じ基であり、R52~R54は各々独立に炭素数1~12のアルキル、炭素数1~12のアルコキシまたはハロゲンである。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
式中、R55~R57は、上記式(I)のR52~R54と同じである。
Photopolymerization initiators are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triaryls from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity. Selected from the group consisting of imidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds. Are preferred.
More preferably, they are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, and trihalomethyltriazine compounds. , Α-aminoketone compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of benzophenone compounds is more preferable, metallocene compounds or oxime compounds are more preferable, and oxime compounds are particularly preferable. preferable.
Photopolymerization initiators include N, N'-tetraalkyl-4,4'-diaminobenzophenone, 2-benzyl-, such as benzophenone, N, N'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diaminobenzophenone (Michler ketone), etc. Aromatic ketones such as 2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1, 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-morpholino-propanone-1, alkyl anthraquinones, etc. It is also possible to use quinones fused with an aromatic ring, benzoin ether compounds such as benzoin alkyl ether, benzoin compounds such as benzoin and alkylbenzoin, and benzyl derivatives such as benzyldimethyl ketal. A compound represented by the following formula (I) can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
In the formula (I), R 50 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms; an alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms interrupted by one or more oxygen atoms; an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms; a phenyl group; An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, an alkenyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and 2 to 2 carbon atoms interrupted by one or more oxygen atoms A phenyl group substituted with at least one of 18 alkyl groups and an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; or biphenylyl, and R 51 is a group represented by the formula (II), or R 50 and R 52 to R 54 are each independently alkyl having 1 to 12 carbons, alkoxy having 1 to 12 carbons or halogen.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
In the formula, R 55 to R 57 are the same as R 52 to R 54 in the above formula (I).
 また、光重合開始剤は、国際公開WO2015/125469号公報の段落番号0048~0055に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0048 to 0055 of International Publication No. WO2015 / 125469 can be used.
 組成物が光重合開始剤を含む場合、光重合開始剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対し0.1~30質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.1~20質量%であり、さらに好ましくは0.1~10質量%である。
 光重合開始剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。光重合開始剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the composition contains a photopolymerization initiator, the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. More preferably, the content is 0.1 to 10% by mass.
Only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more photopolymerization initiators, the total is preferably in the above range.
<マイグレーション抑制剤>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる感光性樹脂組成物は、さらにマイグレーション抑制剤を含むことが好ましい。マイグレーション抑制剤を含むことにより、金属層(金属配線)由来の金属イオンが感光性樹脂組成物内へ移動することを効果的に抑制することが可能になる。
 マイグレーション抑制剤としては、特に制限はないが、複素環(ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピラゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、イソチアゾール環、テトラゾール環、ピリジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、モルホリン環、2H-ピラン環および6H-ピラン環、トリアジン環)を有する化合物、チオ尿素類およびメルカプト基を有する化合物、ヒンダーフェノール系化合物、サリチル酸誘導体系化合物、ヒドラジド誘導体系化合物が挙げられる。特に、トリアゾール、ベンゾトリアゾール等のトリアゾール系化合物、テトラゾール、ベンゾテトラゾール等のテトラゾール系化合物が好ましく使用できる。
<Migration inhibitor>
The photosensitive resin composition used in the production method of the present invention preferably further contains a migration inhibitor. By including a migration inhibitor, it becomes possible to effectively suppress the migration of metal ions derived from the metal layer (metal wiring) into the photosensitive resin composition.
The migration inhibitor is not particularly limited, but a heterocyclic ring (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring, pyridine ring, A compound having a pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring and 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring), a compound having a thiourea and a mercapto group, a hindered phenol compound, Examples include salicylic acid derivative compounds and hydrazide derivative compounds. In particular, triazole compounds such as triazole and benzotriazole, and tetrazole compounds such as tetrazole and benzotetrazole can be preferably used.
 また、ハロゲンイオンなどの陰イオンを補捉するイオントラップ剤を使用することもできる。イオントラップ剤としては特に制限は無く、従来公知のものを用いることができる。特に、下記組成式で表されるハイドロタルサイトまたは下記組成式で表されるビスマスの含水酸化物が好ましい。   
Mg1-XAl(OH)(COX/2・mHO    
(上記組成式中、0<X≦0.5、mは正の数)   
BiO(OH)(NO   
(上記組成式中、0.9≦x≦1.1、0.6≦y≦0.8、0.2≦z≦0.4)   
なお、上記ハイドロタルサイトは、市販品では協和化学工業(株)製、商品名:DHT-4Aとして入手可能である。また、上記ビスマスは、市販品では東亞合成(株)製、商品名:IXE500として入手可能である。また、必要に応じてその他のイオントラップ剤を用いてもよい。例えば、マグネシウム、アルミニウム、チタン、ジルコニウム、アンチモン等から選ばれる元素の含水酸化物などが挙げられる。これらのイオントラップ剤は、単独または2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。  
In addition, an ion trapping agent that captures anions such as halogen ions can also be used. There is no restriction | limiting in particular as an ion trap agent, A conventionally well-known thing can be used. In particular, hydrotalcite represented by the following composition formula or hydrated oxide of bismuth represented by the following composition formula is preferable.
Mg 1-X Al X (OH) 2 (CO 3 ) X / 2 · mH 2 O
(In the above composition formula, 0 <X ≦ 0.5, m is a positive number)
BiO x (OH) y (NO 3 ) z
(In the above composition formula, 0.9 ≦ x ≦ 1.1, 0.6 ≦ y ≦ 0.8, 0.2 ≦ z ≦ 0.4)
The hydrotalcite is a commercial product available from Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. under the trade name: DHT-4A. Moreover, the said bismuth is available as a brand name: IXE500 by Toagosei Co., Ltd. with a commercial item. Moreover, you may use another ion trap agent as needed. Examples thereof include hydrated oxides of elements selected from magnesium, aluminum, titanium, zirconium, antimony, and the like. These ion trapping agents can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 その他マイグレーション抑制剤としては、特開2013-15701号公報の段落番号0094に記載の防錆剤、特開2009-283711号公報の段落番号0073~0076に記載の化合物、特開2011-59656号公報の段落番号0052に記載の化合物、特開2012-194520号公報の段落番号0114、0116および0118に記載の化合物などを使用することができる。 Examples of other migration inhibitors include a rust inhibitor described in paragraph No. 0094 of JP2013-15701A, a compound described in paragraph Nos. 0073 to 0076 of JP2009-283711A, and JP2011-59656A. And the compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0114, 0116 and 0118 of JP 2012-194520 A, and the like.
 組成物がマイグレーション抑制剤を有する場合、マイグレーション抑制剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.05~2.0質量%がより好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%がさらに好ましい。
 マイグレーション抑制剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。マイグレーション抑制剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the composition has a migration inhibitor, the content of the migration inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5.0% by mass, and 0.05 to 2.0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. More preferred is 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
Only one type of migration inhibitor may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more migration inhibitors, the total is preferably within the above range.
<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる感光性樹脂組成物は、重合禁止剤を含むことが好ましい。
 重合禁止剤としては、例えば、ヒドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、p-tert-ブチルカテコール、1,3,5-トリス(4-t-ブチル-3-ヒドロキシ-2,6-ジメチルベンジル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6-(1H,3H,5H)-トリオン、p-ベンゾキノン、ジフェニル-p-ベンゾキノン、4,4′-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2′-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソ-N-フェニルヒドロキシアミンアルミニウム塩、フェノチアジン、N-ニトロソジフェニルアミン、N-フェニルナフチルアミン、エチレンジアミン四酢酸、1,2-シクロヘキサンジアミン四酢酸、グリコールエーテルジアミン四酢酸、2,6-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール、5-ニトロソ-8-ヒドロキシキノリン、1-ニトロソ-2-ナフトール、2-ニトロソ-1-ナフトール、2-ニトロソ-5-(N-エチル-N-スルフォプロピルアミノ)フェノール、N-ニトロソ-N-(1-ナフチル)ヒドロキシアミンアンモニウム塩、ビス(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-tert-ブチル)フェニルメタンなどが好適に用いられる。また、特開2015-127817号公報の段落番号0060に記載の重合禁止剤、および、国際公開WO2015/125469号公報の段落番号0031~0046に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。
 組成物が重合禁止剤を有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~5質量%が好ましい。
 重合禁止剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。重合禁止剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
<< Polymerization inhibitor >>
The photosensitive resin composition used in the production method of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor.
Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, p-tert-butylcatechol, 1,3,5-tris (4-t-butyl-3- Hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl) -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6- (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione, p-benzoquinone, diphenyl-p-benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitroso-N-phenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt, phenothiazine, N-nitrosodiphenylamine, N -Phenylnaphthylamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, 1,2-cyclohexanediamy Tetraacetic acid, glycol ether diamine tetraacetic acid, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 5-nitroso-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-nitroso-2-naphthol, 2-nitroso-1-naphthol, 2 -Nitroso-5- (N-ethyl-N-sulfopropylamino) phenol, N-nitroso-N- (1-naphthyl) hydroxyamine ammonium salt, bis (4-hydroxy-3,5-tert-butyl) phenyl Methane or the like is preferably used. In addition, a polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph No. 0060 of JP-A-2015-127817 and compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0031 to 0046 of International Publication No. WO2015 / 125469 can also be used.
When the composition has a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
Only one polymerization inhibitor may be used, or two or more polymerization inhibitors may be used. When two or more polymerization inhibitors are used, the total is preferably within the above range.
<<熱塩基発生剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる感光性樹脂組成物は、熱塩基発生剤を含んでいてもよい。
 熱塩基発生剤としては、その種類等は特に定めるものではないが、40℃以上に加熱すると塩基を発生する酸性化合物、および、pKa1が0~4のアニオンとアンモニウムカチオンとを有するアンモニウム塩から選ばれる少なくとも一種を含む熱塩基発生剤を含むことが好ましい。ここで、pKa1とは、多価の酸の第一のプロトンの解離定数(Ka)の対数表示(-Log10Ka)を示す。
 このような化合物を配合することにより、ポリイミド前駆体の環化反応を低温で行うことができ、また、より安定性に優れた組成物とすることができる。また、熱塩基発生剤は、加熱しなければ塩基を発生しないので、ポリイミド前駆体と共存させても、保存中におけるポリイミド前駆体の環化を抑制でき、保存安定性に優れている。
<< thermal base generator >>
The photosensitive resin composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a thermal base generator.
The type of the thermal base generator is not particularly defined, but it is selected from an acidic compound that generates a base when heated to 40 ° C. or higher, and an ammonium salt having an anion having an pKa1 of 0 to 4 and an ammonium cation. It is preferable to include a thermal base generator containing at least one of the above. Here, pKa1 represents a logarithmic representation (−Log 10 Ka) of the dissociation constant (Ka) of the first proton of the polyvalent acid.
By mix | blending such a compound, the cyclization reaction of a polyimide precursor can be performed at low temperature, and it can be set as the composition excellent in stability. Moreover, since the base is not generated unless heated, the thermal base generator can suppress cyclization of the polyimide precursor during storage even if it coexists with the polyimide precursor, and is excellent in storage stability.
 本発明における熱塩基発生剤は、40℃以上に加熱すると塩基を発生する酸性化合物(A1)、および、pKa1が0~4のアニオンとアンモニウムカチオンとを有するアンモニウム塩(A2)から選ばれる少なくとも一種を含む。
 上記酸性化合物(A1)および上記アンモニウム塩(A2)は、加熱すると塩基を発生するので、これらの化合物から発生した塩基により、ポリイミド前駆体の環化反応を促進でき、ポリイミド前駆体の環化を低温で行うことができる。また、これらの化合物は、塩基により環化して硬化するポリイミド前駆体と共存させても、加熱しなければポリイミド前駆体の環化が殆ど進行しないので、安定性に優れたポリイミド前駆体組成物を調製することができる。
 なお、本明細書において、酸性化合物とは、化合物を容器に1g採取し、イオン交換水とテトラヒドロフランとの混合液(質量比は水/テトラヒドロフラン=1/4)を50mL加えて、室温で1時間撹拌する。その溶液をpHメーターを用いて、20℃にて測定した値が7未満である化合物を意味する。
The thermal base generator in the present invention is at least one selected from an acidic compound (A1) that generates a base when heated to 40 ° C. or higher, and an ammonium salt (A2) having an anion having a pKa1 of 0 to 4 and an ammonium cation. including.
Since the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) generate a base when heated, the base generated from these compounds can accelerate the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor, thereby cyclizing the polyimide precursor. Can be performed at low temperatures. In addition, even if these compounds coexist with a polyimide precursor that is cured by cyclization with a base, since the cyclization of the polyimide precursor hardly proceeds unless heated, a polyimide precursor composition having excellent stability can be obtained. Can be prepared.
In the present specification, an acidic compound means that 1 g of a compound is collected in a container, and 50 mL of a mixed solution of ion-exchanged water and tetrahydrofuran (mass ratio is water / tetrahydrofuran = 1/4) is added to the mixture at room temperature for 1 hour. Stir. The value of the solution measured at 20 ° C. using a pH meter is less than 7.
 本発明において、酸性化合物(A1)およびアンモニウム塩(A2)の塩基発生温度は、40℃以上が好ましく、120~200℃がより好ましい。塩基発生温度の上限は、190℃以下がより好ましく、180℃以下がさらに好ましく、165℃以下が一層好ましい。塩基発生温度の下限は、130℃以上がさらに好ましく、135℃以上が一層好ましい。
 酸性化合物(A1)およびアンモニウム塩(A2)の塩基発生温度が40℃以上、さらには、120℃以上であれば、保存中に塩基が発生しにくいので、安定性に優れたポリイミド前駆体組成物を調製することができる。酸性化合物(A1)およびアンモニウム塩(A2)の塩基発生温度が200℃以下であれば、ポリイミド前駆体の環化温度を低減できる。塩基発生温度は、例えば、示差走査熱量測定を用い、化合物を耐圧カプセル中5℃/分で250℃まで加熱し、最も温度が低い発熱ピークのピーク温度を読み取り、ピーク温度を塩基発生温度として測定することができる。
In the present invention, the base generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is preferably 40 ° C. or higher, more preferably 120 to 200 ° C. The upper limit of the base generation temperature is more preferably 190 ° C or lower, further preferably 180 ° C or lower, and further preferably 165 ° C or lower. The lower limit of the base generation temperature is more preferably 130 ° C or higher, and still more preferably 135 ° C or higher.
If the base generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is 40 ° C. or higher, and further 120 ° C. or higher, the base is unlikely to be generated during storage, so the polyimide precursor composition has excellent stability. Can be prepared. When the base generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is 200 ° C. or less, the cyclization temperature of the polyimide precursor can be reduced. The base generation temperature is measured, for example, by using differential scanning calorimetry, heating the compound to 250 ° C. at 5 ° C./min in a pressure capsule, reading the peak temperature of the lowest exothermic peak, and measuring the peak temperature as the base generation temperature. can do.
 本発明において、熱塩基発生剤により発生する塩基は、2級アミンまたは3級アミンが好ましく、3級アミンがより好ましい。3級アミンは、塩基性が高いので、ポリイミド前駆体の環化温度をより低下できる。また、熱塩基発生剤により発生する塩基の沸点は、80℃以上であることが好ましく、100℃以上であることがより好ましく、140℃以上であることが最も好ましい。また、発生する塩基の分子量は、80~2,000が好ましい。下限は100以上がより好ましい。上限は500以下がより好ましい。なお、分子量の値は、構造式から求めた理論値である。 In the present invention, the base generated by the thermal base generator is preferably a secondary amine or a tertiary amine, more preferably a tertiary amine. Since tertiary amine has high basicity, the cyclization temperature of a polyimide precursor can be lowered more. Further, the boiling point of the base generated by the thermal base generator is preferably 80 ° C. or higher, more preferably 100 ° C. or higher, and most preferably 140 ° C. or higher. The molecular weight of the generated base is preferably 80 to 2,000. The lower limit is more preferably 100 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 500 or less. The molecular weight value is a theoretical value obtained from the structural formula.
 本発明において、上記酸性化合物(A1)は、アンモニウム塩および後述する式(101)または(102)で表される化合物から選ばれる1種以上を含むことが好ましい。 In the present invention, the acidic compound (A1) preferably contains one or more selected from an ammonium salt and a compound represented by the formula (101) or (102) described later.
 本発明において、上記アンモニウム塩(A2)は、酸性化合物であることが好ましい。なお、上記アンモニウム塩(A2)は、40℃以上(好ましくは120~200℃)に加熱すると塩基を発生する酸性化合物を含む化合物であってもよいし、40℃以上(好ましくは120~200℃)に加熱すると塩基を発生する酸性化合物以外の化合物であってもよい。 In the present invention, the ammonium salt (A2) is preferably an acidic compound. The ammonium salt (A2) may be a compound containing an acidic compound that generates a base when heated to 40 ° C. or higher (preferably 120 to 200 ° C.), or 40 ° C. or higher (preferably 120 to 200 ° C.). ) May be a compound other than an acidic compound that generates a base when heated.
<<<アンモニウム塩>>>
 本発明において、アンモニウム塩とは、下記式(101)または式(102)で表されるアンモニウムカチオンと、アニオンとの塩を意味する。アニオンは、アンモニウムカチオンのいずれかの一部と共有結合を介して結合していてもよく、アンモニウムカチオンの分子外に有していてもよいが、アンモニウムカチオンの分子外に有していることが好ましい。なお、アニオンが、アンモニウムカチオンの分子外に有するとは、アンモニウムカチオンとアニオンが共有結合を介して結合していない場合をいう。以下、カチオンの分子外のアニオンを対アニオンともいう。
式(101)    式(102)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 式中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭化水素基を表し、Rは炭化水素基を表す。RとR、RとR、RとR、RとRはそれぞれ結合して環を形成してもよい。
<<< Ammonium salt >>>
In the present invention, the ammonium salt means a salt of an ammonium cation represented by the following formula (101) or formula (102) and an anion. The anion may be bonded to any part of the ammonium cation via a covalent bond, and may be outside the molecule of the ammonium cation, but may be outside the molecule of the ammonium cation. preferable. In addition, that an anion has outside the molecule | numerator of an ammonium cation means the case where an ammonium cation and an anion are not couple | bonded through a covalent bond. Hereinafter, the anion outside the cation molecule is also referred to as a counter anion.
Formula (101) Formula (102)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
In the formula, R 1 to R 6 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, and R 7 represents a hydrocarbon group. R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , R 5 and R 7 may be bonded to form a ring.
 アンモニウムカチオンは、下記式(Y1-1)~(Y1-5)のいずれかで表されることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
The ammonium cation is preferably represented by any of the following formulas (Y1-1) to (Y1-5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 上記式において、R101は、n価の有機基を表し、RおよびRは、式(101)または式(102)と同義である。
 Ar101およびAr102は、それぞれ独立に、アリール基を表し、
 nは、1以上の整数を表し、
 mは、0~5の整数を表す。
In the above formula, R 101 represents an n-valent organic group, and R 1 and R 7 are synonymous with the formula (101) or the formula (102).
Ar 101 and Ar 102 each independently represent an aryl group,
n represents an integer of 1 or more,
m represents an integer of 0 to 5.
 本発明において、アンモニウム塩は、pKa1が0~4のアニオンとアンモニウムカチオンとを有することが好ましい。アニオンのpKa1の上限は、3.5以下がより好ましく、3.2以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、0.5以上がより好ましく、1.0以上がさらに好ましい。アニオンのpKa1が上記範囲であれば、ポリイミド前駆体を低温で環化でき、さらには、ポリイミド前駆体組成物の安定性を向上できる。pKa1が4以下であれば、熱塩基発生剤の安定性が良好で、加熱なしに塩基が発生することを抑制でき、ポリイミド前駆体組成物の安定性が良好である。pKa1が0以上であれば、発生した塩基が中和されにくく、ポリイミド前駆体の環化効率が良好である。
 アニオンの種類は、カルボン酸アニオン、フェノールアニオン、リン酸アニオンおよび硫酸アニオンから選ばれる1種が好ましく、塩の安定性と熱分解性を両立させられるという理由からカルボン酸アニオンがより好ましい。すなわち、アンモニウム塩は、アンモニウムカチオンとカルボン酸アニオンとの塩がより好ましい。
 カルボン酸アニオンは、2個以上のカルボキシル基を持つ2価以上のカルボン酸のアニオンが好ましく、2価のカルボン酸のアニオンがより好ましい。この態様によれば、ポリイミド前駆体組成物の安定性、硬化性および現像性をより向上できる熱塩基発生剤とすることができる。特に、2価のカルボン酸のアニオンを用いることで、ポリイミド前駆体組成物の安定性、硬化性および現像性をさらに向上できる。
 本発明において、カルボン酸アニオンは、pKa1が4以下のカルボン酸のアニオンであることが好ましい。pKa1は、3.5以下がより好ましく、3.2以下がさらに好ましい。この態様によれば、ポリイミド前駆体組成物の安定性をより向上できる。
 ここでpKa1とは、酸の第一解離定数の逆数の対数を表し、Determination of Organic Structures by Physical Methods(著者:Brown, H. C., McDaniel, D. H., Hafliger, O., Nachod, F. C.; 編纂:Braude, E. A., Nachod, F. C.; Academic Press, New York, 1955)や、Data for Biochemical Research(著者:Dawson, R.M.C.et al; Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1959)に記載の値を参照することができる。これらの文献に記載の無い化合物については、ACD/pKa(ACD/Labs製)のソフトを用いて構造式より算出した値を用いることとする。
In the present invention, the ammonium salt preferably has an anion having an pKa1 of 0 to 4 and an ammonium cation. The upper limit of the anion pKa1 is more preferably 3.5 or less, and even more preferably 3.2 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 0.5 or more, and further preferably 1.0 or more. If the pKa1 of the anion is in the above range, the polyimide precursor can be cyclized at a low temperature, and further, the stability of the polyimide precursor composition can be improved. If pKa1 is 4 or less, the stability of the thermal base generator is good, the generation of a base without heating can be suppressed, and the stability of the polyimide precursor composition is good. If pKa1 is 0 or more, the generated base is hardly neutralized, and the cyclization efficiency of the polyimide precursor is good.
The kind of anion is preferably one selected from a carboxylate anion, a phenol anion, a phosphate anion, and a sulfate anion, and a carboxylate anion is more preferable because both the stability of the salt and the thermal decomposability can be achieved. That is, the ammonium salt is more preferably a salt of an ammonium cation and a carboxylate anion.
The carboxylic acid anion is preferably a divalent or higher carboxylic acid anion having two or more carboxyl groups, and more preferably a divalent carboxylic acid anion. According to this aspect, it can be set as the thermal base generator which can improve more stability, sclerosis | hardenability, and developability of a polyimide precursor composition. In particular, the stability, curability and developability of the polyimide precursor composition can be further improved by using an anion of a divalent carboxylic acid.
In the present invention, the carboxylic acid anion is preferably a carboxylic acid anion having a pKa1 of 4 or less. pKa1 is more preferably 3.5 or less, and even more preferably 3.2 or less. According to this aspect, the stability of the polyimide precursor composition can be further improved.
Here, pKa1 represents the logarithm of the reciprocal of the first dissociation constant of the acid, and is determined by Organic Structures by Physical Methods (author: Brown, HC, McDaniel, DH, Hafliger, O., Nachod, FC; Compilation: Braude, EA, Nachod, FC; Academic Press, New York, 1955) and Data for Biochemical Research (author: Dawson, RMC et al; Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1959). For compounds not described in these documents, values calculated from the structural formula using software of ACD / pKa (manufactured by ACD / Labs) are used.
 本発明において、カルボン酸アニオンは、下記式(X1)で表されることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 式(X1)において、EWGは、電子求引性基を表す。
In the present invention, the carboxylate anion is preferably represented by the following formula (X1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
In the formula (X1), EWG represents an electron withdrawing group.
 本発明において電子求引性基とは、ハメットの置換基定数σmが正の値を示すものを意味する。ここでσmは、都野雄甫による総説、有機合成化学協会誌第23巻第8号(1965)P.631-642に詳しく説明されている。なお、本発明における電子求引性基は、上記文献に記載された置換基に限定されるものではない。
 σmが正の値を示す置換基の例としては例えば、CF基(σm=0.43)、CFCO基(σm=0.63)、HC≡C基(σm=0.21)、CH=CH基(σm=0.06)、Ac基(σm=0.38)、MeOCO基(σm=0.37)、MeCOCH=CH基(σm=0.21)、PhCO基(σm=0.34)、HNCOCH基(σm=0.06)などが挙げられる。なお、Meはメチル基を表し、Acはアセチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
In the present invention, the electron withdrawing group means a group having a positive Hammett's substituent constant σm. Here, σm is a review by Yugo Tono, Journal of Synthetic Organic Chemistry, Vol. 23, No. 8 (1965) P.I. 631-642. In addition, the electron withdrawing group in this invention is not limited to the substituent described in the said literature.
Examples of substituents in which σm has a positive value include, for example, CF 3 group (σm = 0.43), CF 3 CO group (σm = 0.63), HC≡C group (σm = 0.21), CH 2 ═CH group (σm = 0.06), Ac group (σm = 0.38), MeOCO group (σm = 0.37), MeCOCH═CH group (σm = 0.21), PhCO group (σm = 0.34), H 2 NCOCH 2 group (σm = 0.06), and the like. Me represents a methyl group, Ac represents an acetyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
 本発明において、EWGは、下記式(EWG-1)~(EWG-6)で表される基を表すことが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
 式中、Rx1~Rx3は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヒドロキシ基またはカルボキシル基を表し、Arは芳香族基を表す。
In the present invention, EWG preferably represents a group represented by the following formulas (EWG-1) to (EWG-6).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
In the formula, R x1 to R x3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a hydroxy group, or a carboxyl group, and Ar represents an aromatic group.
 本発明において、カルボン酸アニオンは、下記式(X)で表されるものも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 式(X)において、L10は、単結合、または、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、芳香族基、-NR-、およびこれらの組み合わせから選ばれる2価の連結基を表し、Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基またはアリール基を表す。
In the present invention, the carboxylate anion is also preferably represented by the following formula (X).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
In the formula (X), L 10 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group selected from an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an aromatic group, —NR X —, and combinations thereof, and R X represents hydrogen An atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an aryl group is represented.
 カルボン酸アニオンの具体例としては、マレイン酸アニオン、フタル酸アニオン、N-フェニルイミノ二酢酸アニオンおよびシュウ酸アニオンが挙げられる。
 以下に、本発明で好ましく用いられる熱塩基発生剤を例示する。本発明で用いられる熱塩基発生剤がこれらに限定されるものではないことは言うまでもない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Specific examples of the carboxylate anion include a maleate anion, a phthalate anion, an N-phenyliminodiacetic acid anion, and an oxalate anion.
Below, the thermal base generator preferably used by this invention is illustrated. It goes without saying that the thermal base generator used in the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 熱塩基発生剤を用いる場合、組成物における熱塩基発生剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1~50質量%が好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1質量%以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、30質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以下がさらに好ましい。
 熱塩基発生剤は、1種または2種以上を用いることができる。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When a thermal base generator is used, the content of the thermal base generator in the composition is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass relative to the total solid content of the composition. The lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and further preferably 20% by mass or less.
1 type (s) or 2 or more types can be used for a thermal base generator. When using 2 or more types, it is preferable that a total amount is the said range.
<<光塩基発生剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる感光性樹脂組成物は、光塩基発生剤を含んでいてもよい。光塩基発生剤とは、露光により塩基を発生するものであり、常温常圧の通常の条件下では活性を示さないが、外部刺激として露光、即ち、電磁波の照射と加熱が行なわれると、塩基(塩基性物質)を発生するものであれば特に限定されるものではない。露光により発生した塩基はポリイミド前駆体を加熱により硬化させる際の触媒として働くため、ネガ型において好適に用いることができる。
<< Photobase generator >>
The photosensitive resin composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a photobase generator. A photobase generator generates a base by exposure and does not exhibit activity under normal conditions of normal temperature and pressure, but when exposed to an external stimulus, that is, irradiated with an electromagnetic wave and heated, the base There is no particular limitation as long as it generates (basic substance). Since the base generated by the exposure works as a catalyst for curing the polyimide precursor by heating, it can be suitably used in the negative type.
 光塩基発生剤の含有量としては、所望のパターンを形成できるものであれば特に限定されるものではなく、一般的な含有量とすることができる。光塩基発生剤が、樹脂100質量部に対して、0.01質量部以上30質量部以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、0.05質量部~25質量部の範囲内であることがより好ましく、0.1質量部~20質量部の範囲内であることがさらに好ましい。 The content of the photobase generator is not particularly limited as long as it can form a desired pattern, and can be a general content. The photobase generator is preferably in the range of 0.01 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably in the range of 0.05 to 25 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin. Preferably, it is in the range of 0.1 to 20 parts by mass.
 本発明においては、光塩基発生剤として公知のものを用いることが出来る。例えば、M.Shirai, and M.Tsunooka, Prog.Polym.Sci.,21,1(1996);角岡正弘,高分子加工,46,2(1997);C.Kutal,Coord.Chem.Rev.,211,353(2001);Y.Kaneko,A.Sarker, and D.Neckers,Chem.Mater.,11,170(1999);H.Tachi,M.Shirai, and M.Tsunooka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,13,153(2000);M.Winkle, and K.Graziano,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,3,419(1990);M.Tsunooka,H.Tachi, and S.Yoshitaka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,9,13(1996);K.Suyama,H.Araki,M.Shirai,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,19,81(2006)に記載されているように、遷移金属化合物錯体や、アンモニウム塩などの構造を有するものや、アミジン部分がカルボン酸と塩形成することで潜在化されたもののように、塩基成分が塩を形成することにより中和されたイオン性の化合物や、カルバメート誘導体、オキシムエステル誘導体、アシル化合物などのウレタン結合やオキシム結合などにより塩基成分が潜在化された非イオン性の化合物を挙げることができる。
 本発明では、光塩基発生剤として、カルバメート誘導体、アミド誘導体、イミド誘導体、αコバルト錯体類、イミダゾール誘導体、桂皮酸アミド誘導体、オキシム誘導体等がより好ましい例として挙げられる。
In the present invention, known photobase generators can be used. For example, M.M. Shirai, and M.M. Tsunooka, Prog. Polym. Sci. , 21, 1 (1996); Masahiro Kadooka, polymer processing, 46, 2 (1997); Kutal, Coord. Chem. Rev. , 211, 353 (2001); Kaneko, A .; Sarker, and D.C. Neckers, Chem. Mater. 11, 170 (1999); Tachi, M .; Shirai, and M.M. Tsunooka, J. et al. Photopolym. Sci. Technol. , 13, 153 (2000); Winkle, and K.K. Graziano, J. et al. Photopolym. Sci. Technol. 3,419 (1990); Tsunooka, H .; Tachi, and S.M. Yoshitaka, J. et al. Photopolym. Sci. Technol. , 9, 13 (1996); Suyama, H .; Araki, M .; Shirai, J. et al. Photopolym. Sci. Technol. , 19, 81 (2006), as described in transition metal compound complexes, those having a structure such as an ammonium salt, and those formed by salt formation of an amidine moiety with a carboxylic acid, An ionic compound neutralized by forming a salt with a base component, or a nonionic compound in which the base component is made latent by a urethane bond or oxime bond such as a carbamate derivative, an oxime ester derivative, or an acyl compound. Can be mentioned.
In the present invention, carbamate derivatives, amide derivatives, imide derivatives, α-cobalt complexes, imidazole derivatives, cinnamic acid amide derivatives, oxime derivatives and the like are more preferred examples of photobase generators.
 光塩基発生剤から発生する塩基性物質としては、特に限定されないが、アミノ基を有する化合物、特にモノアミンや、ジアミンなどのポリアミン、また、アミジンなどが挙げられる。
 発生する塩基性物質は、より塩基性度の高いアミノ基を有する化合物が好ましい。ポリイミド前駆体のイミド化における脱水縮合反応等に対する触媒作用が強く、より少量の添加で、より低い温度での脱水縮合反応等における触媒効果の発現が可能となるからである。つまりは、発生した塩基性物質の触媒効果が大きい為、ネガ型感光性樹脂組成物としての見た目の感度は向上する。
 上記触媒効果の観点からアミジン、脂肪族アミンであることが好ましい。
The basic substance generated from the photobase generator is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include compounds having amino groups, particularly monoamines, polyamines such as diamines, and amidines.
The generated basic substance is preferably a compound having an amino group having a higher basicity. This is because the catalytic action for the dehydration condensation reaction or the like in the imidization of the polyimide precursor is strong, and the catalytic effect in the dehydration condensation reaction or the like at a lower temperature can be expressed with a smaller amount of addition. That is, since the catalytic effect of the generated basic substance is great, the apparent sensitivity as a negative photosensitive resin composition is improved.
From the viewpoint of the catalytic effect, an amidine and an aliphatic amine are preferable.
 光塩基発生剤としては、構造中に塩を含まない光塩基発生剤であることが好ましく、光塩基発生剤において発生する塩基部分の窒素原子上に電荷がないことが好ましい。光塩基発生剤としては、発生する塩基が共有結合を用いて潜在化されていることが好ましく、塩基の発生機構が、発生する塩基部分の窒素原子と隣接する原子との間の共有結合が切断されて塩基が発生するものであることが好ましい。構造中に塩を含まない光塩基発生剤であると、光塩基発生剤を中性にすることができるため、溶剤溶解性がより良好であり、ポットライフが向上する。このような理由から、本発明で用いられる光塩基発生剤から発生するアミンは、1級アミンまたは2級アミンが好ましい。 The photobase generator is preferably a photobase generator that does not contain salt in the structure, and preferably has no charge on the nitrogen atom of the base moiety generated in the photobase generator. As the photobase generator, it is preferable that the generated base is latentized using a covalent bond, and the base generation mechanism is such that the covalent bond between the nitrogen atom of the generated base portion and the adjacent atom is broken. It is preferable that a base is generated. When the photobase generator contains no salt in the structure, the photobase generator can be neutralized, so that the solvent solubility is better and the pot life is improved. For these reasons, the amine generated from the photobase generator used in the present invention is preferably a primary amine or a secondary amine.
 また、上記のような理由から光塩基発生剤としては、上述のように発生する塩基が共有結合を用いて潜在化されていることが好ましく、発生する塩基がアミド結合、カルバメート結合、オキシム結合を用いて潜在化されていることが好ましい。
 本発明に係る光塩基発生剤としては、例えば、特開2009-80452号公報および国際公開WO2009/123122号公報で開示されたような桂皮酸アミド構造を有する光塩基発生剤、特開2006-189591号公報および特開2008-247747号公報で開示されたようなカルバメート構造を有する光塩基発生剤、特開2007-249013号公報および特開2008-003581号公報で開示されたようなオキシム構造、カルバモイルオキシム構造を有する光塩基発生剤等が挙げられるが、これらに限定されず、その他にも公知の光塩基発生剤の構造を用いることができる。
For the above reasons, as the photobase generator, it is preferable that the generated base is latentized using a covalent bond as described above, and the generated base has an amide bond, carbamate bond, or oxime bond. It is preferably latentized by using.
Examples of the photobase generator according to the present invention include a photobase generator having a cinnamic acid amide structure as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-80452 and International Publication WO2009 / 123122, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-189591. Photobase generator having a carbamate structure as disclosed in JP-A No. 2008-247747 and oxime structure as disclosed in JP-A No. 2007-249013 and JP-A-2008-003581, carbamoyl Although the photobase generator etc. which have an oxime structure are mentioned, It is not limited to these, In addition, the structure of a well-known photobase generator can be used.
 その他、光塩基発生剤としては、特開2012-93746号公報の段落番号0185~0188、0199~0200および0202に記載の化合物、特開2013-194205号公報の段落番号0022~0069に記載の化合物、特開2013-204019号公報の段落番号0026~0074に記載の化合物、ならびに国際公開WO2010/064631号公報の段落番号0052に記載の化合物が例として挙げられる。 In addition, examples of the photobase generator include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0185 to 0188, 0199 to 0200 and 0202 of JP2012-93746A, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0069 of JP2013-194205A. Examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2013-204019, paragraphs 0026 to 0074, and compounds described in paragraph No. 0052 of international publication WO2010 / 064631.
 光塩基発生剤の市販品としては、WPBG-266、WPBG-300、WPGB-345、WPGB-140、WPBG-165、WPBG-027、PBG-018、WPGB-015、WPBG-041、WPGB-172、WPGB-174、WPBG-166、WPGB-158、WPGB-025、WPGB-168、WPGB-167およびWPBG-082(和光純薬(株)製)を用いることもできる。 Commercially available photobase generators include WPBG-266, WPBG-300, WPGB-345, WPGB-140, WPBG-165, WPBG-027, PBG-018, WPGB-015, WPBG-041, WPGB-172, WPGB-174, WPBG-166, WPGB-158, WPGB-025, WPGB-168, WPGB-167, and WPBG-082 (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) can also be used.
<<熱酸発生剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物は、熱酸発生剤を含んでいてもよい。熱酸発生剤は、加熱により酸を発生し、ポリイミド前駆体等の環化を促進し硬化膜の機械特性をより向上させる他、ヒドロキシメチル基、アルコキシメチル基またはアシルオキシメチル基を有する化合物、エポキシ化合物、オキセタン化合物およびベンゾオキサジン化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物の架橋反応を促進させる効果がある。
<< thermal acid generator >>
The composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a thermal acid generator. Thermal acid generator generates acid by heating, promotes cyclization of polyimide precursor, etc., and further improves the mechanical properties of the cured film, as well as compounds having a hydroxymethyl group, alkoxymethyl group or acyloxymethyl group, epoxy There is an effect of promoting a crosslinking reaction of at least one compound selected from a compound, an oxetane compound and a benzoxazine compound.
 熱酸発生剤の熱分解開始温度は、50℃~270℃が好ましく、250℃以下がより好ましい。また、組成物を基板に塗布した後の乾燥(プリベーク:約70~140℃)時には酸を発生せず、その後の露光、現像でパターニングした後の最終加熱(キュア:約100~400℃)時に酸を発生するものを選択すると、現像時の感度低下を抑制できるため好ましい。 The thermal decomposition starting temperature of the thermal acid generator is preferably 50 ° C. to 270 ° C., more preferably 250 ° C. or less. In addition, no acid is generated during drying (pre-baking: about 70 to 140 ° C.) after the composition is applied to the substrate, and during final heating (curing: about 100 to 400 ° C.) after patterning by subsequent exposure and development. It is preferable to select one that generates an acid, since a decrease in sensitivity during development can be suppressed.
 熱酸発生剤から発生する酸は強酸が好ましく、例えば、p-トルエンスルホン酸、ベンゼンスルホン酸などのアリールスルホン酸、メタンスルホン酸、エタンスルホン酸、ブタンスルホン酸などのアルキルスルホン酸やトリフルオロメタンスルホン酸などのハロアルキルスルホン酸などが好ましい。このような熱酸発生剤の例としては、特開2013-072935号公報の段落番号0055に記載のものが挙げられる。 The acid generated from the thermal acid generator is preferably a strong acid. For example, arylsulfonic acid such as p-toluenesulfonic acid and benzenesulfonic acid, alkylsulfonic acid such as methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid and butanesulfonic acid, and trifluoromethanesulfone. Haloalkyl sulfonic acids such as acids are preferred. Examples of such a thermal acid generator include those described in paragraph No. 0055 of JP2013-072935A.
 中でも、硬化膜中の残留が少なく硬化膜物性を低下させないという観点から、炭素数1~4のアルキルスルホン酸や炭素数1~4のハロアルキルスルホン酸を発生する熱酸発生剤がより好ましく、メタンスルホン酸(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ジメチルスルホニウム、メタンスルホン酸(4-((メトキシカルボニル)オキシ)フェニル)ジメチルスルホニウム、メタンスルホン酸ベンジル(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メチルスルホニウム、メタンスルホン酸ベンジル(4-((メトキシカルボニル)オキシ)フェニル)メチルスルホニウム、メタンスルホン酸(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メチル((2-メチルフェニル)メチル)スルホニウム、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ジメチルスルホニウム、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸(4-((メトキシカルボニル)オキシ)フェニル)ジメチルスルホニウム、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸ベンジル(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メチルスルホニウム、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸ベンジル(4-((メトキシカルボニル)オキシ)フェニル)メチルスルホニウム、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メチル((2-メチルフェニル)メチル)スルホニウム、3-(5-(((プロピルスルホニル)オキシ)イミノ)チオフェン-2(5H)-イリデン)-2-(o-トリル)プロパンニトリル、2,2-ビス(3-(メタンスルホニルアミノ)-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ヘキサフルオロプロパンが好ましい。 Of these, thermal acid generators that generate alkyl sulfonic acids having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or haloalkyl sulfonic acids having 1 to 4 carbon atoms are more preferred from the viewpoint of little remaining in the cured film and no deterioration in the properties of the cured film. Sulfonic acid (4-hydroxyphenyl) dimethylsulfonium, methanesulfonic acid (4-((methoxycarbonyl) oxy) phenyl) dimethylsulfonium, benzyl methanesulfonate (4-hydroxyphenyl) methylsulfonium, benzyl methanesulfonate (4- ( (Methoxycarbonyl) oxy) phenyl) methylsulfonium, methanesulfonic acid (4-hydroxyphenyl) methyl ((2-methylphenyl) methyl) sulfonium, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid (4-hydroxyphenyl) dimethylsulfonium, trif Oromethanesulfonic acid (4-((methoxycarbonyl) oxy) phenyl) dimethylsulfonium, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid benzyl (4-hydroxyphenyl) methylsulfonium, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid benzyl (4-((methoxycarbonyl) oxy) phenyl) Methylsulfonium, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid (4-hydroxyphenyl) methyl ((2-methylphenyl) methyl) sulfonium, 3- (5-(((propylsulfonyl) oxy) imino) thiophene-2 (5H) -ylidene)- 2- (o-Tolyl) propanenitrile and 2,2-bis (3- (methanesulfonylamino) -4-hydroxyphenyl) hexafluoropropane are preferred.
 また、特開2013-167742号公報の段落番号0059に記載の化合物も熱酸発生剤として好ましい。 Further, the compound described in paragraph No. 0059 of JP2013-167742A is also preferable as the thermal acid generator.
 熱酸発生剤の含有量は、ポリイミド前駆体等100質量部に対して0.01質量部以上が好ましく、0.1質量部以上がより好ましい。0.01質量部以上含有することで、架橋反応およびポリイミド前駆体等の環化が促進されるため、硬化膜の機械特性および耐薬品性をより向上させることができる。また、硬化膜の電気絶縁性の観点から、20質量部以下が好ましく、15質量部以下がより好ましく、10質量部以下がさらに好ましい。
 熱酸発生剤は、1種のみ用いても、2種以上用いてもよい。2種以上用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the thermal acid generator is preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more, more preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor or the like. By containing 0.01 part by mass or more, the cyclization of the crosslinking reaction and the polyimide precursor is promoted, so that the mechanical properties and chemical resistance of the cured film can be further improved. Moreover, from a viewpoint of the electrical insulation of a cured film, 20 mass parts or less are preferable, 15 mass parts or less are more preferable, and 10 mass parts or less are more preferable.
One type of thermal acid generator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When using 2 or more types, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
<<熱重合開始剤>>
 本発明で用いる組成物は、熱重合開始剤(好ましくは熱ラジカル重合開始剤)を含んでいてもよい。熱ラジカル重合開始剤としては、公知の熱ラジカル重合開始剤を用いることができる。
 熱ラジカル重合開始剤は、熱のエネルギーによってラジカルを発生し、重合性化合物の重合反応を開始または促進させる化合物である。熱ラジカル重合開始剤を添加することによって、ポリイミド前駆体等の環化反応を進行させる際に、重合性化合物の重合反応を進行させることができる。また、ポリイミド前駆体等がエチレン性不飽和結合を含む場合は、ポリイミド前駆体等の環化と共に、ポリイミド前駆体等の重合反応を進行させることもできるので、より高耐熱化が達成できることとなる。
 熱ラジカル重合開始剤としては、芳香族ケトン類、オニウム塩化合物、過酸化物、チオ化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、ケトオキシムエステル化合物、ボレート化合物、アジニウム化合物、メタロセン化合物、活性エステル化合物、炭素ハロゲン結合を有する化合物、アゾ系化合物等が挙げられる。中でも、過酸化物またはアゾ系化合物がより好ましく、過酸化物が特に好ましい。
 本発明で用いる熱ラジカル重合開始剤は、10時間半減期温度が90~130℃であることが好ましく、100~120℃であることがより好ましい。
 具体的には、特開2008-63554号公報の段落番号0074~0118に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。
 市販品では、パーブチルZおよびパークミルD(日油(株)製)を好適に用いることができる。
<< Thermal polymerization initiator >>
The composition used in the present invention may contain a thermal polymerization initiator (preferably a thermal radical polymerization initiator). As the thermal radical polymerization initiator, a known thermal radical polymerization initiator can be used.
The thermal radical polymerization initiator is a compound that generates radicals by heat energy and initiates or accelerates the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound. By adding a thermal radical polymerization initiator, the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound can be advanced when the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor or the like is advanced. Moreover, when a polyimide precursor etc. contain an ethylenically unsaturated bond, since polymerization reaction, such as a polyimide precursor, can also be advanced with cyclization of a polyimide precursor etc., higher heat resistance will be achieved. .
Thermal radical polymerization initiators include aromatic ketones, onium salt compounds, peroxides, thio compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, ketoxime ester compounds, borate compounds, azinium compounds, metallocene compounds, active ester compounds, carbon halogens. Examples thereof include a compound having a bond and an azo compound. Among these, a peroxide or an azo compound is more preferable, and a peroxide is particularly preferable.
The thermal radical polymerization initiator used in the present invention preferably has a 10-hour half-life temperature of 90 to 130 ° C, more preferably 100 to 120 ° C.
Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0074 to 0118 of JP-A-2008-63554.
In a commercial item, perbutyl Z and park mill D (made by NOF Corporation) can be used conveniently.
 組成物が熱ラジカル重合開始剤を有する場合、熱ラジカル重合開始剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対し0.1~50質量%が好ましく、0.1~30質量%がより好ましく、0.1~20質量%が特に好ましい。また、重合性化合物100質量部に対し、熱ラジカル重合開始剤を0.1~50質量部含むことが好ましく、0.5~30質量部含むことがより好ましい。この態様によれば、より耐熱性に優れた硬化膜を形成しやすい。
 熱ラジカル重合開始剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。熱ラジカル重合開始剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the composition has a thermal radical polymerization initiator, the content of the thermal radical polymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. 0.1 to 20% by mass is particularly preferable. Further, the thermal radical polymerization initiator is preferably contained in an amount of 0.1 to 50 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.5 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound. According to this aspect, it is easy to form a cured film having more excellent heat resistance.
Only one type of thermal radical polymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more thermal radical polymerization initiators, the total is preferably in the above range.
<<金属接着性改良剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物は、電極や配線などに用いられる金属材料との接着性を向上させるための金属接着性改良剤を含んでいることが好ましい。金属接着性改良剤の例としては、特開2014-186186号公報の段落番号0046~0049や、特開2013-072935号公報の段落番号0032~0043に記載のスルフィド系化合物が挙げられる。また、金属接着性改良剤として、下記化合物(N-[3-(トリエトキシシリル)プロピル]マレイン酸モノアミド)も例示される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 金属接着性改良剤の含有量は、ポリイミド前駆体等100質量部に対して、好ましくは0.1~30質量部であり、より好ましくは0.5~15質量部の範囲である。0.1質量部以上とすることで熱硬化後の膜と金属との接着性が良好となり、30質量部以下とすることで硬化後の膜の耐熱性、機械特性が良好となる。
 金属接着性改良剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。2種以上用いる場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
<< Metal adhesion improver >>
The composition used in the production method of the present invention preferably contains a metal adhesion improver for improving adhesion to a metal material used for electrodes, wirings and the like. Examples of the metal adhesion improver include sulfide compounds described in paragraph numbers 0046 to 0049 of JP-A-2014-186186 and paragraph numbers 0032 to 0043 of JP-A-2013-072935. Examples of the metal adhesion improver include the following compound (N- [3- (triethoxysilyl) propyl] maleic acid monoamide).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
The content of the metal adhesion improving agent is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 15 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor and the like. By setting it as 0.1 mass part or more, the adhesiveness of the film | membrane and metal after thermosetting becomes favorable, and the heat resistance of the film | membrane after hardening and mechanical characteristics become favorable by setting it as 30 mass parts or less.
Only one type of metal adhesion improver may be used, or two or more types may be used. When using 2 or more types, it is preferable that the sum total is the said range.
<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物は、基板との接着性を向上させられる点で、シランカップリング剤を含んでいることが好ましい。シランカップリング剤の例としては、特開2014-191002号公報の段落番号0062~0073に記載の化合物、国際公開WO2011/080992A1号公報の段落番号0063~0071に記載の化合物、特開2014-191252号公報の段落番号0060~0061に記載の化合物、特開2014-41264号公報の段落番号0045~0052に記載の化合物、国際公開WO2014/097594号公報の段落0055に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、特開2011-128358号公報の段落番号0050~0058の記載のように異なる2種以上のシランカップリング剤を用いることも好ましい。
 シランカップリング剤の含有量は、ポリイミド前駆体等100質量部に対して、好ましくは0.1~20質量部であり、より好ましくは1~10質量部の範囲である。0.1質量部以上であると、基板とのより充分な密着性を付与することができ、20質量部以下であると室温保存時において粘度上昇等の問題をより抑制できる。
 シランカップリング剤は、1種のみ用いても、2種以上用いてもよい。2種以上用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< Silane coupling agent >>
The composition used in the production method of the present invention preferably contains a silane coupling agent in terms of improving the adhesion to the substrate. Examples of the silane coupling agent include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0062 to 0073 of JP2014-191002, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0063 to 0071 of international publication WO2011 / 080992A1, and JP2014-191252. And compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0060 to 0061 of JP, No. 2014-41264, compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0045 to 0052 of JP-A-2014-41264, and compounds described in paragraph No. 0055 of WO 2014/097594. It is also preferred to use two or more different silane coupling agents as described in paragraph numbers 0050 to 0058 of JP2011-128358A.
The content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor and the like. When it is 0.1 part by mass or more, sufficient adhesion to the substrate can be imparted, and when it is 20 parts by mass or less, problems such as an increase in viscosity during storage at room temperature can be further suppressed.
Only one type of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When using 2 or more types, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
<<増感色素>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物は、増感色素を含んでも良い。増感色素は、特定の活性放射線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感色素は、アミン発生剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、光重合開始剤などと接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより、アミン発生剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、光重合開始剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、ラジカル、酸、または塩基を生成する。
<< Sensitizing dye >>
The composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a sensitizing dye. A sensitizing dye absorbs specific actinic radiation and enters an electronically excited state. The sensitizing dye in an electronically excited state comes into contact with an amine generator, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator, and the like, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. Thereby, an amine generator, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, and a photopolymerization initiator cause a chemical change and are decomposed to generate radicals, acids, or bases.
 好ましい増感色素の例としては、以下の化合物類に属しており、かつ300nmから450nm領域に極大吸収波長を有するものを挙げることができる。例えば、多核芳香族類(例えば、フェナントレン、アントラセン、ピレン、ペリレン、トリフェニレン、9.10-ジアルコキシアントラセン)、キサンテン類(例えば、フルオレッセイン、エオシン、エリスロシン、ローダミンB、ローズベンガル)、チオキサントン類(例えば、2,4-ジエチルチオキサントン)、シアニン類(例えばチアカルボシアニン、オキサカルボシアニン)、メロシアニン類(例えば、メロシアニン、カルボメロシアニン)、チアジン類(例えば、チオニン、メチレンブルー、トルイジンブルー)、アクリジン類(例えば、アクリジンオレンジ、クロロフラビン、アクリフラビン)、アントラキノン類(例えば、アントラキノン)、スクアリリウム類(例えば、スクアリリウム)、クマリン類(例えば、7-ジエチルアミノ-4-メチルクマリン)、3,3’-カルボニル-ビス(7-ジエチルアミノクマリン)、3-アセチル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-ベンジロキシカルボニル-7-ジメチルアミノクマリン、3-メトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、3-エトキシカルボニル-7-ジエチルアミノクマリン、N-フェニルジエタノールアミン、スチリルベンゼン類、ジスチリルベンゼン類、カルバゾール類などが挙げられる。 Examples of preferable sensitizing dyes include those belonging to the following compounds and having a maximum absorption wavelength in the region of 300 nm to 450 nm. For example, polynuclear aromatics (for example, phenanthrene, anthracene, pyrene, perylene, triphenylene, 9.10-dialkoxyanthracene), xanthenes (for example, fluorescein, eosin, erythrosine, rhodamine B, rose bengal), thioxanthones (For example, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone), cyanines (for example, thiacarbocyanine, oxacarbocyanine), merocyanines (for example, merocyanine, carbomerocyanine), thiazines (for example, thionine, methylene blue, toluidine blue), acridines (Eg, acridine orange, chloroflavin, acriflavine), anthraquinones (eg, anthraquinone), squaryliums (eg, squarylium), coumarins (eg, 7-die) Tilamino-4-methylcoumarin), 3,3′-carbonyl-bis (7-diethylaminocoumarin), 3-acetyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-benzyloxycarbonyl- Examples include 7-dimethylaminocoumarin, 3-methoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin, 3-ethoxycarbonyl-7-diethylaminocoumarin, N-phenyldiethanolamine, styrylbenzenes, distyrylbenzenes, and carbazoles.
 中でも本発明においては、多核芳香族類(例えば、フェナントレン、アントラセン、ピレン、ペリレン、トリフェニレン)、チオキサントン類、ジスチリルベンゼン類、スチリルベンゼン類と組み合わせるのが開始効率の観点で好ましく、アントラセン骨格を有する化合物を使用することがより好ましい。特に好ましい具体的な化合物としては、9,10-ジエトキシアントラセン、9,10-ジブトキシアントラセンなどが挙げられる。 Among them, in the present invention, combination with polynuclear aromatics (for example, phenanthrene, anthracene, pyrene, perylene, triphenylene), thioxanthones, distyrylbenzenes, and styrylbenzenes is preferable from the viewpoint of starting efficiency, and has an anthracene skeleton. More preferably, the compound is used. Particularly preferred specific compounds include 9,10-diethoxyanthracene and 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene.
 組成物が増感色素を含む場合、増感色素の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01~20質量%が好ましく、0.1~15質量%がより好ましく、0.5~10質量%がさらに好ましい。増感色素は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 When the composition contains a sensitizing dye, the content of the sensitizing dye is preferably from 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably from 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition. More preferably, it is 5 to 10% by mass. A sensitizing dye may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
<<連鎖移動剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物は、連鎖移動剤を含有してもよい。連鎖移動剤は、例えば高分子辞典第三版(高分子学会編、2005年)683~684頁に定義されている。連鎖移動剤としては、例えば、分子内にSH、PH、SiH、GeHを有する化合物群が用いられる。これらは、低活性のラジカル種に水素供与して、ラジカルを生成するか、もしくは、酸化された後、脱プロトンすることによりラジカルを生成しうる。特に、チオール化合物(例えば、2-メルカプトベンズイミダゾール類、2-メルカプトベンズチアゾール類、2-メルカプトベンズオキサゾール類、3-メルカプトトリアゾール類、5-メルカプトテトラゾール類等)を好ましく用いることができる。
<< Chain transfer agent >>
The composition used in the production method of the present invention may contain a chain transfer agent. Chain transfer agents are defined, for example, in Polymer Dictionary 3rd Edition (edited by the Society of Polymer Science, 2005) pages 683-684. As the chain transfer agent, for example, a compound group having SH, PH, SiH, GeH in the molecule is used. These can donate hydrogen to low-activity radical species to generate radicals, or can be oxidized and then deprotonated to generate radicals. In particular, thiol compounds (for example, 2-mercaptobenzimidazoles, 2-mercaptobenzthiazoles, 2-mercaptobenzoxazoles, 3-mercaptotriazoles, 5-mercaptotetrazoles, etc.) can be preferably used.
 組成物が連鎖移動剤を有する場合、連鎖移動剤の好ましい含有量は、組成物の全固形分100質量部に対し、好ましくは0.01~20質量部、より好ましくは1~10質量部、特に好ましくは1~5質量部である。
 連鎖移動剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。連鎖移動剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the composition has a chain transfer agent, the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass, with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition. Particularly preferred is 1 to 5 parts by mass.
Only one type of chain transfer agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more chain transfer agents, the total is preferably in the above range.
<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物には、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤を添加してもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。
 特に、フッ素系界面活性剤を含むことで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上することから、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤を含む塗布液を用いて膜形成する場合においては、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力を低下させることにより、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、少量の液量で数μm程度の薄膜を形成した場合であっても、厚さのムラが小さい均一厚の膜形成をより好適に行える点で有効である。
<< Surfactant >>
Various surfactants may be added to the composition used in the production method of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
In particular, by including a fluorosurfactant, liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved, so that the uniformity of coating thickness and liquid-saving properties can be further improved. .
In the case of forming a film using a coating liquid containing a fluorosurfactant, the wettability to the coated surface is improved by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid, and the coated surface The coating property of is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several μm is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness can be more suitably formed.
 フッ素系界面活性剤のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、溶剤溶解性も良好である。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファックF171、同F172、同F173、同F176、同F177、同F141、同F142、同F143、同F144、同R30、同F437、同F475、同F479、同F482、同F554、同F780、同F781(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、同FC431、同FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、同SC-101、同SC-103、同SC-104、同SC-105、同SC1068、同SC-381、同SC-383、同S393、同KH-40(以上、旭硝子(株)製)、PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製)等が挙げられる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としてブロックポリマーを用いることもでき、具体例としては、例えば特開2011-89090号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。
 また、下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、例えば、14,000である。
The fluorine content of the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content in this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and also has good solvent solubility.
Examples of the fluorosurfactant include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, Same SC-103, Same SC-104, Same SC-105, Same SC1068, Same SC-381, Same SC-383, Same S393, Same KH-40 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PF636, PF656, PF6320 PF6520, PF7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA) and the like.
A block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant, and specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-89090.
The following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorosurfactant used in the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
The weight average molecular weight of the above compound is, for example, 14,000.
 ノニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタンならびにそれらのエトキシレートおよびプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセロールエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル(BASF社製のプルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1)、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株))等が挙げられる。また、竹本油脂(株)製のパイオニンD-6112-W、和光純薬工業(株)製の、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002を使用することもできる。 Specific examples of the nonionic surfactant include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R ), Solsperse 20000 (Lubrizol Japan Co., Ltd.), and the like. In addition, Pionein D-6112-W manufactured by Takemoto Yushi Co., Ltd., NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. can also be used.
 カチオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、フタロシアニン誘導体(商品名:EFKA-745、森下産業(株)製)、オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341(信越化学工業(株)製)、(メタ)アクリル酸系(共)重合体ポリフローNo.75、No.90、No.95(共栄社化学(株)製)、W001(裕商(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the cationic surfactant include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 アニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、W004、W005、W017(裕商(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製「トーレシリコーンDC3PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH7PA」、「トーレシリコーンDC11PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH21PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH28PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH29PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH30PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH8400」、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製「TSF-4440」、「TSF-4300」、「TSF-4445」、「TSF-4460」、「TSF-4452」、信越化学工業(株)製「KP341」、「KF6001」、「KF6002」、ビックケミー・ジャパン(株)製「BYK307」、「BYK323」、「BYK330」等が挙げられる。 Examples of the silicone surfactant include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Tore Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd. Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400, Momentive Performance Materials TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF -4552 ”,“ KP341 ”,“ KF6001 ”,“ KF6002 ”manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.,“ BYK307 ”,“ BYK323 ”,“ BYK330 ”manufactured by Big Chemie Japan Co., Ltd., and the like.
 組成物が界面活性剤を有する場合、界面活性剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001~2.0質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.005~1.0質量%である。
 界面活性剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。界面活性剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
When the composition has a surfactant, the surfactant content is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 1.0%, based on the total solid content of the composition. % By mass.
Only one surfactant may be used, or two or more surfactants may be used. When there are two or more surfactants, the total is preferably in the above range.
<<高級脂肪酸誘導体等>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物には、酸素による重合阻害を防止するために、ベヘン酸やベヘン酸アミドのような高級脂肪酸誘導体等を添加して、塗布後の乾燥の過程で組成物の表面に偏在させてもよい。
 組成物が高級脂肪酸誘導体を有する場合、高級脂肪酸誘導体の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~10質量%が好ましい。
 高級脂肪酸誘導体等は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。高級脂肪酸誘導体等が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
<< Higher fatty acid derivatives, etc. >>
In order to prevent polymerization inhibition due to oxygen, a higher fatty acid derivative such as behenic acid or behenic acid amide or the like is added to the composition used in the production method of the present invention, and the composition is dried during coating. The surface may be unevenly distributed.
When the composition has a higher fatty acid derivative, the content of the higher fatty acid derivative is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
Only one type of higher fatty acid derivative or the like may be used. When there are two or more higher fatty acid derivatives, the total is preferably in the above range.
<<溶剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物を塗布によって層状にする場合、溶剤を配合することが好ましい。溶剤は、組成物を層状に形成できれば、公知のものを制限なく使用できる。
 エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、γ-ブチロラクトン、ε-カプロラクトン、δ-バレロラクトン、アルコキシ酢酸アルキル(例えば、アルコキシ酢酸メチル、アルコキシ酢酸エチル、アルコキシ酢酸ブチル(例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-アルコキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、3-アルコキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-アルコキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例えば、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例えば、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-アルコキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例えば、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-アルコキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチルおよび2-アルコキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例えば、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル等、ならびに、エーテル類として、例えば、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート等、ならびに、ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン等、ならびに、芳香族炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン、アニソール、リモネン等、ならびに、スルホキシド類としてジメチルスルホキシドが好適に挙げられる。
<< Solvent >>
When the composition used in the production method of the present invention is layered by coating, it is preferable to blend a solvent. Any known solvent can be used without limitation as long as the composition can be formed into a layer.
Examples of esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, γ-butyrolactone, and ε-caprolactone , Δ-valerolactone, alkyl alkoxyacetate (eg, methyl alkoxyacetate, ethyl alkoxyacetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.)), 3 -Alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (for example, methyl 3-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkoxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, 3-ethoxypropionate) Methyl 2-onoxypropionate), 2-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (for example, methyl 2-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkoxypropionate, propyl 2-alkoxypropionate, etc.) -Methyl methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate and 2-alkoxy -Ethyl 2-methylpropionate (eg, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, Acetoacetic acid Ethyl, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate and the like, and ethers such as diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether Diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, etc., and ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexyl Non, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and the like, and aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene, anisole, limonene and the like, and dimethyl sulfoxide as sulfoxides Are preferable.
 溶剤は、塗布面状の改良などの観点から、2種以上を混合する形態も好ましい。なかでも、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、γ-ブチロラクトン、ジメチルスルホキシド、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、およびプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートから選択される2種以上で構成される混合溶液が好ましい。ジメチルスルホキシドとγ-ブチロラクトンとの併用が特に好ましい。 The solvent is preferably in the form of a mixture of two or more types from the viewpoint of improving the coated surface. Among them, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone A mixed solution composed of two or more selected from dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate is preferable. The combined use of dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-butyrolactone is particularly preferred.
 組成物が溶剤を有する場合、溶剤の含有量は、塗布性の観点から、組成物の全固形分濃度が5~80質量%になる量とすることが好ましく、5~70質量%がより好ましく、10~60質量%が特に好ましい。
 溶剤は1種のみでもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。溶剤が2種以上の場合は、その合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 また、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-エチル-2-ピロリドン、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミドおよびN,N-ジメチルホルムアミドの含有量は、膜強度の観点から、組成物の全質量に対して5質量%未満が好ましく、1質量%未満がより好ましく、0.5質量%未満がさらに好ましく、0.1質量%未満が特に好ましい。
When the composition has a solvent, the content of the solvent is preferably such that the total solid concentration of the composition is 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably 5 to 70% by mass, from the viewpoint of applicability. 10 to 60% by mass is particularly preferable.
One type of solvent may be sufficient and 2 or more types may be sufficient as it. When there are two or more solvents, the total is preferably in the above range.
The contents of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N, N-dimethylacetamide and N, N-dimethylformamide are based on the total mass of the composition from the viewpoint of film strength. It is preferably less than 5% by weight, more preferably less than 1% by weight, even more preferably less than 0.5% by weight, and particularly preferably less than 0.1% by weight.
<<その他の添加剤>>
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物は、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、必要に応じて、各種添加物、例えば、無機粒子、硬化剤、硬化触媒、充填剤、酸化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、凝集防止剤等を配合することができる。これらの添加剤を配合する場合、その合計配合量は組成物の固形分の3質量%以下とすることが好ましい。
<< Other additives >>
The composition used in the production method of the present invention is various additives such as inorganic particles, curing agents, curing catalysts, fillers, antioxidants, ultraviolet rays as necessary, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired. Absorbers, anti-aggregation agents and the like can be blended. When these additives are blended, the total blending amount is preferably 3% by mass or less of the solid content of the composition.
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物の水分含有量は、塗布面状の観点から、5質量%未満が好ましく、1質量%未満がより好ましく、0.6質量%未満が特に好ましい。 The water content of the composition used in the production method of the present invention is preferably less than 5% by mass, more preferably less than 1% by mass, and particularly preferably less than 0.6% by mass from the viewpoint of the coated surface.
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物の金属含有量は、絶縁性の観点から、5質量ppm未満が好ましく、1質量ppm未満がより好ましく、0.5質量ppm未満が特に好ましい。金属としては、ナトリウム、カリウム、マグネシウム、カルシウム、鉄、クロム、ニッケルなどが挙げられる。金属を複数含む場合は、これらの金属の合計が上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 また、組成物に意図せずに含まれる金属不純物を低減する方法としては、組成物を構成する原料として金属含有量が少ない原料を選択する、組成物を構成する原料に対してフィルター濾過を行う、装置内をポリテトラフロロエチレン等でライニングしてコンタミネーションを可能な限り抑制した条件下で蒸留を行う等の方法を挙げることができる。
The metal content of the composition used in the production method of the present invention is preferably less than 5 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 1 ppm by mass, and particularly preferably less than 0.5 ppm by mass from the viewpoint of insulation. Examples of the metal include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, chromium, nickel and the like. When a plurality of metals are included, the total of these metals is preferably in the above range.
In addition, as a method for reducing metal impurities unintentionally contained in the composition, a raw material having a low metal content is selected as a raw material constituting the composition, and filter filtration is performed on the raw material constituting the composition. Examples thereof include a method of performing distillation under a condition in which the inside of the apparatus is lined with polytetrafluoroethylene or the like and contamination is suppressed as much as possible.
 本発明の製造方法に用いられる組成物は、ハロゲン原子の含有量が、配線腐食性の観点から、500質量ppm未満が好ましく、300質量ppm未満がより好ましく、200質量ppm未満が特に好ましい。中でも、ハロゲンイオンの状態で存在するものは、5質量ppm未満が好ましく、1質量ppm未満がより好ましく、0.5質量ppm未満が特に好ましい。ハロゲン原子としては、塩素原子および臭素原子が挙げられる。塩素原子および臭素原子、あるいは塩化物イオンおよび臭化物イオンの合計がそれぞれ上記範囲であることが好ましい。 In the composition used in the production method of the present invention, the halogen atom content is preferably less than 500 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 300 ppm by mass, and particularly preferably less than 200 ppm by mass from the viewpoint of wiring corrosiveness. Especially, what exists in the state of a halogen ion is less than 5 mass ppm, more preferably less than 1 mass ppm, and especially less than 0.5 mass ppm. Examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom and a bromine atom. The total of chlorine atoms and bromine atoms, or chloride ions and bromide ions is preferably in the above range.
半導体デバイスの製造方法
 本発明は、また、上記積層体の製造方法を含む、半導体デバイスの製造方法を開示する。以下に、本発明の積層体の製造方法で得られた積層体を用いた半導体デバイスの一実施形態について説明する。
 図1に示す半導体デバイス100は、いわゆる3次元実装デバイスであり、複数の半導体素子(半導体チップ)101a~101dが積層した半導体素子101が、配線基板120に配置されている。
 なお、この実施形態では、半導体素子(半導体チップ)の積層数が4層である場合を中心に説明するが、半導体素子(半導体チップ)の積層数は特に限定されるものではなく、例えば、2層、8層、16層、32層等であってもよい。また、1層であってもよい。
The manufacturing method of a semiconductor device This invention also discloses the manufacturing method of a semiconductor device containing the manufacturing method of the said laminated body. Below, one Embodiment of the semiconductor device using the laminated body obtained with the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention is described.
A semiconductor device 100 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called three-dimensional mounting device, and a semiconductor element 101 in which a plurality of semiconductor elements (semiconductor chips) 101 a to 101 d are stacked is arranged on a wiring board 120.
In this embodiment, the case where the number of stacked semiconductor elements (semiconductor chips) is four will be mainly described. However, the number of stacked semiconductor elements (semiconductor chips) is not particularly limited. It may be a layer, 8 layers, 16 layers, 32 layers or the like. Moreover, one layer may be sufficient.
 複数の半導体素子101a~101dは、いずれもシリコン基板等の半導体ウェハからなる。
 最上段の半導体素子101aは、貫通電極を有さず、その一方の面に電極パッド(図示せず)が形成されている。
 半導体素子101b~101dは、貫通電極102b~102dを有し、各半導体素子の両面には、貫通電極に一体に設けられた接続パッド(図示せず)が設けられている。
Each of the plurality of semiconductor elements 101a to 101d is made of a semiconductor wafer such as a silicon substrate.
The uppermost semiconductor element 101a does not have a through electrode, and an electrode pad (not shown) is formed on one surface thereof.
The semiconductor elements 101b to 101d have through electrodes 102b to 102d, and connection pads (not shown) provided integrally with the through electrodes are provided on both surfaces of each semiconductor element.
 半導体素子101は、貫通電極を有さない半導体素子101aと、貫通電極102b~102dを有する半導体素子101b~101dとをフリップチップ接続した構造を有している。
 すなわち、貫通電極を有さない半導体素子101aの電極パッドと、これに隣接する貫通電極102bを有する半導体素子101bの半導体素子101a側の接続パッドが、半田バンプ等の金属バンプ103aで接続され、貫通電極102bを有する半導体素子101bの他側の接続パッドが、それに隣接する貫通電極102cを有する半導体素子101cの半導体素子101b側の接続パッドと、半田バンプ等の金属バンプ103bで接続されている。同様に、貫通電極102cを有する半導体素子101cの他側の接続パッドが、それに隣接する貫通電極102dを有する半導体素子101dの半導体素子101c側の接続パッドと、半田バンプ等の金属バンプ103cで接続されている。
The semiconductor element 101 has a structure in which a semiconductor element 101a having no through electrode and semiconductor elements 101b to 101d having through electrodes 102b to 102d are flip-chip connected.
That is, the electrode pad of the semiconductor element 101a having no through electrode and the connection pad on the semiconductor element 101a side of the semiconductor element 101b having the adjacent through electrode 102b are connected by the metal bump 103a such as a solder bump, The connection pad on the other side of the semiconductor element 101b having the electrode 102b is connected to the connection pad on the semiconductor element 101b side of the semiconductor element 101c having the penetrating electrode 102c adjacent thereto by a metal bump 103b such as a solder bump. Similarly, the connection pad on the other side of the semiconductor element 101c having the through electrode 102c is connected to the connection pad on the semiconductor element 101c side of the semiconductor element 101d having the adjacent through electrode 102d by the metal bump 103c such as a solder bump. ing.
 各半導体素子101a~101dの間隙には、アンダーフィル層110が形成されており、各半導体素子101a~101dは、アンダーフィル層110を介して積層している。 An underfill layer 110 is formed in the gaps between the semiconductor elements 101a to 101d, and the semiconductor elements 101a to 101d are stacked via the underfill layer 110.
 半導体素子101は、配線基板120に積層されている。
 配線基板120としては、例えば樹脂基板、セラミックス基板、ガラス基板等の絶縁基板を基材として用いた多層配線基板が使用される。樹脂基板を適用した配線基板120としては、多層銅張積層板(多層プリント配線板)等が挙げられる。
The semiconductor element 101 is stacked on the wiring board 120.
As the wiring substrate 120, for example, a multilayer wiring substrate using an insulating substrate such as a resin substrate, a ceramic substrate, or a glass substrate as a base material is used. Examples of the wiring board 120 to which the resin board is applied include a multilayer copper-clad laminate (multilayer printed wiring board).
 配線基板120の一方の面には、表面電極120aが設けられている。
 配線基板120と半導体素子101との間には、再配線層105が形成された絶縁層115が配置されており、配線基板120と半導体素子101とは、再配線層105を介して電気的に接続されている。絶縁層115は、本発明における露光した感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)である。絶縁層については、詳細を後述する。
 すなわち、再配線層105の一端は、半田バンプ等の金属バンプ103dを介して、半導体素子101dの再配線層105側の面に形成された電極パッドに接続されている。また、再配線層105の他端は、配線基板の表面電極120aと、半田バンプ等の金属バンプ103eを介して接続している。
 そして、絶縁層115と半導体素子101との間には、アンダーフィル層110aが形成されている。また、絶縁層115と配線基板120との間には、アンダーフィル層110bが形成されている。
A surface electrode 120 a is provided on one surface of the wiring board 120.
An insulating layer 115 in which a rewiring layer 105 is formed is disposed between the wiring board 120 and the semiconductor element 101, and the wiring board 120 and the semiconductor element 101 are electrically connected via the rewiring layer 105. It is connected. The insulating layer 115 is the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) in the present invention. Details of the insulating layer will be described later.
That is, one end of the rewiring layer 105 is connected to an electrode pad formed on the surface of the semiconductor element 101d on the rewiring layer 105 side through a metal bump 103d such as a solder bump. The other end of the rewiring layer 105 is connected to the surface electrode 120a of the wiring board via a metal bump 103e such as a solder bump.
An underfill layer 110 a is formed between the insulating layer 115 and the semiconductor element 101. In addition, an underfill layer 110 b is formed between the insulating layer 115 and the wiring substrate 120.
 図2は、本発明の製造方法によって得られる積層体(再配線層)の一例を示したものであって、200は、本発明の方法で得られる積層体を、201は感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)を、203は金属層を示している。図2において、金属層203は斜線で示した層である。感光性樹脂組成物層201は、ネガ型現像によって、所望のパターンが形成されている。金属層203は、上記パターンの表面の一部と覆うように形成され、上記金属層203の表面に、さらに、感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)201が積層される。そして、感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)が絶縁膜として働き、金属層が配線層として働き、上述のような半導体素子に再配線層として組み込まれる。 FIG. 2 shows an example of a laminate (rewiring layer) obtained by the production method of the present invention, wherein 200 is a laminate obtained by the method of the present invention, 201 is a photosensitive resin composition. Reference numeral 203 denotes a layer (resin layer), and reference numeral 203 denotes a metal layer. In FIG. 2, the metal layer 203 is a layer indicated by oblique lines. The photosensitive resin composition layer 201 has a desired pattern formed by negative development. The metal layer 203 is formed so as to cover a part of the surface of the pattern, and a photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) 201 is further laminated on the surface of the metal layer 203. The photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) functions as an insulating film, and the metal layer functions as a wiring layer, and is incorporated as a rewiring layer in the semiconductor element as described above.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。「部」、「%」は特に述べない限り、質量基準である。 The present invention will be described more specifically with reference to the following examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. “Parts” and “%” are based on mass unless otherwise specified.
<合成例1>
[ピロメリト酸二無水物、4,4’-オキシジアニリンおよびベンジルアルコールからのポリイミド前駆体(A-1:ラジカル重合性基を有さないポリイミド前駆体)の合成]
 14.06g(64.5ミリモル)のピロメリト酸二無水物(ピロメリト酸を140℃で12時間乾燥したもの)と、14.22g(131.58ミリモル)のベンジルアルコールを、50mLのN-メチルピロリドンに懸濁させ、モレキュラーシーブで乾燥させた。懸濁液を100℃で3時間加熱した。加熱してから数分後に透明な溶液が得られた。反応混合物を室温に冷却し、21.43g(270.9ミリモル)のピリジンおよび90mLのN-メチルピロリドンを加えた。次いで、反応混合物を-10℃に冷却し、温度を-10±4℃に保ちながら16.12g(135.5ミリモル)のSOClを10分かけて加えた。SOClを加えている間、粘度が増加した。50mLのN-メチルピロリドンで希釈した後、反応混合物を室温で2時間撹拌した。次いで、100mLのN-メチルピロリドンに11.08g(58.7ミリモル)の4,4’-オキシジアニリンを溶解させた溶液を、20~23℃で20分かけて反応混合物に滴加した。次いで、反応混合物を室温で1晩撹拌した。次いで、5リットルの水に加えてポリイミド前駆体を沈殿させ、水-ポリイミド前駆体混合物を5000rpmの速度で15分間撹拌した。ポリイミド前駆体を濾取し、4リットルの水に加えて再度30分間撹拌し、再び濾取した。次いで、得られたポリイミド前駆体(A-1)を減圧下、45℃で3日間乾燥した。
(A-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
<Synthesis Example 1>
[Synthesis of polyimide precursor (A-1: polyimide precursor having no radically polymerizable group) from pyromellitic dianhydride, 4,4′-oxydianiline and benzyl alcohol]
14.06 g (64.5 mmol) of pyromellitic dianhydride (pyromellitic acid dried at 140 ° C. for 12 hours) and 14.22 g (131.58 mmol) of benzyl alcohol were mixed with 50 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone. And dried with molecular sieves. The suspension was heated at 100 ° C. for 3 hours. A few minutes after heating, a clear solution was obtained. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and 21.43 g (270.9 mmol) pyridine and 90 mL N-methylpyrrolidone were added. The reaction mixture was then cooled to −10 ° C. and 16.12 g (135.5 mmol) of SOCl 2 was added over 10 minutes while maintaining the temperature at −10 ± 4 ° C. During the addition of SOCl 2 the viscosity increased. After dilution with 50 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. A solution of 11.08 g (58.7 mmol) of 4,4′-oxydianiline dissolved in 100 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone was then added dropwise to the reaction mixture over 20 minutes at 20-23 ° C. The reaction mixture was then stirred overnight at room temperature. The polyimide precursor was then precipitated in 5 liters of water and the water-polyimide precursor mixture was stirred for 15 minutes at a speed of 5000 rpm. The polyimide precursor was collected by filtration, added to 4 liters of water, stirred again for 30 minutes, and collected again by filtration. Next, the obtained polyimide precursor (A-1) was dried at 45 ° C. under reduced pressure for 3 days.
(A-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
<合成例2>
[ピロメリト酸二無水物、4,4’-オキシジアニリンおよび2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートとからのポリイミド前駆体(A-2:ラジカル重合性基を有するポリイミド前駆体)の合成]
 14.06g(64.5ミリモル)のピロメリト酸二無水物(ピロメリト酸を140℃で12時間乾燥したもの)と、18.6g(129ミリモル)の2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートと、0.05gのハイドロキノンと、10.7gのピリジンと、140gのダイグライム(ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル)とを混合し、60℃の温度で18時間撹拌して、ピロメリト酸と2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートのジエステルを製造した。次いで、得られたジエステルをSOClにより塩素化した後、合成例1と同様の方法で4,4’-オキシジアニリンでポリイミド前駆体に変換し、合成例1と同様の方法でポリイミド前駆体(A-2)を得た。
(A-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
<Synthesis Example 2>
[Synthesis of polyimide precursor (A-2: polyimide precursor having a radical polymerizable group) from pyromellitic dianhydride, 4,4′-oxydianiline and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate]
14.06 g (64.5 mmol) pyromellitic dianhydride (pyromellitic acid dried at 140 ° C. for 12 hours), 18.6 g (129 mmol) 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 0.05 g hydroquinone And 10.7 g of pyridine and 140 g of diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether) were mixed and stirred at a temperature of 60 ° C. for 18 hours to produce a diester of pyromellitic acid and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. Next, the obtained diester was chlorinated with SOCl 2 and then converted into a polyimide precursor with 4,4′-oxydianiline in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1, and the polyimide precursor in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1. (A-2) was obtained.
(A-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
<合成例3>
[4,4’-オキシジフタル酸無水物、4,4’-オキシジアニリンおよび2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートとからのポリイミド前駆体(A-3:ラジカル重合性基を有するポリイミド前駆体)の合成]
 20.0g(64.5ミリモル)の4,4’-オキシジフタル酸無水物(4,4’-オキシジフタル酸を140℃で12時間乾燥したもの)と、18.6g(129ミリモル)の2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートと、0.05gのハイドロキノンと、10.7gのピリジンと、140gのダイグライムとを混合し、60℃の温度で18時間撹拌して、4,4’-オキシジフタル酸と2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートのジエステルを製造した。次いで、得られたジエステルをSOClにより塩素化した後、合成例1と同様の方法で4,4’-オキシジアニリンでポリイミド前駆体に変換し、合成例1と同様の方法でポリイミド前駆体(A-3)を得た。
(A-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
<Synthesis Example 3>
[Synthesis of polyimide precursor (A-3: polyimide precursor having radical polymerizable group) from 4,4′-oxydiphthalic anhydride, 4,4′-oxydianiline and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate]
20.0 g (64.5 mmol) of 4,4′-oxydiphthalic anhydride (4,4′-oxydiphthalic acid dried at 140 ° C. for 12 hours) and 18.6 g (129 mmol) of 2-hydroxy Ethyl methacrylate, 0.05 g of hydroquinone, 10.7 g of pyridine, and 140 g of diglyme are mixed and stirred at a temperature of 60 ° C. for 18 hours to give 4,4′-oxydiphthalic acid and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. The diester was prepared. Next, the obtained diester was chlorinated with SOCl 2 and then converted into a polyimide precursor with 4,4′-oxydianiline in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1, and the polyimide precursor in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1. (A-3) was obtained.
(A-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
<合成例4>
[4,4’-オキシジフタル酸無水物、および4,4’-オキシジアニリンとからのポリイミド前駆体(A-4:カルボキシル基を有するポリイミド前駆体)の合成]
 20.0g(64.5ミリモル)の4,4’-オキシジフタル酸無水物(4,4’-オキシジフタル酸を140℃で12時間乾燥したもの)を180mLのNMP(N-メチル-2-ピロリドン)に溶解させて、さらに21.43g(270.9ミリモル)のピリジンを加えて、反応液を-10℃に冷却し、温度を-10±4℃に保ちながら、11.08g(58.7ミリモル)の4,4’-オキシジアニリンをNMP100mLに溶解させた溶解液を30分かけて滴加し、次いで反応混合液を室温で1晩撹拌した。次いで、5リットルの水に加えてポリイミド前駆体を沈殿させ、水-ポリイミド前駆体混合物を5000rpmの速度で15分間撹拌した。ポリイミド前駆体を濾取し、4リットルの水に加えて再度30分間撹拌し再び濾取した。次いで、得られたポリイミド前駆体(A-4)を減圧下、45℃で3日間乾燥した。
(A-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
<Synthesis Example 4>
[Synthesis of polyimide precursor (A-4: polyimide precursor having carboxyl group) from 4,4′-oxydiphthalic anhydride and 4,4′-oxydianiline]
20.0 g (64.5 mmol) of 4,4′-oxydiphthalic anhydride (4,4′-oxydiphthalic acid dried at 140 ° C. for 12 hours) in 180 mL of NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone) In addition, 21.43 g (270.9 mmol) of pyridine was added, and the reaction solution was cooled to −10 ° C., while maintaining the temperature at −10 ± 4 ° C., 11.08 g (58.7 mmol). 4) '4,4'-oxydianiline dissolved in 100 mL of NMP was added dropwise over 30 minutes, and then the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The polyimide precursor was then precipitated in 5 liters of water and the water-polyimide precursor mixture was stirred for 15 minutes at a speed of 5000 rpm. The polyimide precursor was collected by filtration, added to 4 liters of water, stirred again for 30 minutes, and collected again by filtration. Next, the obtained polyimide precursor (A-4) was dried at 45 ° C. under reduced pressure for 3 days.
(A-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
<合成例5>
[ピロメリト酸二無水物、m-トリジンおよび2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートとからのポリイミド前駆体(A-5:ラジカル重合性基を有するポリイミド前駆体)の合成]
 14.06g(64.5ミリモル)のピロメリト酸二無水物(ピロメリト酸を140℃で12時間乾燥したもの)と、18.6g(129ミリモル)の2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートと、0.05gのハイドロキノンと、10.7gのピリジンと、140gのNMP(N-メチルー2-ピロリドン)とを混合し、60℃の温度で18時間撹拌して、ピロメリト酸と2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートのジエステルを製造した。次いで、反応混合物を-10℃に冷却し、温度を-10±4℃に保ちながら16.12g(135.5ミリモル)のSOClを10分かけて加えた。50mLのN-メチルピロリドンで希釈した後、反応混合物を室温で2時間撹拌した。次いで、100mLのN-メチルピロリドンに12.46g(58.7ミリモル)のm-トリジンを溶解させた溶液を、20~23℃で20分かけて反応混合物に滴加した。次いで、反応混合物を室温で1晩撹拌した。次いで、5リットルの水に加えてポリイミド前駆体を沈殿させ、水-ポリイミド前駆体混合物を5000rpmの速度で15分間撹拌した。ポリイミド前駆体を濾取し、4リットルの水に加えて再度30分間撹拌し再び濾取した。次いで、得られたポリイミド前駆体を減圧下、45℃で3日間乾燥し、ポリイミド前駆体(A-5)を得た。
(A-5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
<Synthesis Example 5>
[Synthesis of polyimide precursor (A-5: polyimide precursor having radical polymerizable group) from pyromellitic dianhydride, m-tolidine and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate]
14.06 g (64.5 mmol) pyromellitic dianhydride (pyromellitic acid dried at 140 ° C. for 12 hours), 18.6 g (129 mmol) 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 0.05 g hydroquinone 10.7 g of pyridine and 140 g of NMP (N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone) were mixed and stirred at a temperature of 60 ° C. for 18 hours to produce a diester of pyromellitic acid and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. The reaction mixture was then cooled to −10 ° C. and 16.12 g (135.5 mmol) of SOCl 2 was added over 10 minutes while maintaining the temperature at −10 ± 4 ° C. After dilution with 50 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. A solution of 12.46 g (58.7 mmol) of m-tolidine in 100 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone was then added dropwise to the reaction mixture at 20-23 ° C. over 20 minutes. The reaction mixture was then stirred overnight at room temperature. The polyimide precursor was then precipitated in 5 liters of water and the water-polyimide precursor mixture was stirred for 15 minutes at a speed of 5000 rpm. The polyimide precursor was collected by filtration, added to 4 liters of water, stirred again for 30 minutes, and collected again by filtration. Next, the obtained polyimide precursor was dried at 45 ° C. under reduced pressure for 3 days to obtain a polyimide precursor (A-5).
(A-5)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
<合成例6>
[比較例用ポリマー(RA-1)の合成]
 27.0g(153.2ミリモル)のベンジルメタクリレート、20g(157.3ミリモル)のN-イソプロピルメタクリルアミド、39g(309.2ミリモル)のメタクリル酸アリル、13g(151.0ミリモル)のメタクリル酸、重合開始剤(V-601、和光純薬工業(株)製)3.55g(15.4ミリモル)、および3-メトキシ-2-プロパノール 300gを混合した。混合液を、窒素雰囲気下、75℃に加熱した、3-メトキシ-2-プロパノール300gの中に、2時間掛けて滴加した。滴加終了後、さらに窒素雰囲気下、75℃で2時間撹拌した。反応終了後、5リットルの水に加ええて、ポリマーを沈殿させて、5000rpmの速度で15分間撹拌した。アクリル樹脂を濾取し、4リットルの水に加えて再度30分間撹拌し再び濾取した。次いで、得られたアクリル樹脂(RA-1)を減圧下、45℃で3日間乾燥した。下記化学式(RA-1)における数値は、原料モノマーの質量比である。
(RA-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
<Synthesis Example 6>
[Synthesis of Comparative Polymer (RA-1)]
27.0 g (153.2 mmol) benzyl methacrylate, 20 g (157.3 mmol) N-isopropylmethacrylamide, 39 g (309.2 mmol) allyl methacrylate, 13 g (151.0 mmol) methacrylic acid, A polymerization initiator (V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (3.55 g, 15.4 mmol) and 3-methoxy-2-propanol (300 g) were mixed. The mixture was added dropwise over 2 hours into 300 g of 3-methoxy-2-propanol heated to 75 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. After completion of the dropwise addition, the mixture was further stirred at 75 ° C. for 2 hours under a nitrogen atmosphere. After completion of the reaction, the polymer was precipitated in addition to 5 liters of water and stirred for 15 minutes at a speed of 5000 rpm. The acrylic resin was collected by filtration, added to 4 liters of water, stirred again for 30 minutes, and collected again by filtration. Next, the obtained acrylic resin (RA-1) was dried at 45 ° C. under reduced pressure for 3 days. The numerical value in the following chemical formula (RA-1) is the mass ratio of the raw material monomers.
(RA-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
<実施例および比較例>
 下記記載の成分を混合し、均一な溶液として、感光性樹脂組成物の塗布液を調製した。
<<感光性樹脂組成物の組成>>
 (A)樹脂:表1に記載の質量部
 (B)重合性化合物:表1に記載の質量部
 (C)光重合開始剤:表1に記載の質量部
 (D)重合禁止剤:表1に記載の質量部
 γ-ブチロラクトン:60.00質量部
<Examples and Comparative Examples>
The following components were mixed to prepare a photosensitive resin composition coating solution as a uniform solution.
<< Composition of photosensitive resin composition >>
(A) Resin: part by mass described in Table 1 (B) polymerizable compound: part by mass described in Table 1 (C) photopolymerization initiator: part by mass described in Table 1 (D) polymerization inhibitor: Table 1 Parts by weight γ-butyrolactone: 60.00 parts by weight
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000056
 表1に記載した略称は以下の通りである。
(A)樹脂
合成例1~5で合成した樹脂
A-6:Matrimide5218(HUNTSMAN(株)製、ポリイミド)
比較例用ポリマー(RA-2):ポリメタクリル酸メチル(Mw:15,000、シグマアルドリッチジャパン社製)
Abbreviations described in Table 1 are as follows.
(A) Resin A-6 synthesized in Resin Synthesis Examples 1 to 5: Matrimide 5218 (manufactured by HUNTSMAN Co., Ltd., polyimide)
Polymer for Comparative Example (RA-2): Polymethyl methacrylate (Mw: 15,000, manufactured by Sigma-Aldrich Japan)
(B)重合性化合物
B-1:SR209(サートマー・ジャパン(株)製、2官能メタクリレート、下記構造)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
B-2: NKエステル A-9300 (新中村化学工業社製、3官能アクリレート、下記構造)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
(B) Polymerizable compound B-1: SR209 (bifunctional methacrylate, manufactured by Sartomer Japan, Inc., the following structure)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
B-2: NK ester A-9300 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., trifunctional acrylate, the following structure)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
(C)光重合開始剤
C-1:IRGACURE OXE-01(BASF社製)
C-2:IRGACURE-784(BASF社製)
(C) Photopolymerization initiator C-1: IRGACURE OXE-01 (manufactured by BASF)
C-2: IRGACURE-784 (BASF)
(D)重合禁止剤
D-1:2,6-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール(東京化成工業(株)製)
D-2:p-ベンゾキノン(東京化成工業(株)製)
(D) Polymerization inhibitor D-1: 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
D-2: p-benzoquinone (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
 各感光性樹脂組成物を、細孔の幅が0.8μmのフィルターを通して加圧濾過した後、シリコンウェハ上にスピンコート法により、感光性樹脂組成物層を形成した。得られた感光性樹脂組成物層を適用したシリコンウェハをホットプレート上で、100℃で5分間乾燥し、シリコンウェハ上に後述の表に記載の厚さの均一な感光性樹脂組成物層とした。シリコンウェハ上の感光性樹脂組成物層を、ステッパー(Nikon NSR 2005 i9C)を用いて、波長365nmで、500mJ/cmの露光エネルギーで露光し、露光した感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)を、シクロペンタノンで60秒間を現像して、直径10μmのホールを形成した。次いで、窒素雰囲気下で、室温から10℃/分の昇温速度で昇温し、250℃(最高加熱温度)に達した後、3時間加熱した。室温まで冷却後、蒸着法により、感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)の表面の一部に厚さ5μmの金属層(銅層)を形成して、積層体1を形成した。
 積層体1の金属層(銅層)および樹脂層の表面に、後述の表に記載のガス種のプラズマを照射した後、再度、上記と同様の感光性樹脂組成物を用いて、感光性樹脂組成物層の形成、露光、現像および加熱を繰り返して、積層体2を得た。
 積層体2の表面に、さらに、上記と同様に蒸着法により金属層(銅層)を形成し、再び、後述の表に記載のガス種のプラズマを照射した後、再度、上記と同様の感光性樹脂組成物を用いて、感光性樹脂組成物層の形成、露光、現像および加熱を繰り返して、積層体3を得た。
 また、実施例27~30では、上述したプラズマに変わり、コロナ放電処理を行い積層体2を作製した。
Each photosensitive resin composition was filtered under pressure through a filter having a pore width of 0.8 μm, and then a photosensitive resin composition layer was formed on a silicon wafer by spin coating. The silicon wafer to which the obtained photosensitive resin composition layer was applied was dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 5 minutes, and the photosensitive resin composition layer having a uniform thickness described in the table below was formed on the silicon wafer. did. The photosensitive resin composition layer on the silicon wafer was exposed using a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) with an exposure energy of 500 mJ / cm 2 at a wavelength of 365 nm, and the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer). Was developed with cyclopentanone for 60 seconds to form a 10 μm diameter hole. Next, the temperature was raised from room temperature at a rate of 10 ° C./min in a nitrogen atmosphere, and after reaching 250 ° C. (maximum heating temperature), heating was performed for 3 hours. After cooling to room temperature, a metal layer (copper layer) having a thickness of 5 μm was formed on a part of the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer) by vapor deposition to form a laminate 1.
After irradiating the surface of the metal layer (copper layer) and the resin layer of the laminate 1 with the plasma of the gas species described in the table below, the photosensitive resin composition is again used to form a photosensitive resin. Formation of the composition layer, exposure, development and heating were repeated to obtain a laminate 2.
Further, a metal layer (copper layer) is formed on the surface of the laminate 2 by vapor deposition in the same manner as described above, and again irradiated with plasma of the gas species shown in the table below, and then the same photosensitivity as described above. The laminate 3 was obtained by repeating the formation, exposure, development and heating of the photosensitive resin composition layer using the photosensitive resin composition.
In Examples 27 to 30, instead of the above-described plasma, a laminate 2 was produced by performing corona discharge treatment.
<評価>
<<剥離欠陥評価>>
(加熱処理なし)
 上記で得られた各積層体2および3を、樹脂層面に対し、垂直方向に幅5mmとなるように、かつ、樹脂層と樹脂層が接している部分と、金属層と樹脂層が接している部分を、それぞれ、切り出し、その断面を観察して、1つの切り出し片における、樹脂層/樹脂層間、および金属層/樹脂層間での剥がれの有無を光学顕微鏡で確認した。剥がれの発生がなければ、優れた接着性を有していることを表し、好ましい結果となる。
A:剥がれの発生なし
B:剥がれの発生が1~2個
C:剥がれの発生が3~5個
D:剥がれの発生が6個以上
(加熱処理あり)
 上記で得られた積層体2および3を、窒素中300℃で3時間加熱した。その後、各積層体を、樹脂層面に対し、垂直方向に幅5mmとなるように、かつ、樹脂層と樹脂層が接している部分と、金属層と樹脂層が接している部分を、それぞれ、切り出し、その断面を観察して、1つの切り出し片における、樹脂層/樹脂層間、および金属層/樹脂層間での剥がれの有無を光学顕微鏡で確認した。剥がれの発生がなければ、優れた接着性を有していることを表し、好ましい結果となる。
A:剥がれの発生なし
B:剥がれの発生が1~2個
C:剥がれの発生が3~5個
D:剥がれの発生が6個以上
<Evaluation>
<< Evaluation of peeling defects >>
(No heat treatment)
Each of the laminates 2 and 3 obtained as described above has a width of 5 mm in the vertical direction with respect to the resin layer surface, and a portion where the resin layer and the resin layer are in contact with each other; Each portion was cut out and the cross section thereof was observed, and the presence or absence of peeling between the resin layer / resin layer and the metal layer / resin layer in one cut piece was confirmed with an optical microscope. If peeling does not occur, it means that the film has excellent adhesiveness, which is a preferable result.
A: No occurrence of peeling B: 1-2 occurrences of peeling C: 3-5 occurrences of peeling D: 6 or more occurrences of peeling (with heat treatment)
Laminates 2 and 3 obtained above were heated in nitrogen at 300 ° C. for 3 hours. Thereafter, each laminated body has a width of 5 mm in the vertical direction with respect to the resin layer surface, and a portion where the resin layer and the resin layer are in contact with each other, and a portion where the metal layer and the resin layer are in contact with each other, It cut out and the cross section was observed and the presence or absence of peeling between the resin layer / resin layer and the metal layer / resin layer in one cut piece was confirmed with an optical microscope. If peeling does not occur, it means that the film has excellent adhesiveness, which is a preferable result.
A: No peeling occurred B: 1 to 2 peeling occurrences C: 3 to 5 peeling occurrences D: 6 or more peeling occurrences
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000063
 上記結果から明らかなとおり、本発明の製造方法で得られた積層体は、樹脂層と樹脂層の間の密着性および金属層と樹脂層の密着性のいずれにも優れていた。一方、樹脂として、ポリイミド前駆体等以外の樹脂を用いた場合(比較例1、2、7および8)、樹脂層と樹脂層の間の密着性および金属層と樹脂層の密着性が劣っていた。また、表面活性化処理を行わない場合、樹脂層と樹脂層および金属層と樹脂層の密着性の両方または一方が劣っていた(比較例3~6、9~12)。 As is clear from the above results, the laminate obtained by the production method of the present invention was excellent in both the adhesion between the resin layer and the resin layer and the adhesion between the metal layer and the resin layer. On the other hand, when a resin other than a polyimide precursor or the like is used as the resin (Comparative Examples 1, 2, 7, and 8), the adhesion between the resin layer and the resin layer and the adhesion between the metal layer and the resin layer are inferior. It was. Further, when the surface activation treatment was not performed, both or one of the adhesion between the resin layer and the resin layer and between the metal layer and the resin layer was inferior (Comparative Examples 3 to 6, 9 to 12).
 実施例2および実施例9の樹脂層の厚さを、それぞれ、10μm、20μm、30μmに変更した以外は同様にして積層体を形成し評価した結果、実施例2および9と同様に良好な結果であることを確認できた。 As a result of forming and evaluating a laminate in the same manner except that the thicknesses of the resin layers of Example 2 and Example 9 were changed to 10 μm, 20 μm, and 30 μm, respectively, good results were obtained as in Examples 2 and 9. It was confirmed that.
 実施例18において、2層目の樹脂層を、感光性樹脂組成物2を用いて形成し、他は同様に行ったところ、実施例18と同等の優れた効果が得られた。
 実施例18において、金属層(銅薄膜)をアルミニウム薄膜に変更し、他は同様に行ったところ、実施例18と同様に良好な結果であった。
In Example 18, when the second resin layer was formed using the photosensitive resin composition 2 and the others were performed in the same manner, the same excellent effect as in Example 18 was obtained.
In Example 18, the metal layer (copper thin film) was changed to an aluminum thin film and the others were performed in the same manner. As a result, the results were as good as in Example 18.
100:半導体デバイス
101a~101d:半導体素子
101:積層体
102b~10d:貫通電極
103a~103e:金属バンプ
105:再配線層
110、110a、110b:アンダーフィル層
115:絶縁層
120:配線基板
120a:表面電極
200:積層体
201:感光性樹脂組成物層(樹脂層)
203:金属層
100: Semiconductor devices 101a to 101d: Semiconductor element 101: Stacked bodies 102b to 10d: Through electrodes 103a to 103e: Metal bump 105: Rewiring layers 110, 110a, 110b: Underfill layer 115: Insulating layer 120: Wiring substrate 120a: Surface electrode 200: Laminate 201: Photosensitive resin composition layer (resin layer)
203: Metal layer

Claims (8)

  1. 感光性樹脂組成物を基板に適用して層状にする、感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程と、
    前記感光性樹脂組成物層を露光する露光工程と、
    前記露光された感光性樹脂組成物層に対して、ネガ型現像処理を行う現像処理工程と、
    前記現像処理後の感光性樹脂組成物層の表面に金属層を形成する金属層形成工程と、
    前記金属層及び感光性樹脂組成物層の少なくとも一部を表面活性化処理する表面活性化処理工程を含み、
    さらに、再度、前記感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程、前記露光工程、および、前記現像処理工程を、前記順に行うことを含み、
    前記感光性樹脂組成物が、ポリイミド前駆体、ポリイミド、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体およびポリベンゾオキサゾールから選択される樹脂を含み、
    さらに、前記樹脂が重合性基を含むこと、および、前記感光性樹脂組成物が重合性化合物を含むことの少なくとも一方を満たす、積層体の製造方法。
    Applying a photosensitive resin composition to a substrate to form a layer, and forming a photosensitive resin composition layer; and
    An exposure step of exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer;
    A development processing step of performing a negative development processing on the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer;
    A metal layer forming step of forming a metal layer on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the development treatment;
    A surface activation treatment step of performing a surface activation treatment on at least a part of the metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer,
    Furthermore, the photosensitive resin composition layer forming step, the exposure step, and the development processing step are performed again in the order described above.
    The photosensitive resin composition includes a resin selected from a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a polybenzoxazole,
    Furthermore, the manufacturing method of a laminated body which satisfy | fills at least one of the said resin containing a polymeric group and the said photosensitive resin composition containing a polymeric compound.
  2. 前記感光性樹脂組成物層形成工程、前記露光工程、および、前記現像処理工程を、前記順に、3~7回行う、請求項1に記載の積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate according to claim 1, wherein the photosensitive resin composition layer forming step, the exposure step, and the development processing step are performed 3 to 7 times in the order.
  3. 前記金属層が銅を含む、請求項1または2に記載の積層体の製造方法。 The manufacturing method of the laminated body of Claim 1 or 2 with which the said metal layer contains copper.
  4. 前記樹脂がポリイミド前駆体またはポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the resin is a polyimide precursor or a polybenzoxazole precursor.
  5. 前記樹脂が、-Ar-L-Ar-で表される部分構造を含む、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の積層体の製造方法;但し、Arは、それぞれ独立に、芳香族基であり、Lは、フッ素原子で置換されていてもよい炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2-または-NHCO-、ならびに、前記の2つ以上の組み合わせからなる基である。 The method for producing a laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the resin contains a partial structure represented by -Ar-L-Ar-; wherein Ar is independently aromatic And L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a fluorine atom, —O—, —CO—, —S—, —SO 2 — or —NHCO—, and , A group consisting of a combination of two or more of the above.
  6. 前記表面活性化処理が、プラズマ処理およびコロナ放電処理から選択される、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the surface activation treatment is selected from plasma treatment and corona discharge treatment.
  7. 前記感光性樹脂組成物が、光重合開始剤を含む、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の積層体の製造方法。 The method for producing a laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the photosensitive resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  8. 請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の積層体の製造方法を含む、半導体デバイスの製造方法。 A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device, comprising the method for manufacturing a laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
PCT/JP2017/006846 2016-02-26 2017-02-23 Method for manufacturing laminate and method for manufacturing semiconductor device WO2017146153A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018501763A JPWO2017146153A1 (en) 2016-02-26 2017-02-23 LAMINATE MANUFACTURING METHOD AND SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE MANUFACTURING METHOD
KR1020187023985A KR102187512B1 (en) 2016-02-26 2017-02-23 Method for manufacturing a laminate and method for manufacturing a semiconductor device
CN201780012588.4A CN108700836B (en) 2016-02-26 2017-02-23 Method for manufacturing laminate and method for manufacturing semiconductor device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016035251 2016-02-26
JP2016-035251 2016-02-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017146153A1 true WO2017146153A1 (en) 2017-08-31

Family

ID=59686181

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2017/006846 WO2017146153A1 (en) 2016-02-26 2017-02-23 Method for manufacturing laminate and method for manufacturing semiconductor device

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (2) JPWO2017146153A1 (en)
KR (1) KR102187512B1 (en)
CN (1) CN108700836B (en)
TW (2) TW201741772A (en)
WO (1) WO2017146153A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019146778A1 (en) * 2018-01-29 2019-08-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate body, method for producing cured film, method for producing laminate body, and semiconductor device
WO2022064917A1 (en) * 2020-09-25 2022-03-31 富士フイルム株式会社 Cured product production method, laminate production method, and semiconductor device production method

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW202112837A (en) 2019-09-26 2021-04-01 日商富士軟片股份有限公司 Heat-conducting layer production method, laminate production method, and semiconductor device production method
CN115243814A (en) 2020-05-26 2022-10-25 住友电气工业株式会社 Cutting tool

Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS57208158A (en) * 1981-06-17 1982-12-21 Hitachi Ltd Manufacture of multilayer wiring structure
JPS60121740A (en) * 1984-02-20 1985-06-29 Hitachi Ltd Multilayered wiring structure
JPH05214046A (en) * 1992-02-06 1993-08-24 Hitachi Ltd Wiring structure
JPH06181264A (en) * 1992-12-14 1994-06-28 Hitachi Ltd Interconnection structure and manufacturing method
JP2001064416A (en) * 1999-08-31 2001-03-13 Nippon Zeon Co Ltd Polyimide film and its production
JP2001154365A (en) * 1999-11-30 2001-06-08 Hitachi Chemical Dupont Microsystems Ltd Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing pattern and electronic parts
JP2002217377A (en) * 2001-01-18 2002-08-02 Hitachi Ltd Semiconductor integrated circuit device and method of manufacturing the same
US20070037406A1 (en) * 2005-08-09 2007-02-15 Joo-Sung Park Methods of fabricating a semiconductor device using a photosensitive polyimide layer and semiconductor devices fabricated thereby
WO2008102890A1 (en) * 2007-02-19 2008-08-28 Sumitomo Bakelite Co., Ltd. Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, protective film, insulating film and semiconductor device using the same, and display device
WO2012169334A1 (en) * 2011-06-10 2012-12-13 三菱瓦斯化学株式会社 Reactive polyamide resin and polyamide resin composition

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060048963A1 (en) 2002-12-05 2006-03-09 Masaru Nishinaka Laminate, printed circuit board, and preparing method thereof
WO2006109655A1 (en) * 2005-04-08 2006-10-19 Mitsui Chemicals, Inc. Polyimide film, polyimide metal laminate using same, and method for manufacturing same
WO2008123583A1 (en) * 2007-04-04 2008-10-16 Asahi Kasei Emd Corporation Photosensitive polyamic acid ester composition
JP6167017B2 (en) * 2013-10-31 2017-07-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Laminate, organic semiconductor manufacturing kit and organic semiconductor manufacturing resist composition
JP2015151405A (en) * 2014-02-10 2015-08-24 日立化成デュポンマイクロシステムズ株式会社 Resin composition containing polyimide precursor, manufacturing method of cured membrane and electronic component
CN106414071B (en) * 2014-07-18 2018-07-13 日立化成株式会社 Stacked film

Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS57208158A (en) * 1981-06-17 1982-12-21 Hitachi Ltd Manufacture of multilayer wiring structure
JPS60121740A (en) * 1984-02-20 1985-06-29 Hitachi Ltd Multilayered wiring structure
JPH05214046A (en) * 1992-02-06 1993-08-24 Hitachi Ltd Wiring structure
JPH06181264A (en) * 1992-12-14 1994-06-28 Hitachi Ltd Interconnection structure and manufacturing method
JP2001064416A (en) * 1999-08-31 2001-03-13 Nippon Zeon Co Ltd Polyimide film and its production
JP2001154365A (en) * 1999-11-30 2001-06-08 Hitachi Chemical Dupont Microsystems Ltd Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing pattern and electronic parts
JP2002217377A (en) * 2001-01-18 2002-08-02 Hitachi Ltd Semiconductor integrated circuit device and method of manufacturing the same
US20070037406A1 (en) * 2005-08-09 2007-02-15 Joo-Sung Park Methods of fabricating a semiconductor device using a photosensitive polyimide layer and semiconductor devices fabricated thereby
WO2008102890A1 (en) * 2007-02-19 2008-08-28 Sumitomo Bakelite Co., Ltd. Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, protective film, insulating film and semiconductor device using the same, and display device
WO2012169334A1 (en) * 2011-06-10 2012-12-13 三菱瓦斯化学株式会社 Reactive polyamide resin and polyamide resin composition

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019146778A1 (en) * 2018-01-29 2019-08-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate body, method for producing cured film, method for producing laminate body, and semiconductor device
JPWO2019146778A1 (en) * 2018-01-29 2021-03-18 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, method for manufacturing cured film, method for manufacturing laminate, semiconductor device
JP7065120B2 (en) 2018-01-29 2022-05-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, method for manufacturing cured film, method for manufacturing laminate, semiconductor device
WO2022064917A1 (en) * 2020-09-25 2022-03-31 富士フイルム株式会社 Cured product production method, laminate production method, and semiconductor device production method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN108700836A (en) 2018-10-23
KR102187512B1 (en) 2020-12-08
CN108700836B (en) 2022-06-28
TW202115498A (en) 2021-04-16
TW201741772A (en) 2017-12-01
JPWO2017146153A1 (en) 2019-01-17
KR20180104069A (en) 2018-09-19
JP6901596B2 (en) 2021-07-14
JP2020091490A (en) 2020-06-11
TWI767436B (en) 2022-06-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6247432B1 (en) LAMINATE, LAMINATE MANUFACTURING METHOD, SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE, AND SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE MANUFACTURING METHOD
JP6257870B2 (en) Resin, composition, cured film, method for producing cured film, and semiconductor device
JP6681888B2 (en) Polyimide precursor composition, photosensitive resin composition, cured film, method for producing cured film, semiconductor device and method for producing polyimide precursor composition
JP6255096B2 (en) Thermal base generator, thermosetting resin composition, cured film, method for producing cured film, and semiconductor device
JP6167089B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, method for producing cured film, and semiconductor device
JP6606186B2 (en) Composition, cured film, method for producing cured film, method for producing semiconductor device, and semiconductor device
JP6481032B2 (en) Negative photosensitive resin composition, cured film, method for producing cured film, and semiconductor device
JP6616844B2 (en) Method for producing heterocycle-containing polymer precursor, heterocycle-containing polymer precursor, and application thereof
JP6650517B2 (en) Method for producing cured film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing semiconductor element
JP6901596B2 (en) Manufacturing method of laminate and manufacturing method of semiconductor device
WO2017038598A1 (en) Method for manufacturing cured film, method for manufacturing interlayer insulating film for rewiring layer, and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
WO2017209176A1 (en) Laminate production method, semiconductor element production method, and laminate
JP6704048B2 (en) Negative-type photosensitive resin composition, cured film, cured film manufacturing method, semiconductor device, laminated body manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and polyimide precursor
JP6751159B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, method for producing cured film, method for producing laminate, and semiconductor device
WO2017209178A1 (en) Pattern production method, semiconductor device production method, and laminate
JP6522756B2 (en) Negative photosensitive resin composition, cured film, method of producing cured film, and semiconductor device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2018501763

Country of ref document: JP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20187023985

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020187023985

Country of ref document: KR

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17756591

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17756591

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1